LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. GIKT OK V Received ...J24r&0j&:. /, J*/ y^ ^7//^ Accessions No. ^* to'/ & Shelf No _ / f ^? C-r GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE BY ALPHEUS CROSBY, OP THB GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE DARTMOUTH COLLEGE. THIRTY-SIXTH EDITION. BOSTON: CROSBY AND NICHOLS, 117 WASHINGTON STREET. 1 8G4. " The LANGUAGE OF THE GREEKS was truly like themselves, it conformable to their transcendent and universal Genius. * * * * GREEK TONGUE, from its propriety and universality, is made for ail that is great, and all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and undei every Form of writing." Harris's Hermes, Bk. III. Ch. 5. " Greek, the shrine of the genius of the old world ; as universal as our race, as individual as ourselves ; of infinite flexibility, of inde- fatigable strength, with the complication and the distinctness of nature herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was exclud- ed ; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English ; with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the sum- mer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and the intensity of ^Eschylus ; not compressed to the closest by Thucydi- des, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thun- ders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean toouh of Demosthenes ! " Coleridge's Study of the Greek Classic Poets, Geu. Introd. HMered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by AI.PHKUS CROSBY, n tlic Clerk's office of the l>istnct Court of the District of New Hampshire PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. THE following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books ; viz. a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scien- tific and complete to accompany him through his whole course. The volume from which the elements of a language are first learned be- comes to the student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be changed in the course of his study without a material derangement of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The familiar remark, " It must be remembered that, if the grammar be the first book put into the learner's hands, it should also be the last to leave them," though applying most happily to grammatical study in general, was made by its accomplished author with particular refer- ence to the manual used by the student. In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced students ; and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate the prin- ciples of the language more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully, than has been usual in grammatical treatises, even of far greater size. At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of the beginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and by the reduction of the most important principles to the form of concise rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation. Many valuable works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, through a cumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the understanding and the memory of the learner. They have been the armor of Saul to the youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I should consult the advantage even of the beginner by a false representation of the language, or by any departure from philosophical accuracy of state- ment or propriety of arrangement. Truth is always better than false- hood, and science than empiricism. To secure, so far as might be, the double object of the work, it haa been constructed upon the following plan. IT PREFACE. First, to state the usage of the language in comprehensive rules and condensed tables, to be imprinted upon the memory of the student. For convenient examples of the care with which brevity and simplicity have been here studied, the reader will permit me to refer him to the rules of syntax, as presented to the eye at a single view in ^f 64, and tc the elementary tables of inflection and formation. Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its his- torical development , as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and the present state of philological science, would permit. The student whc thinks wishes to know, not only what is true, but why it is true ; and to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the reason is often like the silver cord of ^olus, confining a vast number of facts, which otherwise, like the enfranchised winds, are scattered far and wide beyond the power of control. Thirdly, to illustrate the use of the language by great fulness of remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting th language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given to the contrary ; believing that the grammarian has no more right than the author to use indiscriminately, and without notice, the vocabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities, " A party-color'd dress Of patch'd and pye-ball'd languages." The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine them in their connection, have been all cited from classic authors in the precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of the work, these examples have been mostly taken from the purest Attic writers, beginning with ^schylus, and ending with ^Eschines. It was also thought, that the practical value of such examples might be greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, whose works, as those of a model-writer, should be most frequently resorted to; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single work of this author, which could be in the hands of every student as a com- panion to his grammar, in which he might consult the passages re- ferred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a text-book in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the choice, I could not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, and among his writings, the Anabasis. References also abound in the Etymology, but chiefly in respect to peculiar and dialectic forms. PREFACE. V The subject of euphonic laws and changes has received a larger share of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not larger than I felt compelled to bestow, in treating of a language, " Whose law was heavenly beauty, and whose breath Enrapturing music." The student will allow me to commend to his special notice two principles of extensive use in the explanation of Greek forms ; viz. the precession of vowels (i. e. the tendency of vowels, in the progress of language, to pass from a more open to a closer sound ; see 28, 29, 44, 86, 93, 118, 123, 259, &c.), and the correspondence be- tween the consonants v and a, and the vowels a and e ( 34, 46./?, 50, 56-58, 60, 63. R., 84, 100. 2, 105, 109, 132, 179, 181, 200, 201, 213, 248./, 300, &c.). In treating of Greek etymology, I have wished to avoid every thing like arbitrary formation ; and, instead of deducing one form from an- other by empirical processes, which might often be quite as well re- versed, I have endeavoured, by rigid analysis, to resolve all the forms into their elements. The old method of forming the tenses of the Greek verb one from another (compared by an excellent grammarian to " The House that Jack built "), is liable to objection, not only on account of its complexity and multiplication of arbitrary rules, but yet more on account of the great number of imaginary forms which it re- quires the student to suppose, and which often occupy a place in hia memory, to the exclusion of the real forms of the language. To cite but a single case, the second aorist passive, according to this method, is formed from the second aorist active, although it is a general rule of the language, that verbs which have the one tense want the other ( 255. /S). Nor is the method which makes the theme the foundation of all the other forms free from objection, either in declension or in conjugation. This method not only requires the assistance of many imaginary nominatives and presents, but it often inverts the order of nature, by deriving the simpler form from the more complicated, and commits a species of grammatical anachronism, by making the later form the origin of the earlier. See 84, 100, 256. V., 265. In the following grammar, all the forms are immediately referred to the root, and the analysis of the actual, as obtained from classic usage, takes the place both of the metempsychosis of the obsolete, and of the metamorphosis of the ideal. Those parts of Greek Grammar of which I at first proposed to form a separate volume, the Dialects, the History of Greek Inflection, the Formation of Words, and Versification, I have concluded, with the VI PREFACE. advice of highly osteemed frieiuls, to incorporate in this ; so that a single volume should constitute a complete manual of Greek Grammar. To accomplish this object within moderate limits of size and expense, a very condensed mode of printing has been adopted, giving to the volume an unusual amount of matter in proportion to its size. I thank my printers, that, through their skill and care, they have shown this to be consistent with so much typographical clearness and beauty. It has also been found necessary to reserve for a separate treatise those parts of the first edition which were devoted to General Grammar, and which it was at first proposed to include in the present edition as an appendix. I submit to this necessity with the less reluctance, because a systematic attention to the principles of General Grammar ought not to be deferred till the study of the Greek, unless, in accord- ance with the judicious advice of some distinguished scholars, this should be the first language learned after our own ; and because the wish has been expressed, that these parts might be published separ- ately for the use of those who were not engaged in a course of classical tudy. I cannot conclude this preface without the expression of my most sincere thanks to those personal friends and friends of learning who have so kindly encouraged and aided me in my work. Among those to whom I am especially indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while 1 am writing, to a post which he will so much adorn, will not, I trust, withdraw him from that department of study and authorship in which he has won for himself so enviable a distinction ; Professors Felton of Cambridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Hackett of Newton, Sanborn, my highly esteemed associate in classical instruction, Stuart of An- dover, and Tyler of Amherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden, Sophocles of Hartford, and Taylor of Andover. Nor can I conclude without tiie acknowledgment of my deep obligations to previous la- borers in the same field, to the GREAT LIVING, and to the GREAT DEAD Requiescant in pace ! It is almost superfluous that I should mention, as among those to whom 1 am most greatly indebted, the honored names of Ahrens, Bernhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmichael, Fischer, Hartung, Hermann, Hoogeveen, Kiihner, Lobeck, MahV taire, Matthias, Paasow, Rost, Thierech, and Viger. A. C HANOVER, Oct. 13, 184G PREFACE TO THE TABLES. THE following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Grmp mnr. They are likewise published separately, for the greater com t . ience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular Iff rangement are too obvious to require remark ; nor is it less obvi<> ; .. that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when prinu ., together, than when scattered throughout a volume. The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been o.i. *tructed, are the following : I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in grain nnatical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only HU material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which ;i- sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student \.;\- learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, ,-i.ni vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm thai i,. studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of HIM: forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declensn>,>. must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weariness >. the teacher's ear? With the ellipses in the following tables, the p;i> adigms of neuter nouns contain only eight forms, instead of the twtlr. which are usually, and the fifteen which are sometimes, given ; a IK; the paradigms of participles and of adjectives similarly declined cont;i" only twenty-two forms, instead of the usual thirty-six or forty-jiv> See tf 4. II. To give the forms just as they appear upon the Greek pai:* . that is, without abbreviation and without hyphens. A dissected ;. r : abbreviated mode of printing the paradigms exposes the young stud, hi to mistake, arid familiarizes the eye, and of course the mind, wn: fragments, instead of complete forms. If these fragments were s* j arated upon analytical principles, the evil would be less; but they ar- usually cut off just where convenience in printing may direct, so th;<- they contain, sometimes a part of the affix, sometimes the whole afii.v. and sometimes the affix with a part of the root. Hyphens are useiui i Vlii PREFACE TO THE TABLES. in the analysis of forms, but a table of paradigms seems not to be the most appropriate place for them. In the following tables, the affixes are given by themselves, and the paradigms are so arranged in col- umns, that the eye of the student will usually separate, at a glance, the root from the affix. III. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine grammarians. Hence, for example, 1 . The first perfect active imperative, which has no existence in pure writers, has been discarded. 2. For the imaginary imperative forms loraxh, T/#*TI, dldodi dtlxvvdi, have been substituted the actual forms wii), T/#, didov, dilxvv. 3. Together with analogical but rare forms, have been given the usual forms, which in many grammars are noticed only as exceptions or dialectic peculiarities. Thus, fiovhsveKaaccv and and /3oi>lvaa?, i@e{3ov).ti>xsiaav and 34) ; Povfavsa&waav and /SovJUWadwv, fiovtev&driaav and /?ov- [ 35) ; til&ip and hl&ovv (^[ 50) ; ij$ and ijatfa, HJS- Tt and tarai (^f 55). 4. The second future active and middle, which, except as a eupho- nic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly rejected. IV. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impression, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluperfect, the second aorist and future, and the third future belong as regularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name ; when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect and pluperfect , eighty-five, which have the second* aorist active ; fifty, which have the second aorist and future passive ; and forty, which have the second aorist middle ? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers. Carmichael, who has given us most fully the statis- tics of the Greek verb, and whose labors deserve all praise, has gathered, from all the dialects, a list of only eighty-eight verbs which have the second perfect, one hundred and forty-five which have the second aorist active, eighty-four which have the second aorist passive, nd fifty-eight which have the second aorist middle. And, of hia PREFACE TO THE TABLES. IX catalogue of nearly eight hundred verbs, embracing the most common verbs of the language, only fifty-five have the third future, and, in the Attic dialect, only twenty-eight. To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the vener- erable shade of rimrw, but alas ! it is little more than a shade, and, with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced, after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, 'Avri tpiXroirns Nootyr/i, fffooov , 'afius'J ^cax.^rnt, yXuffffu,, rtov, po- clension, Zsy',-, Otil-rous, FXat/j, pitv, offrioy, avtuyiMV, . 15 vie;, vayf, $eav, ff-rio;, iTTiV), Dialectic Forms, . . 15 ^'"$i ... 16 B. Of Declension III., #,, 3. Lingual. it/gagi;, Jeclensions III. and I., T^g, ^UJ, 17 fti/.*s, flrS,-, ^, . 47 2. Xi/, . 49 iii. Lingual, 1. -rtifo, . 50 2. xopil*, . 51 xn. (B.) Liquid Verbs. 1. a.yyiX\u, . . 52 2. p/vw, . . .54 xii. (C.) Double Consonant Verbs. 1. a,v\u or cti/^xvfki, , 55 2. *i*mftfHtt t iXvXfyftfu, 55 xrv. (D.) Pure Verbs. i. Contract, 1. ,W, . . 56 2. 9Ut*, ... 58 3. foxiw, . . .60 iK Verbs in -^t*/, 1 . 'tcrrvfti, ... 62 2. xt'iu-ffSa.!, . . 63 3. rittifu, . . .64 4. 3'i'SeafAi, . . 66 5. 'btiKi/vpi, . .68 6. Qtiftf, ... 69 7. V' -70 8. tiui, . . . 71 9. iT^/, . . . .72 iii. Second Aorists, 1. ?g>,y ..... 73 2. acrt^, . . 73 3. ?yyv, ... 73 4. ?^y, ... 73 xv. (E.) Preteritive Verbs, i. n, ... 74 2. 2s2o/xa and St5/*, . 74 3. ffuu, ... 74 4. KMvpx,, . . . 75 Xl7p.au, ... 75 xn. Changes in the Root, . 76 D. TABLES OF FORMATION. I. Table of Derivation, . n. Pronominal Correlatives, III. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX, IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. A. OF WORDS, B. OF SENTENCES, C. OF METRES, 77 78 80 84 CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. DIALECTS, ..... BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. Mil Page 85 Page CH. 1. CHARACTERS, . 90 Pronunciation, ... 93 History of Orthography, . 95 CH. 2. VOWELS, . . 97 I. Precession, . . 99 II. Union of Syllables, . 100 A. Contraction, . . 100 B. Crasis, . . . 102 C. Apostrophe, . . 104 ' Dialectic Variations, . .104 CH. 3. CONSONANTS, . 108 Euphonic Changes, A. In Formation of Words, 108 B. In Connection of Words, 1 1 3 C. Special Rules, . 114 Dialectic Variations, . .114 BOOK II. ETYMOLOGY. CH. 1. PRINCIPLES or DE- CLENSION, . . . 116 A. Gender, . . .116 B. Number, . . . 118 C. Case, D. Methods, . 119 E. History of Declension, 121 CH. 2. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. I. First Declension, . 126 Dialectic Forms, . .127 II. Second Declension, . 128 Dialectic Forms, . . 1 29 III. Third Declension, . 129 A. Mutes, . . .130 B. Liquids, . . 131 C. Liquid-Mutes, D. Pures, 133 Dialectic Forms, . .139 IV. Irregular Nouns, . 140 CH. 3. DECLENSION OF ADJEC- TIVES AND PARTICIPLES, 146 CH. 4. NUMERALS, . . 152 CH. 5. PRONOUNS. I. Substantive, . 155 II. Adjective, . . .159 CH. 6. COMPARISON, . 163 I. Of Adjectives, . . 1 63 A. In -Ti^oj, -rasTflf, . 1 63 B. In -fwv, -le-TOf, . .165 C. Irregular, . . 166 II. Of Adverbs, . .168 CH. 7. PRINCIPLES OF CON- JUGATION, . . .169 A. Voice, . . . 169 B. Tense, . . .170 C. Mode, ... 171 D. Number and Person, . 171 E. History of Conjugation, 172 CH. 8. PREFIXES OF CONJU- GATION, . . .182 I. Augment, . . 182 II. Reduplication, . .184 III. Of Compound Verbs, 185 Dialectic Use, . . .186 CH. 9. AFFIXES OF CONJU- GATION. I. Classification and Analysis, 187 A. Tense-Signs, . .188 B. Connecting Vowels, 1 90 C. Flexible Endings, . 1 93 II. Union of Affixes and Root, 1 96 A. Regular Open Affixes, 1 96 B. Regular Close Affixes, 1 96 C. Verbs in -^/, . 200 D. Complete Tenses, . 203 Dialectic Forms, . . 208 CH. 10. ROOT OF THE VERB, 215 A. Euphonic Changes, 2 1 7 B. Emphatic Changes, 2 1 9 C. Anomalous Changes, 241 CH. 1 1 . FORMATION OF WORDS, 243 I. Of Simple Words, . 244 A. Nouns, . . .244 B. Adjectives, . . 248 C. Pronouns, . .249 D. Verbs, . . 250 E. Adverbs, . . .251 II. Of Compound Words 252 BOOK III. SYNTAX. CH. 1. THE SUBSTANTIVE. I. Agreement, . 257 II. Use of Numbers, III. Use of Cases, 259 260 CONTENTS. Paee A. Nominative, . . 262 B. Genitive, . . '264 I. Of Departure, . 2'> 4 J. Separation, . 264 2. Distinction, . "265 H. Of Cause, . '-J67 i. 1. Origin, . . '267 2. Material, . 267 3. Supply, . . 268 4. Partitive, . 269 ii.l. Motive, &c., . 274 2. Price, Value, &c., 276 3. Sensible and Men- tal Object, . 276 4. Time and Place, 278 Hi. Active, . . 279 iv. Constituent, . 279 1. Property, . 281 2. Relation, . 281 C. Dative Objective, . 285 I. Of Approach, . 286 1. Nearness, . . 286 2. Likeness, . 287 II. Of Influence, . 287 D. Dative Residual, . 293 I. Instrumental and Modal, 293 ii. Temporal and Local, 295 E. Accusative, . . 296 I. Of Direct Object and Effect, . . 297 Double Accusative, 301 II. Of Specification, . 3O2 in. Of Kxtent, SO i rv. Adverbial, . . 304 F. Vocative, . . 304 CH. 2. TIIR ADJECTIVE. I. Agreement, . . 305 II. Use of Degrees, . .31 2 Cn. 3. THK AKTICLE, . 315 I. As an Article, . . 316 II. As a Pronoun, . CH. 4. TIIK PKONOUN. I. Agreement, II. Special ( )l>servations, A. Personal, &c., . B. ALro;, C. Demonstrative, . D. Indefinite, E. Relative, F. Complementary, G. Interrogative, . H. "Axxoj, . . . CH. 5. THK VERB. I. Agreement, . . II. Use of the Voices, A. Active, . . B. Middle, . C. Passive, III. Use of the Tenses, A. Definite and Indefinite. B. Indefinite and Complete, C. Future, IV. Use of the Modes, A. Intellective, . . As used in sentences, i. Desiderative, . II. Final, . . . HI. Conditional, . iv. Relative, v. Complementary, B. Volitive, . C. Incorporated, i. Infinitive, II. Participle, III Verbal in -TISJ, CH. 6. THK I'AKTU:I,K, . A. The Ailvi-rb, B. The Preposition, C. The Conjunction, . D. Concluding Remarks, Page 325 327 329 329 332 333 336 337 344 346 347 348 352 353 354 356 358 360 364 36a 367 367 372 374 37.5 378 378 381 381 385 390 3 f '6 396 "7 397 4~i Phi 500 ch XI Uhi 600 ps vn Psi 700 5 !a w Omega 800 f Buv Vau 6 q Komia Koppa 90 sh Savnl Sampi 900 10 TABLES. ou OJU ,56 lu, 79 de ft ex v ni IV xa H 2. B. LIGATURES, [ 10. 2.] 0.1 CC7TO av rr & OCT 3 Of a&ai OCt OT *X 10.1 TO 70V iav vv VTtO fl 3. I ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 11 H 3. C. VOCAL ELEMENTS. I. VOWELS, SIMPLE AND COMPOUND. [ 24-26.] Class I. IT. III. IV. V A O E U I Orders. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. S-xind* , T r , (Short, I. a o v I Simple Vowels. < T C Long, 2. a o T\ v t C Proper, 3. di 01 a m Diphthongs in L. < . (Improper, 4. d a # vi ... u i . (Proper, 5. dv ov tv Diphthongs in v. < _ ( Improper, b. dv uv qv II. CONSONANTS. [49-51.] A. Consonants associated in Classes and Orders. Class L Class II. Class HI. Orders. Labials. Palatals. Linguals. 1. Smooth Mutes, n x T 2. Middle Mutes, ft 7 8 3. Rough Mutes, y % & 4. Nasals, p ? v 5. Double Consonants, ^ | f B. Additional Semivowels. A Q 6 CONSONANTS (SECOND ARRANGEMENT). ( Smooth, TT, x, T. C Mutes, < Middle, {3, y, d. Smgle Consonants, ] ^ Rough qp^ ^ / c, , ( Liquids, A, u. v. o, y nasal ( Semivowels, {sibilant,,,/ Double Consonants, y/, , ^. III. BREATHINGS. [ 13.] Rough Breathing, or Aspirate ( l ). Smooth or Soft Breathing ( ' ). 4 TABLKS. [II 4 II. ETYMOLOGY. 5j 4. REMARKS. I. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome 10 teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application >T rule, the tables ot' paradigms have been constructed with the following f. li.pses, which will be at once supplied from general rules. 1. In the paradigms of DECLENSION, the Voc. sing, is omitted whenever ft has the same form with the Worn., and the following cases are omitted "hroughout (see 80) ; a. ) The Voc. piur., because it is always the same with the Noin. tf.) The Out. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen. y.) The Jcc. and Voc. dual, because they are always the same with the JNom. rm, )." In the application of this table, the forms of the root must be distinguished, if it has moie than a single form ( 254). III. In the table of translation (U 33). the form of the verb must, of course, be adapted to the number and person of the pronoun ; thus, I am jt'tinning, tkou art planning, he is planning, &/G. For the MIDDLE VOICE, li-uige the forms of " plan " into the corresponding forms of"so forms, the ahbn'via lions /Eol and /E. denote /Eolic ; Alex., Alexandrine; Alt., /Utic, lio-oi and B., Bcnotic; Cornm , Common ; Dor. and D , Doric ; Ep. and I) , F.pir :; Hoi , Hellenistic; Ion. and I., Ionic; Iter. and It, Iterative; <>., Old ; Poet and P., Poetic. V. A star (*) in the tables denotes that an affix or a form is wanting. Pnrenthescs are sometimes used to inclose unusual, doubtful, peculiar, or Mii|i|>le:nent;:rv forms. In UT! 21), 30, the x and >'* of th tense-signs, as dropped in tlir si,-,, nil ty a hyphen from the rest of th- ;if1iv. 1] 5, 6. A. TABLES OF fl o. i. AFFIXES OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. Dec. I. ' Pec. II. Dec. III. Mu.sc. Fern. M. F. Neut. M. F. Neu Sing. Nom. C, lytf I , 1) oc | ov $ * Gen. ov \ etc, r t g ov og Dat. , ry M i Ace. ',' T}V ov >', U Voc. , ri | ov * * Plur. Nom. at, ot | a EC Gen. ftp a*y air Dat. (tig o , Gen. w o ^ (o#) oc. 2anQ M'a&c. *, o. Dat. (TJ) o * i. Ace. n ('?) o * r, . Neut. 3, *. Voc. o() * * Plur. Nom. o * fc. 1 and 2, Neut. . Gen. a * w. Dat. a * (eat). 3, at. I and 2, tj. Aec. a o * (vg) ag. Neil* . D-ial Nom. a o * . Gen. \ u 1 o * IV. 3, Oil'. 14 TABLES. FIRST DECLENSION. Ifi 7, fi 7. m. NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. A. MASCULINE. , steward, o, sailor. $, son of Atreus. a, Mercury. , norfA iij : *, Ion. tj Ep. aXuSi/n, */Vxcc, -yet. j, Dor. a G. t/, Old, da 'Arfifido, Bo^'ido. Old, a vi Ion. tu, u ' 'Arpttiiit, lloe'iu. P. G. w, Old, aw Dor. & 'Ar^iida, 'E^a. Ion. iw j (Ion. nf }^/('). .ZEol. a,i( recif Ap. Rh. U 9, 10-] SECOND DECLENSION. 15 fl 9. iv. NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION A. MASCUIJNE AND FEMININE. o, word, o, people. ^, way. o, mind. 6, temple. S. N. Jioyog G. Ao'/ov D. Ao'^w A. Ao/ov V. Ao^e P. N. Ao/CH G. AO/WV D. A., dfjpog odog drj^ov odov odw odov nds yoov, vov *o, vaj vovv vov voc, ruov, vo voi VOWJ', VWV vooig, volg di/lpoi odol dtiftrnv odwv dfyoig odolg drjpovg odovg voovg, vovg vaovg, veug vuwv, vftav vuoig, vfuig I). N. G. \6yoiv drjpoiv o<5tJ oddlv row, vw vooiv, voiv vccov^ vav B. NEUTER. TO, fig. TO, wing. TO, part. TO, bone. TO, chamber, S. N. avxov mtQov ^.oolov oaisor^ oarovv aixayswv G. avxov nrfoov uoolov OOFTC'OV, oaTov . avwytw D, - , >, 3 ~ - \ 3 ' . O~VKO) 7TTOO) flOQKti 0(JTfi), OaTO) P . N. aVX TTTfOM G. aVXOJV TtttQWV D. auxot? megolg fiOQioig oaxsoig^ oaiotg avwyewg D. N. awxca TTTfow IIOQIW ocm'w, oaTtu avioyfot G. avxo/i' TiTcootv fioQiotv oo"TOiv, oaTolv avuysfov U 1 O. DIALECTIC FORMS. S N. ?, Laconic, -aXs% 70.4. S. D y, Boeot. i7 airy, r!J G. oo, Ep. a/a Ta?o X7<9/a. P. N. , Boeot. P- xA.t " Dor. w TU Xoyw. (G. u, Ion. iuv ' Vivi (Ion. tu BaTT&i, K^tf/Viw.) D. f, Old, // Tor)* avrotpi, Ep. a9v ovgetvo&i ' Ta/j D. G. a/, Ep. a/?y 16 TABLES. [fl U1I. v. NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. A. MUTE. 1. LABIAL. 2. PALATAI,. o, vulture, favein. o, raven, o, fa go at. fa phalanx. f h hair S1VT ' i ' j. >'?. . IN. yt'Jjf/ qpAfc^ X0) BlJ G. yvnoq rov, TO, ear J Otff or off xeo, xfo't/)v, wal xfoor fl 12 13.J THIRD DECLENSION. 17 S. N. G. D. A. V. P. N. G. D. A. D N. G. S. N. G. D. A. V. P. N. G. D. A. D. N. G. S. N. G. D. A. V. P. N. G. D. A. D. N. G. U 1 S. B. LIQUID. o, harbour, o, deity. t h nose. o, beast, o, orator, r^hnna Ar^/Tjv dalpwv $ig -&r,Q QI'JTMQ %t-r\) lipivog daipovog qlrog \}ri()6g ^logoe X f '("''? dotlfAOV QIV QTjJOQ lifjtvoiv datftavav QIVWV -d-r^viv faroytav kifjevi dn/fioat glut drjQal 6r)TO(f rntv yiytiiTOtv dTlOi!t'ItX 18 TABLES. 11 14. D. PURE. . Masculine and Feminine, o, jackal, o, hero. o, weevil, o, i\, sheep. o,Jish. S. N. G. D. A. V. I 1 . N. G. D. A. D. N. G. (w) &0)WV Qnol tywtiq dwotv rjQtaoiv xi g xlog xli xiv x'ffg xlwv xi at xtf xioiv oig oiog oil olv oifc, oig oiwv olai ota;:, oig o'is ololv fa&vt o, knight. S. N. Iniievg G. inntwg D. Imie'i, iTintl o, y, OX. fiovg fioog pd'C TJ, old woman, y, ship, ygotvg vavg A. mnsn PVV yyuvv vctvv V. Innsv /Sov YQOV P. N. In Tit eg, Innilq pfae yqitfg rfa (J. Innttav fiouv youwv VfUV D. Inrifvai ftovai y naval vaval A. inntug, mniiq /5oot^, ftovg yguag, ygavg vuvg D. N. Innss {toe youf Vt)S a. Innioiv fioolv yquoiv vtolv 6, cubit. 7;, city. TJ, trireme. S. N. G. D. A. V. P. N. G. D. A. D. N U TioAfi', nohv 71 6h TTokffc, Tioleig nuq, ,-, *dJuig TtoJifF, no\r\ nrixioiv 11 14, 15.] ri, echo. r), shame. S. N. r t %(a uldwg G. wooc, yxovg t<5oo, aldovg D. TJ^O/., 77/01 i<5o'i, nldol A. 7^o', 7)^00 aldoa, aidfo V. r^ol aldot THIRD DECLENSION. o, Socrates. 6, Piraeus. S N. G. D. A. /lfl()(XlC( 9 o, Hercules. 19 lfgax\i] TO, S N. G. D. Itl/U, P N. G. D. D. N. G. /3. Neuter. TO 15. DIALECTIC FORMS. TO, honor. ygctai ysQctt, ysgdoiv, S. G. araj, Ion. ? tos, Ion. wf 9-^st iwy, Ep. o; /3, Poet, a tugia, i%3-u(t. ece, Ion. a?/ 'lai/v, A*jTa?v Dor. y "H^wv, Aar a, Ep. ? /Sj. V. If, ^Eol. 2dtf*aTt. P. N. us, Old Att. f /3a-/Xf. Ep. ^f /Sata-/X5Jf. Ion. S? /3aa-;Xf . i/f, Ion. and Dor. /? , Poet. y, x^ Ion. Q/^ G. flv, Ion. 6&;v %tiviuv, a.v!iciav )3aa'/X7wv. Ay, Ion. and Dor. /wv raX/. D. (), Old, () xi/gtr/. Poet. e-a-/(y) Jfri-. ifi(v), Ep. a-

?? Ion. a; /3ae Comin. 7j / i/f, Ion. and Dor. D. G. a/y, Ep. aja, via, v)t/ V. m'i P. N. 1//0/, VI'.Tf v7tSi "ovotn, Saugi P. N. J^*T, ^0(>n (pOet.) ^OVPXTtX,, ^OVfftK C* \ ' \ ' ' D. $ogac|i A. 5 ?rX/v, -TaX/ (.iiffi Pind., ToXiffi Hdt.) A. ivrirtjetf waX/j(roXrf Hdt.), roXf/f, , ITlysses. ', Patroclus. 8. N. *O0W-|Jf, *O5u-iwj n*TfaxXf A. 'OJttf-irj, 'Otvfffia.) "OSwa-Sa, 'O3t/(r>5 Ilar^axXav, V. 'OJt/tf-tf-ii/, 'OSt/iriti IlTf*X, 1[ 17.] ADJECTIVKS. 1] I 7. vn. ADJECTIVES OF Two TERMINATIONS. A. OK THE SECOND DECLENSION, o, iy (iCtyUSt) TO o, tj (unfading) TO &VT >' - ' ? ' ' - J ' ' ' L\. ftO(.xo uO/xor (j. udfxov D. M(5/X(W A. ,XC V. ^ P. N. ', G. o5/j D. awxoif A. otwxovf D. N. <5/. G. (J t ', nyjfjuoi, cc/oo) ayyyota, B. OF THE THIKO DECLENSION. o, 17 (male) TO o, TJ (pleasing) TO o, ? c / (two-footed) TO SVT i' > < >' j < i>. ttoor/v aoofv G>' S J > , (XOOlVQg - f. A. (>!JJ V. UQufV P. N. ^r^ CT. itooivwv D' s \ U(J(Jf(Jl A. uoutvuc dinov* oim>d, dlnovv dinov dlnodfg dlnoda D. N. (Vp'ofi'f G. ad u ft o, ^ (evident) TO S. N. tf V /; ? om D. tfiiy-fT, A. V. <5fc r 7IO<5 ^(7IO(5oV o, ^ (greater) TO P. N. og)6fc, G. ov ooyrjg qpiA/oi Cf>i\ict aoffw aoqr?; cpihov (fiUav ao(f6v oocpyv cpdiwv cpiUoig cplhat cpiUag cpillfx tptMaiv o (golden) XOV XQv o (double) dinloof, dinlovg dtnkoov, fiin).ov o^T/ofii, OinJuii Contacted. XQvasa, c. %ovg aoqpwc aoqpw tfoqpa XQVOOW Xyvutu, , dinlovt , dintix fl 19, 20. ADJECTIVES. S. N. G. D. A. P. N. G. D. A. D. N. G. 1 O. B. OF TTDS THIRD AND FIRST DECLENSIONS. o (black) y [Afidvoiv o (agreeable) S. N. G. D. A. V. P. N. G. D. A. D. N. G. TO o (all) n TO petixv nag naoa. ndv nctv-ioq ndayg navTi nday ndvra naoav tittava ndvifg ndaai navict ndvTMV naawv ndai, ndaaig ndviag ndaag ndvrs ndaa ndvTOiv ndoociv TO o (sweet) TO rjdkog fjdslag ydei, ydsl rjdfln rjdvv ydsluv rjdu r/dsfg, i]di7.g Tjdiioti yd slot ig ydug ydtlag yds lei ydtlatv ydte rideoiv o (great) S. N. psyixg G. (jiyuiov D A V. r. N. G. D. A. D. N. G. C. OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS. i TO o (much) y nolvg noUy n ohvv (many) nolknl nottovg TO n o A v 24 TABLES. NUMERALS. Homeric Forms of ft aXvg, irouXvs craXXo? 7 jEsch.) iraXXw S. N. G. A. P. N. G. D. A. S. o (wi/d) ^ TO N. n()MO? 7i(>f7 (jr. nyciov nyuilug D. 7iju'o> 7i(jitf-l(x A. n y a o t> nyutluv , TevXuv (?roXt yEsch.) ^aXXrf jy, iraXXswv P. ot 7i y it oi t nyntai nynea nyuiatv rryixawv nation;, nyusui 7i(juflai ovdsai ovdivag Ep. Dor. Ion. Ep. N. Ins, *i> pin, & G. /u-'^ii- r,f D9- - . tu (*''?> y A ' v '- Late. Ion. Late. Ion. elioat/uoi, N. OUdU.fJt.UV oi>oetfjt,o7f .' -ij M. F. N., *>o. M. F. N., both. D. N. A. <5uo, ^i^w G. D. dvolv, dutiv (Att.) P. D. dual (rare) aptfolr Ep. G. D. A. M. F. (ft? Poet. D. Ep. Ion. J/ai, -/, - d'j/o/;, -o~'Toiv cpuvuvaair IITIOVJOIV liTiovaatv 26 TABLES. 5. Aorist i. Active. 6 (having raised) % S. N. au G. D. A. P. N. agavTfg G. D. A. u aguaaiq D. N. Qttvii G. 6. At nst Passive. (having appeared) y (favtig cpavslaa tpavevrog cpavevra (favsvrsg (favivnav (pavelaai cpavstauv ' (jtf * G. l/nov, povi 1 aoyt out D. ffjoL, poll" ao/t oit Ai ' '4. -J. c'J. . f t uB, pit (jfT T P. N. yptfs i>pdg O($ti$ G. r t pf D. N. vot o(/f') G. VOJV Homeric Forms. S. N. lyy, lyu ffv, rtivn G. ip'io, \p.Cto, \[*.iv, ff'u>\, fftTa, ffiu^, ?at **<>, *^t *9t ytti?t> ^6^> (TfSfy, T-iar* D. tftai, (*.ol\ cat, ro/t rtw i~i <"t A. i^, /Kit "^t *t> **> ^t P. N. flftlTf, a.f/-u-i( Vftlff) Sftuts G. vpiuv, riftiicai tift'ituvj vpi'iu* ffQlurf, trQtiuv, ffQeUt D. ^*?y, vifrtv, Zfjiiv, ufJt.'iv, vfjt.fu(^), vpfjt ^ ^N D. N. l*r(MMf?) M' Additional Forms. S. N. out, l*> B. TU D., raw B. TSOU D. D. ip'n D. r/y D. Frt M., 7y or ?y D. A. T, T/t D. Fit ^-> 't D - P P. N. fift'nt I., '^f D. y^sj I., y^tf D. Neut. G. ' AfAUV D., Kf&ftlUt ^B. LfJLLiial yK. A. 'a^s D. ' V> ^ D - W D., 2 D. N. vwi B. 28 TABLES. B. REFLEXIVE. 2d P. M. (of thyself) F. 1st P. M. (of myself) F. S. G. I, D. A. Sftaviov I^UVD]V P. G. /^ueu' aviutv ijjiuv uviutv v^nav aviuv I K i](4iv otviotg Tjfitv ctvinlg v^ilv auiolg A. qpagrnvsovg rjfiag aviag v^iai, uviovg 3d P. M., of himself. S. G. kdtVTOV, UVTOV D. euvToj, avito A. knviov, uinov P. G. kuviwV) avTwv D. eaviot?, avrotg A. UTOV, ttVTOU? acwi'zoy, ffwi'roy afnvrrjg, ancvrj]g OtttVTb), OUl'TM OSUVlij, (IfOtVlOV, OCtl'tOW UVIOJV UVTU$ F., of herself. SUVTTJg, UVTTjV VVTUV avroilg N., of itself lavto, avi9 ', aviu New Ionic. S. G. iftiuvroZ l^t/ writ ffluwrou r!Ai/, -a, - P. G. aurctvTur, D. -oif, -an, A. -us, -as, -&, Dor. M. (o/ one another} F. P. G. a D. A. C. RECIPROCAL. N. M. N. F. D. A. aUq'to P. G. x;.x Dor. xxx ^ TO ttVlOg fXVTfj avio G IV . TOV trig 3 ~ 1 - avTov avTrjg D. TW Tfl vrw avTrt A. TOV Tlfv > 9 3 */ i>. N. ol al T avTol avTal avia G. TWr TCOV UVTWV aviwv D. TO?? Talg ctVTolg avToug A. TOUJ Tg > > 3 e. D.N. T avTtu avTa G. TOiV TttTv CtVTOlV UVTttlv S. N. ' D. KVra, D., -^ I. G. ra?a E., ru D. rZs D. ttvrolo E., -iou I. auras D., -{; I. D. r D. alriif I. awra D., .i ? I. A. r D. > ^ T~\ awray JJ. , -in, I. P. N. ra/ E. D. T; E. D. G. rawvO. , ravD. KVTIUI \. awra^vO ., -av D., -tut I D. ra7 0. ,>/ ., r5;5 /^ r r d. (av 0^ D. olg aig A. ovg ocg Tota^g Talads J) < ff rot'afo To5e bi'CTtQog Ep. D.N. o" "o TOl'dfl T(5? 3P. S.S^ Poet. G. otv lv Tolvds Talvds P. aap T00? Dialectic and Paragogic Forms. S. N. ?O. "D. ?j E., c? f D. G. Ta, aay E. D. D. A. '' D. P. D. jjav, jf E. V4 \4 I T> T) ' - 7 i - / XV *ldf Tatf 1 1 . Jr. ufAo;, etfAOf U., rtjffoi ' 'etftirtgos D., a^t &C. a.[x.[*.ios JEi. 2 P. S. rs^ D. E. O., ToTtTOiffl, P. 'iifAOi O., i 5sff K. 3 P. S. las E. D. P. ,*', 0. 30 TABLES. PRONOUNS. Demonstrative. M. (this) F. N. M. (so much) F. N. S. JST. QVXOC, avir] lot/To ToaovTog xoaavxrj xoaovxo, xoaovio* G. TOVTOV TaVXIjg xoaovxov xoaavxrjg D. TOVTM XOtVTT] xoaovrca xoaavxr) A. TOVTOV xavxrjv XOOOVXOV xoaamtjv P. N. 01)101 aVTUl TUVTU XOOOVTOL xoactvxai loauvia G. TOVTWV TOVTWV TOOOVTWV xoaovTwv D. TOVTOig xavTctig xooovToig xoaavxaig A. XOVXOVg xavxag Toaovxovg xoaavxdig 1). N. XOVTW xavia Toaovxia xooama G. TOVTOIV xavxaiv TOOOVTOIV xoaavxcuv Paragogic Declension. S. N. G. D. A. P. N. G. OUTOffl TOVTOUl < .< VTYll Tavn Mixed Paragogic Forms. rat/rayf, r TUVVOUTOiltj XSIVOUl, TWAlK rvvvovriai. Adv. ounviri, rovrcyt rauryi rourot raurwvi ourou uurarfi rat/Ti roiovro"n, roictural*, voffouruvi, txitvuvi, &C. , wv, rovravi, &C. B. INDEFINITE. Simple Indefinite. Interrogative. Relative Indefinite. M. F. (any, some) N. M. F. (who?) N. M. (whoever) S. N. xlg xl rig xl oaiis G. xlvog, xov xtvog, xov ovrivog, oxov D. TtV/, TW T/Vt, TW WTtVi, OTW F. N. o T A. xiva xlva m ovxiva yvxiva P. N. riveg Ttv, xlvsg xlva oixivfg alxivfq Tiv, axxa G. xivtav [TT xlvwv 7 f o (avTtvcav D. xial xlai oiaTioi) oxoiai 7 A. Tirag xlvctq ovauvag aaTivag D.N. xi vi rlvs (axtvt anvs G. xivoiv xivoiv 7 aivxivoiv Homeric Declension of rift fitt and ortf -= tffrtf. S. N. r} S T} vif ri ent ;, 'err. G. ria, nu 9 a/ ^f* 10 i' 11 m' 13 !/ 14 & 15 ,.' 16 tf ' 17 i? 18 ?> 19 i&' 20 x' 21 x' 30 A' 40 ' 50 v' 60 ' 70 o' 80 ;r' 90 ? 100 Q' 200 a' 300 i' NUM v'offai ; Ao many 9 trotroi, a certain number. ixofot, how many soever. M^few. roXXai, many. r'ofot t so many. oraiy as many. fig, ///a, IV, one. 8vo, 8v(*)f two. rgfig, tgia, three. ?, riaaaga, four. B, Jive. &, six. kmd, seven. OXTU, eight. Ivvscn, nine, dexoc, ten. tvdsxa, eleven, dudexa, twelve. nivTfxaldfxot exxaldfxa emaxaldexa oxicaxaldsxa evvsaxaldexa ti'xoGiv eig, fig xal tl'xoot TQlCtXOVTU TtaaagaxovTot evivrjxovTct IxazoV 2. Ordinal. vroffros ; which in order f ot, one of how many 9 oToa-Tos, whichsoever in order. iXiyoo-rcf, one of few. iraXXo^raf, one of many t or, one following many. JiQUTog t -r),'Or, first. dfvisQog^Ut-ov, second. TQiTog,-i],-ov, third. ;, fourth. - fifth. txiog, sixth, tfidoftog, seventh, oydoog, eighth. tvaTog, svvaiog, ninth, dexarog, tenth, tvdtxarog, eleventh. 8(adtxaiog, twelfth. TQiaxaidexvtiog reaaaguxaidtxaTog exxaidsxarog emaxatdsxarog oxTwxaidsxaxog fWfaxaids'xaiog flxoaTog flXOGTOg TT^tUTOff TQiaxooTog TtaaagaxooTog dinxootomoc TQtaxoaioi TABLES. NUMERALS. [1125 400 v' 500 700 y' 800 o>' 900 1,000 , 2,000 ,/? 10,000 ,t 20,000 ,x 1 00,000 /? rsiQctxoaioi ntviaxouioi h^nxooiot oxraxo'atoi evvaxouioi 4.' Multiple. 3. Temporal. Inter. rtrraTaf ; on what day 9 1. (av&rjufQog, on the same day.) dnXoog, dnlovg, simple, single 2. dsvTtQaiog, on the second day. 3. TfjiTcilog, on the third day. 4. ifTctQTcuog, on the fourth day 5. TiffiTiTalog, on the Jifth day. 6. kxntiog, on the sixth day. 7. tfidopciiog, on the seventh day. 8. oydooilog, on the eighth day. dinlovg, double. ;, triple. ; t quadruple. ^, quintuple. ;, sextuple, tnranlovg, septuple, octuple. 5. Proportional. II. ADVERBS. Inter. III. SUBSTAN- TIVES. , quantity^ number. St fewness. *otu.vr1.a. ct*>.a.aiot , many fold. a-aXAax/; , many times. 1. (I'troc, equal.") uriaS, once. (jordc, monad. 2. di7i'f.dotog, twofold, dig, twice. dvdg, (lucid. 3. iQinldviog, threefold. TQIC, thrice. iQidg, triad. 4. Tf.TQctn](.dviog rfiydxig, four times. 5. 6. 7. 8.0 9. 10. 20. 100. 1,000. 10,000. ttcig dtxnxig tixoaaxtg ixarovidxig oyduug ivvitig dtxdg flxdg 11 26, 27, 28. CONJURATION. C. TABLES OF CONJUGATION ^1 26. i. THE TENSES CLASSIFIED. I. PRIMARY. Time. 1- Present. 2. Future. Relations. 1 Definite. PRESENT. 7 am writing. I shall be writing. II. SECONDARY. 3. Past. IMPERFECT. lYQutfov, I was writing. '2. Indefinite. FUTURE. AORIST. * 7 write. 7 shall write. tyQctifJU) 1 wrote. 3. Complete. PERFECT. yey^aqpw, 7 have written. * 7 shall have written. PLUPERFECT. evs^aqpeiv, 7 had written. I. Actual INDICATIVE. 7 am writing. 27. n. THE MODES CLASSIFIED. I. DISTINCT. A. INTELLECTTVB. 2. Contingent. . Present. . Past SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE. A. Substantive. INFINITIVE. TV) tcri/e. 7 may write. B. VOLITIVB. IMPERATIVE. INCORPORATED. might write B. Adjective. PARTICIPLE. Writing. 2 8. HI. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. PREFIXES. TENSES. Active. PRESENT, Augm. IMPERFECT, FUTURK FUT. n., Augm. AORIST, Augm. AOR. n., Redpl. PERFECT, Redpl. PERF. n., a. Augm. Redpl. PLUPERFECT, x Augm. Redpl. PLUPERF. n., i/ Redpl. FUT. PERF. , 9 ftt r* , r xot Middle. AFFIXES. tfteii, fteti eptjr, fttit Passive. 34 TABLES. [fl 29 IT 29. iv. AFFIXES OF THE Present. Imperfect. md. S. Nude. 1 ^ Euphonic. 0) Nude. Euphonic v ov 2 f etf C C 31 \ Gt(V J 81 w p 1 niv 0/tf ftsv o/ucv 2 is T T CT6 3 vai(v), aai(v) ovat(i') aav O y D. 1 H" 0/1 V //fv opev 2 iov flOV TOV SlOt 3 iov flOV J1]V 111)* JSubj, , S. 1 fit) 2 77? 3 ' P. 1 ' v 2 3 toot(v) D. 1 tapsv 3' 1JTOV IjTOV Opt. S. 1 l n v OlfJ.1 2 lr t g QIC 3 117 01 P. 1 //,', t|Uey Ol(.ltV 2 /JJTC, ITS out O ' ~ OlSV D. 1 *Vfv, t^uev OlMV 21 - ItfTOVf tlOV 0110V 3 tTj'njv, /r^y OITTJV Imp. S. 2 v9t, j, a 3 iw iito P. 2 T . 6T6 o itaoaV) vnav iitaaav^ o; D. 2 iov Toy 3 TWV Inf. MM .Part. N. yrff, yiffa, y D. 1 aopsv aaptv x-apsv x-sifjiev 2 (jtiov aaiov x-aiov x-fixov 3 OttOV it x-aiov x-dirv 'Subj. S. 1 0(0 (x-w) 2 ays ( x ~?/?) - 3 *9 P. 1 aw^ucv (x-WfAfv) 2 OlJIt (x-rjre) 3 o(aoi(v) (X-MOI-V) D. 1 aw/icv (x-w^uev) 2 ajjiov (x-yrov) 3 orjTOV (x-7]TOv) Opt. S. 1 aoifit aaifit (x-oifti) 2 aotg oaig, atiaq (x-ot?) 3 aoi aoti, aa(v) (x-ot) P. 1 ooifisv aaififv (x-oifisv \ 2 aoiis aaire (x-OtT) 3 aoisv aaitv, osiav (x-oiey) D. 1 aotpev aatutv (x-O//iv) 2 aonov OttlTOV (x-OtTOv) 3 (JOITT)V aaiTijv (x-ohriv) Imp. S. 2 999 (x-e) 3 ao^rw (x-TO)) P. 2 anrs [TWV (x-6T) 3 aarwaay, ay- (x-Twav, x-oi^wy^ D. 2 ffWTOV (x-eroy) 3 auiwv (x-h W fit &Ct 010 OtTO OtVTO ov Inf. Part. a^fi)av, oOtar e'a^wantv, iadtav odov ea&ov uftwv a^a* N. G. -TJ, -ov Ojuevoc, -?, -< fit'tov -n$ Ofiivov, -r]g (pevoq to) (ptvo? ft) (pevoi y (flfVW CO (fievog d'rjv) ((twos ffys) (flfVOS ti'T)) (|U6'Ot i'rjf.tti (pe'voi d'rjanv) ao -o 11 30.] CONJUGATION. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Fut. Mid Aor. Mid. Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass. tod. S. 1 4 3 a/7, act afiai a a) aro P. 1 2 3 oops ft a OtO&8 OOVTCU ad^if&a aaa^e aayro D. 1 2 3 OBO&OV oea&ov oao&ov Subj. S. 1 2 3 orjTctt P. 1 2 3 mtfu&a ayo&s OWVTOtl D. 1 2 3 oyo&ov OTJO&OV Opt. S. 1 2 3 0010 OOtTO oalpijv oaio aairo P. 1 2 3 ooipf&a OOlO&S OOIVTO oaia&s OttlVTO D. 1 2 3 oolps&a ooio&ov aolo&rjv oalfis&a oaio&ov Imp. S. 2 3 oat ado&w P. 2 3 oao&s ado&waav, ado&wv D. 2 3 onadov oda&aiv Inf. ofo&ai aaa&at Part. N. G. oopsvog Qopivov occpfvog anf-ifvOV &-1QOOITO &-1JT8 88 TABLES. 11131. s ! JS n i! 4 iid ** UetiE til AJBIUIJJ -* *^ " >8 * 2%j^"^^ ^2S5 |._I_2_UJ 5.^^ i 8AllBJ9dlUJ ^b bb bbsrk XjBpU009g * ~ X >-T ^ '8 *.O* *" fe i:^ieV i? 1 '^JBUUJJ llli,! in H Pfl H '9AISSBJ 109JJ8J pUB ISUO^ npa a S 2 \ ' S IPPIIM P UB 9A nV Jsuoy V* 3~ J9dn W 3 3 S 3 3 V 333 9AUOy 109JJ8J ' 9 IPP!IAI P UB 9^poy isuoy ,*?*.* H.H.M, 8AI6SBJ l09JJ8dnjJ pUB 109JJ9J OAissBj ojninj bbbbbb bVsbbb ?????? I f I f f 9AISBBJ JKIJuy 4^44^7 77777 >8 TPP!W pUB9Aiioy 'isuoy PUB gjninj riTiv; rrr^i eo - eo -"Weo ,; 1f 32. j CONJ7GATION. JH ~* S gJ s * ? -.*' JF e . o s tir ^ -8 8 u ~ s 11 C 2 3 xw ^- fc- **** i ! v S * 4 S M s^ 1 - 1 i *i it -4- i " i, =r . a * l i 'i T* . C 8 ,y =r- .f k i ii*,. a ^' y. "" ^ S K a << < b ^ < g 8 3 i* $ ^li 8 I 'I * I . Q W w i il r h v. (8 '8 1 ^ *" f s^ a f* si ,s if 4 4 fl-Sd ? ^ S S 3 E fe ? - 8 ^* ^ C i 1 . > -f S S> s" jj ^ 5* . 2 8 v> 2 * . $J -J % S- 8 S j-Q ^ *' S^ T N 8 * b 5- o ca. ^v ' ^1=3 . 5s>. JT *-. - ^ <^ o. W ' s ~ 40 TABLES. [1188 I 33. vin. THE ACTIVE VOICE OF THE Ind. S. 1 / 2 Thou, You 3 He, She, It Present. D. 1 We two 2 You two 3 They two Imp. S. 2 Do thou P. 2 7>o yoM 3 Let them D. 2 Do you two 3 JLel them two Infinitive, planned. ^ be planning, " or plan. To be planning, or To plan. Imperfect. P. 1 We am planning, was planning 2 F, FOM or or 3 They plan. planned. D.I ratoo 2 FOM two ~~ 3 TAy too Subj.S. 1 1 2 7%0M, FOM 3 He, She, It P. 1 We may plan, 2 F, FOM can plan, 3 They D. 1 We too > or plan. 2 FOM too 3 They two Opt. S. 1 7 2 TYioM, FOM 3 He, She, It P. 1 We might plan, should plan, 2 Fc, FOM fl Thru would plan, could plan, Participle, Planning. 1133.] CONJUGATTON. 4) VERB fiovXeva (H 34) TRANSLATED. Future. Aoriat, Perfect Pluperfect planned, shall plan, have planned, or had planned, will plan. or plan. * have planned, had planned may plan, may have planned, can plan, can have planned, plan, or have planned. might plan, might have planned, should plan, should plan, should have planned, or would plan, would plan. would have planned, could plan, could have planned, plan, or have planned, plan, or have planned. To be about To plan, or m i i to plan. To have planned. T have P lanned - About to plan. \ Having planned 42 TABLES. Lfl 34 ix. ACTIVE VOICE OF THE Present Imperfect. Future. Ind. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 ftovJ*.vovfft tfiovksvov fiovktvtiovai D. 2 3 Subj. S. I 2 @ovlevi]$ 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 2 Opt. S. 1 - _ . , 2 SovAsvoif povJisvaoi^ 3 P. I 2 fiovfavout 3 ffovltitoifv fiovfavaouv D. 2 3 Imp. S. 2 povltve 3 P. 2 3 D. 2 3 Infin. /Jot/iet'ft> ftovJitvaeiv Part. ftovleviov /JovAevawx REGULAK CONJUGATION. 43 REGULAR VERB AoriiL efiovktvaav fiovltvaaitv, fiovlfvaatTov la, to plan, to counsel. Perfect. Pluperfect. fitfiovfovxars e fit {So v A e vx eta v, 14 TABLES. 111 35. H 35. x. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES OP (In the Middle Voica Present Imperfect. Future Mid. Ind S. 1 povktvouai 2 3 P. 1 2 fiovltvsa&s 3 D. 2 3 Subj. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 2 @ov)ivi)a&ov Opt. S. 1 povltvoii 2 fiovlevoio 3 P. 1 2 fiovktvota&e 3 D. 2 3 Imp. S. 2 fiovlevov 3 (Jovlivta&a) P. 2 3 D. 2 {Sovltviadov 3 Infill. Part. Povlsvaoio Povjisvaoiro Povlsvtwtrio i; 35.] RKGULAK CONJUGATION. 45 THE REGULAR VERB /SowUtfo, to plan, to counsel. to deliberate, to resolve.} Aorist Mid. Perfect. Pluperfect. jSovhvowficn ftovlewty ftovfavarja&s fiovfavaaio Povtevaaiio /5ouAcvaa///f# flovfavaawro fiovfavaaia&ov fiovfavaai Povfavada&wv fiovktvaua&tav {Sovlievaaa&ai, fiefiovkeva&s fiffiovJievao /5e/?o i/A t va & w aai', jSefiovlitva&ai 46 TABLES. [fl 35 TABLE x. COMPLETED. Aorist Fas*. Future Pass. Ind. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 2 3 Subj. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D 2 Opt. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 2 3 Imp. S. 2 3 P. 2 3 D. 2 3 Infin. Part 1136.1 MUTE VERBb. 47 H 36. xi. (A.) MUTE VERBS. 1. JT^dcpo, to write. ACTIVE VOICE. LABIAL. Present. Future. Aorist. Perfect Ind. ygdyu* yqdyw tygaya ysyqaqxx Subj. ygdcpto ygdyw Opt. yQUCpoi^t ygdyotfti yQayiaipi Imp. ygdcps ygdyov Inf. ygdcpsiv yQatfjftv ygdyai yfygacptvoti, Part, yydcpwv ygdyav ygdyas yfyyttqxag Imperfect. Pluperfect. Ind. jfacupow *y*yuw*iv Present. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Future Mid. Aorist Mid. 3 Future. Ind. Imperfect. 2 Aor. Pass. Opt. Imp. yodffov Inf. Part. Ind. St.bj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 2 Put. Pass. yQuaaffoi' > tngairov ensngaxeiv inenQaynt MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Present. Imperfect. Future Mid. Ind. Suhj. TlQCX Opt. Imp. nod Inf. Part. Aorist Mid. Aorist Pass. Future Pass. S Future. Ind. Suhj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 7i()d!; . . 1 (xyyfAw 2 nyytkiig P. I a//f 2 3 D. 2 3 ayyikutv FUTURE. Opt. Inf. ayyiktlv Part. (tyyfJiov uyyfloiif, txyydoltv Ind. Subj. AORIST L Opt. 1 Imp. uyytilov 3 yyytifo ayytllr) ayyttkai, (xyyilktif uyyfiluia) ' P. 1 Tiyyellaiitv ayyfikwptv 2 ^yyflJiart ayyfttrjie ayyfl^nirt ttyytllart 3 yyyidav ayyittuai ayytt\aitv, uyyilldav ayytikuTtO(fnv, nyynlnvTwv D. 2 riyytthnrov ayyfttrjTOV otyytl\nirnv ttyyfl\nrov 3 yyyeildTrjv ayyfdairrjv txyyttltxjQJV Inf. uyyilJiat. Part. ayy(lluc,-daa,'av G.-j'io?,-(;ijj. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Present 2 Aor. Mid. 1 Aor. Pass. 2 Aor. Pro Ind. ctyyiHofjicu rjyyfJiofiijv r)yyk^.9"i]v Silbj. uyyM.Mf^nt otyytltofAtti ctyyfkddJ Opt. ayyfMolpriv ayyeJiolfjirjv ayytldflrjv Imp. ayytMov ayyeJiov (xyyelftyii Inf. dtyytMico&ai ayytleadoti ayyfK&rivcu Part. o^/eUd/ueyoc uyyiloptvug ayytldtlg Imperfect LIQUID VERBS, 1 Future. 2 Future. Ind. Ind. Opt. Inf. Part. S. 1 2 3 P. I 2 3 D. 2 3 Ind. S. 1 r t yyn)(.n^r t v 2 ijyytllto 3 i,yyfi3iuro P. 1 riyyfda/ut&a a 2 r^ (1 -"- 3 FUTURE MIDDLE. Opt. Inf. Part /yfkoi /yfkoi >* , /' ayytAovfjfvov AORIST I. MIDDLE. Subj. Opt. Imp. . nyytL\tj'cni nyytuniaftt D 2 fjyyfllaoSov 3 i rtyytilaatiov Inf. ot Ind. Si " I riyyt^^tm 3 r^y/f^tnt, P. I riyy&(jit&a PERFECT. Imp. Part. Inf. PLUPERFECT. Part. 3 rjyyskpsvoi flat yy rjaav I). 2 3 51 TABLES. 42. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 5 42. LIQUID. 2. aroi[j.r l v Cpotvov 1 Aor. Pass. 2 A or. Pass. 1 Fut. Pass. i(f>av&r]V ((fui'ij qpMVu/w qpotrai (pav&elijv (fav&ijvai 2 Fut Pass. (fixvriao[ivu. Ind. TTfCpfta/jai PERFECT. Imp. Inf. Part 7r/qpi'# 7if(fuo^froi fiat Jifqifxvdwanv, tntcpav&e niynvdov nftpav&ov tut yard ov U 43.] DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS. 55 H 43. xni. (C.) DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS. 1. ^4vjo or avgdva, to increase. ACTIVE VOICE. Present. Future. Aorist. Perfect. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. av$b)v, Imperfect Pluperfect Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part, Ind. Subj. Opt. I rnp. Part. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. Present Future Mid. Aorist Mid. Imperfect. VjvSofirn', rjv: Perfect. Pluperfect. Aorist Pass. Future Pass. P. 44. 2. Perfect Passive of xdpjtia, to bend, and fAf/^w, to convict. Indicative. Imperative. ), &-C. Infinitive. Participle. [flat D. 2 x'x/)r#o' 56 TABLES. [1145 H 45. xiv. (D.) PURE VERBS, i. CONTRACT 1. 7'mao, to honor. ACTIVE VOICE. PRESENT IND. S. 1 rliiddl, TlflM 2 -u^utHc, 3 u in* ft, P. I TI/JKO/JEV, 2 Ti^utrf, 3 ttfiaovut, D. 2 Tltd nuaif T1//MTOV hi\u(t IMPERFECT. S. 1 (Ttfjctov, 2 3 P. 1 erifjnofitv t 2 tTtdne, 3 fii D. 2 3 PRESKNT IMP. S. 2 rififtt, 3 P. 2 3 Ti iiip.aiov Future. D. 2 . /j(ifjov, 3 Tnd. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part Aorist. ttlti,^ it PRESENT SCBJ. t,<> if G. Perfect. Pluperfect. 1146.1 CONTRACT VERBS. 59 PRESENT LVD. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 (fikfovrai, (pdovvrai D. 2 ydkw&or, IMPERFECT. S. 1 tcpdsout) 3 /Aoa, <5fyAol P 1 ^TyAoOjUfV, 2 (Ji/AofTf, 3 (5jAdoi>a<, D 2 difionov, drjkvvtov IMPERFECT. PRESENT OPT. S. 1 dq)ioov t fdyjiovv Sr^ootfii, <5/yAo?^ut, Stfiofyv 3 ^(5/jAof, t5r/Aou P. 1 o fdrjkoviov drjloonov, dr^o'truv, PRESENT IMP. PRESENT INF. S. 2 JryAof, . f 3 djjAof'rw, (5/yAou/w PRESENT PART. (Ji;Aotr / , <5;AouTov G. 3 Future. Aorist Perfect Pluperfect. I lid. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 8rj).(i')(jf.:9 Part. H 47.) CONTRACT VERBS. 6l MIDDLE AND PASMVI-: VOITF.S. PRESENT IND. S. 1 i^tf^oo^tui, 2 fyAo'/,, 3 Si^otrcu, P. 1 dijkoofjtOa, dt))(.ovfi&ct 2 dqloea&e, drjAoi'o&s D. 2 <57jAoEa#o', dykova&ov IMPERFECT. 2 f'di,)i6ov, fdijlov 3 *'.OffO, tdfjkolllO 2 edi)i.6ta&s, 3 t y Adoi'To, D. 2 fdrjlioto&ov, fdrjkova&ov 3 l(5ryiofa^7jv, S. 2 3 P. 2 3 D. 2 fir]l.oi(jdov, drjlova&ov 3 8^0 tad (av, drjlova&wv PRESENT IMP. ou, <5//Aou Future Mid. Aorist Mid. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 3 Future. Ind. Opt. Inf. Part. dtdr t }.(a OTIJTOV (7T/7JTO', aitTOV 3 Future. 1 Aoriat Perfect. Pluperfect S Fufuie. Ind. arrjoo) iUTt] 2 CTlOLb) TlQlt] TlOiUlO TIOU'QO, TIQIW 3 fTtolnro "n^'ir\ini TIQIMITO TiQicttf&w Part. P. 1 2 3 D. 2 tTTQtnadov notrj 2 Ti&r t g 3 rldr t u P. I Tl&ffltV rt&OlfJfV 2 T/#*T 3 Opt. Imp. c, Tl&f'ifJf TtdsTditJCtV, D. 2 rt&nov Ti&rjTov 3 c, u&flrov fl&tTOJV Inf. Part. S. 1 til&rjv, irl&ow P. hl^ffifv M tTl&l'IQ, 3 f J T/^u, AORIST I. IMPERFECT. hl^fft f rid us AORIST II. D. Ind. Subj. Ind. S. 1 2 r/>,; 3 r^ij p. i f'#ij 2 i Dottle 3 l&lfXUV idlOUV D. 2 t^fTOV 3 ti}iTi]V A OR. II. Inf. ^Iv t . Part. Opt Imp. & fit) per, Future. Ind. Opt. Inf. Part. Perfect TiMnxtt ', &t7rov Ifliijv \)ero>v , &kv' G. ^Wo?, del Pluperfect 5J 50.] VERBS IN -//{. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. PRESENT. Ind. Subj. Opt Si , I tiut^ni 2 ildtaui, tidy 3 Tidtrai P 1 ndffifda 2 ildtade 3 ildfviai D. 2 rldtadov 3 65 ndfjiat TldtlTO, TldotCO n, Tiddly f da ndr t adov rldiivio, Tf'dflijdoV, , rldov Imp. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 Ttdtads 3 Tidsadajactv, D. 2 rldtadov 3 Inf. rititadat Part. , TtdoiodljV IMPERFECT. tiidsfirjV >, hldov (T id t [ltd 01 erldeads fridtfTO trldfadov ertdtadyv dr,i:at Ind. S. 1 2 i'tfow 3 E^JTO P. 1 t&iptda 2 tdfade 3 fdfVTO D. 2 tdtadov dyadov 3 edsadyv AORIST II. MIDDLE. Subj. Opt Imp. ^ov dilTO dflpsd dnadt Inf. dt'adat Part. Fut. Mid. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass. T(d< diade diodwaar, deodwv diadov Pluperfect TtdrjTl tfdrjvui Perfect. rid n (4 at, tidtioo rfdtiadai, 66 TABLES. IT 51. VERBS IN-[AI. 4. 4t8ca(.u 9 to give. ACTIVE VOICE. PRESENT. Ind. B. 1 2 3 dlduai P. 1 dt'doiJtv 2 5/5ore 3 dtdouai, diduvai D. 2 5/5oTOi' 3 Inf. didorai. Subj. 5i5w Opt. Sidotrjv Imp. dtdov dlShl/ilfV diduiu didurov v, 8 idol ft fv dtdolrjaav, didolfv 5/<5oT didoiwoav, didorrwv dl'SoTOV didorwv fdtdovv fdldovg tdldov AORIST I. Ind. Ind. di8nvg,-ov', doi{ifv 5o/JT, 5otTf 5oTF dolyvnv, doiev dovTotv M, 5ofTO' 86lOV ', SotTljV 5oTO>V 5} 51.] VERBS IN -fit. 67 MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. PRESENT. Ind. Subj. Opt Imp. 2 didoaou Sidy dldoio dlSoao,3i'dov 3 P. 1 2 3 \J a dldoa&f Sidovtui dido)o&t didoia&e dldoivro n. 2 3 S. 1 2 3 <5t'(5oa3o' Inf. dtdwo&ov didoa&ov didoa&uv Part. did6i*tvo$. IMPERFECT. D. fdidnao, fdldov edldojo P. 'tditiopt&a fdldoa&e fdiSorTO AORIST II. MIDDLE. cdidoa&ov Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. S 1 fdo^rjv 9fuu duiprjv ftoif&ai 2 tdov dtp dolo 5ov 3 tdoro danni dolio ^oa^oi Part. P. 1 lUOUt:$tt dupi&a dnlps&a doftwot 2 tdoa&t #(/# dolu&e floats 3 fdovro ^olvTai Soll'TO doa&waar, doadtav D. 2 tdoafov 5oii(T^OV dola&ov doa&ov 3 fdoaPnv dolaftitv doa&wv Put Mid. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp Inf. Purl. Aor. Pass. Put. Pass. edo&yv do&yuopmi dotiw doOtirjv Perfect. Pluperfect. d(BOf(j&ai do&rji'ai jq fio&flg 68 TABLES. IT VERBS IN -fit. 5. ACTIVE VOICE. PRESENT. Ind. S. 1 Siixi'VH 2 dflxvvf 3 P. 1 2 3 <5axvi'iJt&a dfixvv(t)^ttOn dnxvvoi{jfftt 2 8n'.xt'imtti 8eixi'vr)t*3i 5V ? 2 i)7, l'e/ff 7]xa ? * r fir^c f? 3 I'jj, let fa # J ft/7,&c. I'rw Part Pi f I lf(J.tV ^xaucv ftjucv aiptv ? r> f <* 4T 7JXUT8 f'ltS f/TS TT 3 I'eaav r 7)xv etaaf r c/ai frwaay, Tyn wv D 2 I'fTOV fiiov TjtOV fTOV 3 ;,, UTIjV trw>' Future, /"aw Perfect, x. Pluperfect, ttxtty. MIDDLE AiND PASSIVE VOICES. PRESENT. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 1 iH^fU itnf.i(ti Iti^v, iol^v I'ftfi^Oi 2 teawt, t/; liji I'fto, t'o/o Vfao, I'oy 3ci r'- IHCU irjiai tf/io, lotto imftit) Part. &-C. &/C. &LC. &/C. &-C. itptros IMPERFECT. AORIST II. MIDDLE. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. 1 IY/41JV i'//JX r < ? tnjToy, tiiov I't/toy 3 a/JTwv, ct'rny caraiy -6 IjTE, 3 ij ** {ff 3 tail /] ti/j i'aiw P. 1 c(j/iE> a3|Ufy tt'^/uv, Ee)ucv Part. 2 /ore 7;is a/jzf, ttre tare a/y 3 eta/ aJat it'^auv, ftey earcuaay, oi)aa IMPERFECT. FUTURE. Ind. Opt. Inf. Si t - * . 1 /;', /;, I^UIjV 2 ^ % j ^adu ^ ; / tVfi fctfoto 3 ^y tatiui, t'urut tooiro Part. P. 1 Kiity DIALECTIC FORMS. PRESENT. Ind. Subj. Imp. Part. S. 1 fa*/ D. S. 1 10, I. S. 2 Jr., ? I. P. 1 UftU D. ^ w p^ lAfftt. D. i4>if D. 3 7 I. J^^.va^ E. ^E. N - * L '" P< Opt. /ei D. Gen. S i,' D. S> 2 ,ft,^ P. i7/m D. i.Sr I. * a I. P. let E. infffat E. f D. I P. !r* It. Us I. f^*i It. 7r It. i* I. 3 nn E. P. 1 ^i; D. 70- I. I. Ji(0 I. 2 *rt I. I;T E. 72 TABLES. - VERBS IN - 55 56 DIALECTIC FORMS OK i FUTURE IND. to t* 5. 1 1ffffoft.au E. S. 3 ?. Fut. , Aor. tieiifw, Ep. (^ 252). 11 57.] NUDE SI-XOND AOK1STS. 73 H .57. PURE VERBS, iii. SECOND AORISTS. 1. AORIST II. of Ind. s. i r/v 2 ^; 'Q j ',o o 6/3JJ p. i r/v" O J '/P 3 /fyfIl' 1) 2 ?,V* 3 Subj. Opt. r ,utv, flnt(ii ti ?>Jr flfxh/jf, flittTf lunji ftalifunv, ftitln 1 i^Tor /Wi/ror, fiitirov to go. Imp. fif^f Inf. /;; > i/ Part. 2. AORIST II. of Ind. Subj. S. I 2 3 P. I Q ' * - o (XTTf OyiXfjtxV D- 2 7Ii<5oTOV 3 a; rrnxfij, /o r///< away. Opt. Inf. unuSouir t v cmvdyiira Part. &/C. 7Io5^TOI' 3. AORIST II. of yiyvwaxto, to know. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. S. 1 tyi'Mv yrut yro'rjv (/>'W'/'') 2 tyfun; yv<*>$ yv(jh]g yvwdt 3 /yj'O* / J1( J J yroit'i yi'Uib) P. 1 tyrhifjit' yvotpfv yvoiijfifv, yvoif.itv 2 l^vajif yrmrs /ro/r/rf. yvoirt yvwrf 3 fyvwaav yrmat yvol^atxv, yi'ottv yi'wrbujar, yrorrwv D. 2 tyvwiov yrwiov yrolijTnr, yi'olrov yrwiov 3 iyvoiTijV yroiijirji', yvuirijv yvwtMV 4. AORIST II. of <5i'r&), ^> enter, to put on. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf. Inf. yi'aivai Part. S I &* dvo) dvoiin dvt'ai 2 f'fllJC 8&tjis Svotg 5 i't) i 3 t(5u 8vot dviw Part. P 1 tduftti) dwautv dvotu** dvc 2 H^j'fg di'rjTf Svout di'is 3 fdSuav fvfaai dvotfv diiKuaav, duvrtov D. 2 i'Sfroi' dvrjiov dvonov dviov 3 f'8vT> t v I' dvoiir t v dvTOV 74 TABLES. [fl 58, 59. H 58. xv. (E.) PRETERITIVE VERBS. 1. OtSa, to know. PERFECT II. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. In, 8 1 oldu fidui sldtltjv fidevat 2 oidag, oia&tt sldyg lidtlrjg I'u&i 3 aids etdtj sldfir] I'aio) Part. P 1 oldapsv, lo/.itv fldofisv &/c. fldiog 2 old an s, I'OTS fldrjis I'OTS 3 olduai, lauai fidwai i'aTwaav D. 2 oldctTov, i'arov eidiJTOV I'OTOV 3 PLUPERFECT II. S. 1 ydsiv, ydy P. ydfifisr, fiapsv D. 2 jjdiig, ydy?, fjdsiTS, v)OT8 ydsnov, y yei 3 f]dsi(v), fjdij ydtaav, yaav Future, rfao/iai, sidrjaw. Aorist, 2. 48oixa or 8i8ia, to be afraid. PERFECT II. PLUPERF. II Ind. Subj. Imp. Inf. S. 1 didia dsdiw dedie'vai fdf'bi'civ 3 dtdts dfdlrj dsdhio Part. fdtdlti P. 1 didifjiv didluiptv dtditag edidi(AV 2 didiTS dtdlrjTS define t'didiTS 3 dfdittai dtdttaai dfdiTwauv idtdiau* D. 2 didiTOv dtdlyiov diduov f'dediTov 3 dtdtTWV tdsdiTijv 1 Perf. Sidoixa. 1 Pluperf. sdedolxctv. Fut. dtlaofiui. Aor. Z.dtiaa. H 59. 3. *Hpai, to sit. PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. Ind. Imp. Inf. Part. 2 tjacu rjao Tjao P. 1 ifoit&a 2 r t a&8 rj' r^a&ov 3 11 59, 60.] PRETER1TIVE VERBS. S. 1 2 3 P. 1 2 3 D. 2 3 S 1 2 3 D. 2 Ind. a&r xd&ijaat PRETERITIVE VERBS. 4. Kd&q{iau, to sit down. PERFECT. Subj, Opt. Imp. Inf. xn&oio XU&OITO xd&Tja&s xd&rjvrai xd&wviai xd&oivio XCL&IIQ&QV XOL&TJ(J\)OV xct&oia&ov Part. xot&r)pivo$ PLUPERFECT. Ixn&qao, xn&rjoo tXU&T)TO, txd&rju&ov. P. 1 2 3 fxtt' D. 3 f' X(x&r,vto H6O. Kelpou, to lie down. PRESENT or PERFECT. Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. In S. 1 2 3 P. 1 3 D. 2 3 8. 1 2 HUfUU xtlawi xey xsoio xtlitxt xirjrai xdono xfipf&a xflao xsoio&e XEOIVTO xtia&oiaccv, xila&ow xeiadov xiyoftov xeoia&ov xfta&ov xsla&uv txtia&ov Part. XflfifVOf txsiao IxetTO IMPERFECT or PLUPERFECT. P. sxslntda D. IXSIVTO Future, 76 TABLES. CHANGES IN THE ROOT. [1f 61 H 61. xvi. CHANGES IN THE ROOT , T> . (a. of to i. . Precession 1. . , (b. of i and a 2- Contraction. S. Syncope. EUPHONIC CHANGES. [259-264.] 4. Metathesis. to /. 5. To avoid Double Aspiratioa. 6. Omission or Addition of Consonant. 7. From the Omission of the Digamn.a. B. EMPHATIC CHANGES. I. BY LENGTHENING A SHORT VOWEL. [266-270.] 1. to i. 4. f to ti. 2. to M. 5. r to r. 3. Various Changes of . 6. J to i/. II. BY THE ADDITION OF CONSONANTS. [271-282.] 7. to 00. 8. t? to ?. 9. v to iv. 1. Of T 2. Of . To Labial Roots. ft. To Other Roots. a. Prefixed. 0. Affixed. Uniting with a y. Palatal to form . (v. With a prolonged. C. M. (a. To Pa d. , v ^/5. To Pal (y. To Li To Pare Roots, alatal Roots. Lingual and Liquid [Roots, g. Other Syllables. 3. By Exchange of Lettert ( 300). f becoming i. C. ANOMALOUS CHANGES. tian.j DERIVATION. 77 D. TABLES OF FORMATION. fi 6S. i. TABLE OF DERIVATION. 1. FROM VERBS, denoting A. NOUNS. [305-313] III. FROM OTHER NOUNS. 1. The Action; in -oer, in -T;, -TO, -ru^ (F. -T/a, -rs/, -Tg, -Of. 4. The Place, Instrument, &c., in II. FROM ADJECTIVES, expressing the Abstract, in -la. (-tt&, -ajf, ./^5f (F. -f,-, .^,-, -;0 '*% (F. -ituvn, -/u). 3. Female Appellatives, in -?$, -a/va, -*a, - (-Tra). 4. Diminutives, in -rv (-1S/ov, -a^/a, -wXXj, -axi')7, -yXX/?, -i/Aof, &C. 5. Auymentatlccs, in -av t -uvta, -% B. ADJECTIVES. [ 314-316.] L FROM VERBS ; in tx.os, - fulness or sice; -7^*aj, fitness; -&f>a;, -u.;, &C. quality. II. FROM NOUNS ; in -Us (-/?, -i/a?, III. FROM ADJECTIVES AND AD- -jvj, -avaf, i parative, Superlative. C. PRONOUNS. f [ 317.] D. VERBS. [ 318, 319.] I. FROM NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES ; II. FROM OTHER VERBS ; in -/, in -tea, -iva, -a.u, to be or do ; -ou, j -idea, -a,ea, desiderative ; -^u, - | &c., frequentative, intensive, incep- imitative, active, &c. ; -u with penult j five, diminutive, &c. strengthened, active, &e. E. ADVERBS. [320-322.] I OUTJQUE CASES OF NOUNS AND II. DERIVATIVES SIGNIFYING AD.IKCTIVK.S. 1. Genitives, in -0tv, place whence; -ou, place where ; -n;, &c. 2. Datives, in -ai, -o6~t, -a-r, -a7, place where; -?, -, -a/, -f, u> 'y, place where, time wfien ; &c. 1. Manner, in -a 2. Time when, in -TI, -f xa. 3. Place whither, in -a-i. 4. Number, in -x/f. III. PREPOSITIONS WITH THEIR CASKS. 2ut ' IV. DERIVATIVE FROM PREPOSI- TIONS. or PREPOSITIONS WITH- OUT Sing, and Plur. of Adjec- 7 * TABLES. [fl 6a U 63. n. PRONOMINAL [Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals Negative. Relative. Orders, I. II. UL Vf. V. VL Interrog. Indef. Objective. Subjective. Definite. Indefinite i Positive, T/f j ris, evrtg, no2 ; no2, e ti Of Like- Of Identl- XI. ness, and ty, Divers! MM, r'o6,, tTi^ui, VII. VIII. IX. X. Simple. Emphatic: Deictic. Distributive. Collective. Equality, ty, &c. a, eurof, o5i, -2;, TO 2, a *t>TOf, &?. Jfc, ixdrtoPiv, K-jtfj/U.lOOS. oftou, avrov, op-acri, ?* ran, ourcixts, lx.ctyra.xif. DEKIVATIVTE VERBS. wao-ow, tbove), ifAoioea, ifou, oiXXa/a^, fl^svi^ XXr. mvrixm* iSaw, \nootou (from tn^iTat, omitted ;, a^^aTij/^is;, ixttrtg'tu, aXXa-o-, &C. TABLES. fl 64 III. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 11 G4U I. An APPOSITIVK agrees in case with its subject 331. II. The SUBJECT OF A FINITE VERB is put in the Nominative. 342. III. SUBSTANTIVES INDEPENDENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTKUCTION ar put in the Nominative 343. GENERAL RULE FOR THE GENITIVE. THE POINT OF DEPARTURE AND THE CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENI^'VE. 345. IV Words of SEPARATION and DISTINCTION govern the Genitive. 346 V. The COMPARATIVE DEGREE governs the Genitive. 351. VI. The ORIGIN, SOURCE, and MATERIAL are put in the Genitive. 355 VII. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. \ 356. VIII. Words of PLENTY and WANT govern the Genitive. 357. IX. The WHOLE OF WHICH A PART is TAKEN is put in the Genitive 358. X. Words of SHARING and TOUCH govern the Genitive. 367. XI. The MOTIVE, REASON, and END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive 4 372. XII PRICE, VALUE, MERIT, and CRIME are put in the Genitive. 374. XIII. Words of SENSATION and of MENTAL STATE OR ACTION govern fhe (u.'nitive. 375. XIV. The TIME and PLACE in which are put in the Genitive. 378. XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER are put in the Genitive. 380. XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING OR PROPERTY is put in the Gon- itive 382. GENERAL RULE FOR THE DATIVE OBJECTIVE. THE OBJECT OF AP- PROACH AND OF INFLUENCE is PUT IN THE DATIVE; or, AN INDIRECT OBJECT is PUT IN THE DATIVE 397. XVII. Words of NEARNESS and LIKENESS govern the Dative 398. XVIII. The OBJECT OF INFLUENCE is put in the Dative. 401. GENERAL RULE- FOR THE DATIVE RESIDUAL. AN ATTENDANT THING OR CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, is PUT IN THE DATIVE. 414. XIX. The MEANS and MODE are put in the Dative. 415. XX. The TIME and PLACE at which are put in the Dative. 420. GENERAL RULE FOR THE ACCUSATIVE. AN ADJUNCT EXPRESSING DIRECT LIMIT is PUT IN THE ACCUSATIVE. 422. XXI. The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT of an action are put in the Accusative. 423. ADVERBS OF BWKARINO are followed hy the Accnsntivft. CAUSATIVES govern the Accusative losether with the case of the Included verb. 430. The same verb often sovurns TWO ACCUSATIVES, which limy be, (I.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT in apjtositinn with each pi her: as with verbs of making, appoint- ing, choosing, esteeming, naminp, .Vc. (II ) The DIUK^T OHJKCT and the EFFECT, not in apposition; ns with verbs ut lining, sat/ing, Ac. (111.) Two OBJECTS differently re- lated, but which are Imih ruiwnled ns DIRECT; as with verbs of. ir^/.i/n' .ind rfjiiiring, of clothing nnd unclothing, of '-unctaiing and rfepjiti'nj, of persuading and teaching, &c. 15 434-436. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 81 A XII An adjunct applying a word or expression to a PARTICULAR FART, PROPERTY, THING, or PERSON, is put in the Accusative. 437. XX I II. EXTENT OF TIME AND SPACE is put in the Accusative. 430. XXIV. The Accusative is often used ADVERBIALLY, to express DE- GRKK, MANNER, ORDER, &C. 440. XXV. The COMPELLATIVE of a sentence is put in the Vocative. 442. XXVI. An ADJECTIVE agrees with its subject in gender, number, and case. 444. XXVII. The ARTICLE is prefixed to SUBSTANTIVES, to mark them as definite. 469. XXVIII. A PRONOUN agrees with its subject in gender, number, and person. 494. The RELATIVE commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the ANTECEDENT is a Genitive or Dative, and the RELATIVE would properly be an Accusative depending upon a verfi 526. XXIX. A VERB agrees with its subject in number and person. 543. The NEUTER PLURAL has its VERB in the singular. 549. The PASSIVE VOICE has for its SUBJECT AD object of (.he Active, commonly a direct, but sometimes an indirect object. Any other word governed by the Active remains un- changed with the Passive. THE SUBJECT OF THE ACTIVE is commonly expressed, wilh the Passive, by the Genitive with a preposition. 6l>2. . ^ K tv, S Definite Tenses, as (a.) continued or prolonged ; An act.on is represented by the j ^.^ M [ O j momentary or transient , UA.) a habit or continued course of conduct; (c.) doing at the time of, or until an- ? (6. ) a single act ; (c. ) simply done in its own time ; { other action ; (d.) begun, attempted, or designed; (e.) introductory. ) - s ,- 7n ,~ A I (d.) accomplished ; (e.) conclusive. \** The generic Aorist often supplies the place of the specific Perfect and Pluperfect 580. The INDICATIVE expresses the actual; the SUBJUNCTIVE and OPTATIVE, the contingent. PRESENT CONTINGENCY is expressed by the primary tenses ; PAST CONTINGENCY, by tha sen, ntlary. 589. The SUBJUNCTIVE for the most part, follows the primary tenses ; and the OPTATIVE, the .tfi-midary. 592. Sn : njsitinn a^ fact is expressed by the appmpriate tense of the Indicative; supposi- tum /tint mail hr-rumi- fact, by the Subjunctive ; tupfoaition without regard to fact, by Hie Optative; and ati/ipusition contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Indicative. f>erbs, adjectires, and other adverbs. 646. XXXIV. PKK.POSITIONS govern substantives in the oblique cases, and enark their relations. 648. XXXV. CONJUNCTIONS connect sentences and like parts of a sentence TABLES. [11 65. IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 11 65. A. OF WORDS. Common Proper 1 \ Masc. "1 isa Abstract Collective NOUN of the 2 > Dec., 3 ) Fern. , Neut. f' fr m Irregular Comm. J &c. Nom.1 -.- 5 } VOC.J [ the subject of , governed by , < the Gen. of , ^ Rule. Remarks. the Dat. of , l^the Ace. of , &c., Pos ) is an ADJECTIVE [in the Comp. > Degree, from --- (compcu V Sup. ) . x fDerived from , T . T 2| Terminations (Ac&ne) ; L [Compounded of 1_ j Root Affix (Norn 1 G( (&, .) Sing.) Masc. ) 't Ur ;C M m ; C ; ,) Dual ) Neut. ) reei _ ^ed substantivelv, &c , Rule. Remark*. Personal ~\ Reflexive I is a Relative j PRONOUN &c. 1) , of the 2 >- Pers. >, from (fo e <] i -J Norn.} Sing.) Masc.) Affix -; the Gen. f. Plur. t Fern. I ; &c | Dual | Neut J ject of , ) Sublet ) ed by , > Rule. [It refers to - as its Antecedent T Rute 5 ig with , &c.,) (the sul ijcct of Vgoveri (agreeing and connects to .] Re.mat-kt. Transitive VERB,' Intransitive " - Contract " VERB in pi, &c., U65.J FORMS OF ANALYSIS. of',] I Roots Pres. ' Impf. jifc-j*.^ 1 Aor. &c. Ind. Subj. Opt Imp. Inf. Part Act. ) Mid. > Pass.) (vary and inflect) ; Rule. Remarks. 1) Sing.) (if finite) the 2 > Pers. Plur. V , agreeing with , 3) Dual ) (if Inf.} having for its subject -, and {^"J ^ Interrogative "j Place Indefinite Time is an Demonstrative > ADVERB of Manner Complementary Order &c. J &c. >Pos. ) , [in the Comp. > De- Sup. ) gree, from (compare),] [^'ounded of~ ] modif >' in g ~ Rule - P* refers to as its antecedent, and connects to .] Remarks. , and marking its relation to , Rule. Remarks. Copulative is a &c. J - to , Rule. Remarks. [Derived from , ] [Compounded of ,] connect* - I>. ? of '-,]-< Dependent of gr^n- matical construction 645). Remarks. NOTES (a) When declension in full is not desired, give the Norn, and Gen. in Sub stantivesand in Adjectives of I Term., and the different forms of the Nora, in Adjectivei of 2 or 3 Term. (6) In conjugating, give the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and Perf. (if in use), to which it is also well to add the 2 Aor. if used, (c) The term " vary " is used above in a specific sense, to denote giting the different modes of a tense, or, as it is sometimes called, giving the synopsis of the tense ; and the terra " Jltct," to denote giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of course, takes the place of this), (d) After completing the formula above, which, to avoid confusion and consequent omission or delay, should always be given in the pro- scribed order, add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form, signification, and use of the word ; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic changes of consonants, literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the number, case, degree, voice, mode, tense, &c. ; citins, from the Grammar, the appropriate rule, remark, or note, (e) Som particulars in the forms above, which do not apply to all wordd. are inclosed in brackets. 84 TABLES. ANALYSIS. [fl 66, 67 HOG. B. OF SENTENCES. I. Describe tin Sentence. ( ( IntlWtivA 5 Declarative, $ Actual, $ Posi < SimP ,e, S --. " ter* ) Co " linscnt ' j Ner i9 J Compound, < ( Volit.ve, j Negalive ' ; / Incorporated in the sentence as a live; ) ative; f connected by \ following by ( Substantive. ol a < Adjective. ( Adverb. ^ Cooniiriate Sentence. ? Subordinate Clause, performing the oflict simple succeaaion. II. Analyze the Sentence into its Logical and Grammatical Divisions, its Primary ami Secondary Parts, J*c. Compellative ) i i Cbm- The Logical Subject \ u , containing the ^ *. { Grammatical Sub- Predicate ^ Pre- Adjective pellative i Adverb i.-ct J , modified by the Appositive V ~~~' Stunt* hov> these an d.cate Adjective N ) Adverb I > , modified by the Appositive \ . ) Adjunct L Dependent Clause ) ijicd, and analyze Subordinate or Incorporated Clauses, until tfa Sentence w ^1 67. C. OF METRES. I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is written. II. Describe the particular Verse. Iambic ) Monometer ) Acatalectic ) 1 ) It la Dactylic > Dimeter [ Catalectic [, consisting of 2 > Feet, which VI &c. ) after irem. j p^^pj^ &c ^ ) JR. Analyze by [Dipodies and] Feet. Dactyl, ) 1 ) | , Nature, > ) a Spondee, f the 2 J Syllable J.f n! { by Position, > Rule. Ac., ) *c. ^ lorl ' Ac., ) INTRODUCTION, $ 1 . THE Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal races ; the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric and the jEolic. These races spoke the same general language but with many dialectic peculiarities. The ANCIENT GREEK LANGUAGE (commonly called simply the Greek) has been accordingly divided by grammarians into four principal DIALECTS, the ATTIC, the IONIC, the DORIC, and the yEoLic. Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most refined, and had far the greatest unity within themselves. The Doric and ^Eolic were not only much ruder, but, as the dialects of races widely extended, and united by no common bond of literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of the varieties of the Doric or ^Eolic were separated from each other by dif- ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished them in common from the other dialects. Of the JEolic, the principal varieties were the Lesbian, the Boeotian, and the Thessalian. The Doric, according as it was more or less removed from the Attic and Ionic, was characterized as the stricter or the milder Doric ; the former prevailing in the La- conic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; the latter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, Rhodian, and some others. 2. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the mother country in refinement ; and the first development of Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions, was among the Asiatic lonians. This development was EPIC POETRY, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. The language of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old Ionic, with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard 8 86 INTRODUCTION. would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city, and those poetic licenses which are always allowed to early minstrelsy, when as yet the language is unfixed, and critics are unknown. Epic poetry was followed in Ionia by the Elegiac of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of Colophon were two great masters ; and this again by Ionic Prose, ir which the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrates, who chose this refined dialect, although themselves of Doric descent. In distinction from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets the language of the Elegiac poets may be termed the Middle Ionic, and that of the prose -writers, the New Ionic. 3. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera ture was the jEolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains ot Alcseus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short- lived, and we have scarce any thing remaining of the dialect except some brief fragments. There arose later among the jEolians of Boeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which Pindar was the most illustrious ornament: As writing, however for the public festivals of Greece, he rejected the peculiarities of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the basis consisted of words and forms common to the Doric and ^Eolic, but which was greatly enriched from the now universal- ly familiar Epic. He is commonly said, but loosely, to have written in the Doric. 4t. Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race, were gradually rising to suc.h political and commercial impor- tance, and to such intellectual preeminence among the states of Greece, that their dialect, adorned by such dramatists as jEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and Menander, by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, by such phi- losophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such orators as Lysias jEschines, and Demosthenes, became at length the standard language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted by the edu- cated classes in all the states. It became the general medium of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, which will be here- af.er noticed, the universal language of composition. This diffusion of the Attic dialect was especially promoted by the conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it as their court language. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its peculiarities, and received many additions; and thus diffused and modified, it ceased to be regarded as the language of a particular state, and received the appellation of the COMMON DIALECT or LANGUAGE. The Attic- and Common dialects, therefore, do not differ in DIALECTS. 8" any essential feature, and may properly be regarded, the one as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, form of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or later form, we find written nearly the whole that remains to us of ancient Greek liters^ure. It may claim therefore to be re- gnrded, notwithstanding a few splendid compositions in the other dialects, as the national language of Greece ; and its acquisition should form the commencement and the basis of Greek study. The pure Attic has been divided into three periods ; the Old, used by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the Middle, used by Xenophon and Plato ; and the New, used by the Orators and the later Comedians. The period of the Com- mon dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjec- tion of Athens to the Macedonians. 5. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent, we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon- uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it- self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timseus, &c.), in Mathematics by the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his successors, and in Pastoral Poetry by Theocritus, Bion, and Moschus. $ 6. To the universality acquired by the Attic dialect, an exception must be made in poetry. Here the later writers felt constrained to imitate the language of the great early models. The Epic poet never felt at liberty to depart from the dialect of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic language was regarded by subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred tongue, the language of the gods, from which they might enrich their sev- eral compositions. The ^Eolic and Doric held such a place in Lyric Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an jEolo-Doric hue was given to the lyric portions by the use of the long , which formed so marked a characteristic of those dialects, and which, by its openness of sound, was so favorable to musical effect. Pastoral Poetry was confined to the Doric. The Dra- matic was the only department of poetry in which the Attic was the standard dialect. 7. Grammar flourished only in the decline of the Greek language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dia- 88 INTRODUCTION. lects with little precision. Whatever they found in the old Ionic of Homer that seemed to them more akin to the later cultivated vEolic, Doric, or even Attic, than to the new Ionic they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dialects. Even in the common language, whatever appeared to them irregular or pe culiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming the regular form xotvov, common, though perhaps this form was either wholly unused,* or was found only as a dialectic variety On the other hand, some critics used the appellation *otr6<; as a lerm of reproach, designating by it that which was not pure Attic. In the following Grammar, an attempt will be made to exhibit first and distinctly, under each head, the Greek in its standard form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common usage ; and afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. It will not, however, be understood that every thing which is ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through- out, or is found in no other. This applies especially to the Doric and ^Eolic, which, with great variety within themselves ( 1), are closely akin to each other; so that some (as Mait- taire) have treated of both under .the general head of Doric ; and in the following Grammar some forms will be simply men- tioned as Doric, that also occur in the jEolic. By the term JFjQ\\c, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the cultivated /Eolic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usually con- fined to the language spoken (though, according to Herodotus, with four varieties) by the lonians of Asia Minor and the adja- cent islands. 8. It remains to notice the modifications of the latei Greek. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude and semi-barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused some of the peculiarities of their native tongue. These are termed Macedonia, or, sometimes, from Alexandria, the prin- cipal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of later Greek culture Alexandrine. The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, was employed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and the composition of the Christian. When so employed by na- tive Jews, it naturally received a strong Hebrew coloring ; and, as a Jew speaking Greek was called 'jKUbyyum^ (from knijvl.^ to speak Greek), this form of the language has been termed the Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical} dialect. Its pecu- liarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the fathers, and through the diffusion of Christianity exerted a greal general influence. DIALECTS. 89 Another influence modifying the Greek came from the lan- guage of the Roman conquerors of the world. Of necessity, the Greek, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such scholars as Arrian, Lucian, and ^Elian, and the precepts of a class of critics, called Atticists, was continually becoming more and more impure. The language of the Byzantine period was especially degenerate. Since the destruction of the Eastern Empire by the Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Eccle- siastical Greek with the popular dialects of the different dis- tricts and islands of Greece has produced the MODERN GREEK, or, as it is often called, by a name derived from the Roman Empire in the East, ROMAIC. This language has been es- pecially cultivated and refined within the present century, and has now a large body of original and translated literature. $ 9. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the student a series of compositions, not only including many of the highest productions of genius, but extending through a period of nearly three thousand years. BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. TI ^Eschylus, Prom. Vinst. CHAPTER 1. CHARACTERS. [HIT 1, 2.] 1O. THE Greek language is written with our letters, two breathings, three accents, Jour marks of punctuation, and a few other char- acters. 1. For the LETTERS, see Table, T 1. REMARKS. 1. DOUBLE FORMS. Sigma final is written g ; not final, a ; as, araai?. In compound words, some editors, without authority from manuscripts, use y at the end of each component word ; thus, nQoceiwsQftc:. The other double forms are used indifferently ; as, fiov$ or 6ov$ 2. LIGATURES. Two or more letters arc often united, except in recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (liga- tura, tie) ; as, * for xcu, 8 for or, e& for j, Thrace, "Ai^tj?, Hades, Q^fffa., Thressa, . IV. The MARKS OF PUNCTUATION are the COMMA ( , ), the COLON ( ), the PERIOD ( . ), and the NOTE OF INTERROGATION ( ; ), which has the form of ours (?) inverted. To these, some editors have judiciously added the NOTE OF EXCLAMA- TION ( ! ). ^16. V. OTHER CHARACTERS. 1 . CORONIS and APOSTROPHE. The mark ( ' ), which at the beginning of a word is the smooth breathing, over the middle is the CORONIS (xo^aw'f, crook- td mark\ or mark of crisis, and at the end, the APOSTROPHE ( 30) ; as, rau- rti for ra. aura, aXX* \yu for aXXa iyu. 2. The HYPOUIASTOLE (urotieurroXv, separation beneath\ or DIASTOLE (S<- 7IT(W, V'fptoV. i and o have the abrupt sounds of e in let, and o in dot ; ex- cept before another vowel, and at the end of a word, where they are protracted, like e in real, and o fn go ; as, Uy, vsavfoif, yttXio 94 PRONUNCIATION. [BOOK I. 2. DIPHTHONGS. The diphthongs are, for the most part pronounced according to the prevailing sound of the same com binations in our own language ; si like ei in height, ot, like oi in boil, vi like ui in quiet, uv like au in aught, sv and rjv like eu in Europe, neuter, ov and wv like ou in thou ; in is sounded like the affirmative ay (ah-ee, the two sounds uttered with a single impulse of the voice), and vl like whi in while. Thus, sidvla l, nkfvaovftoti, t]v$ov, ^otv^u, vlog. 3. CONSONANTS. The consonants are pronounced like the corresponding letters in our own alphabet, with the following special remarks. y, x, and x, are always hard in sound : y being pronounced like g in go (except before a palatal, where it has the sound of ng in long, 49) ; * and ^ Uke c in cap, and ch in chaos, i. e. like k ; as, yivof, Hyyos (pron. ang-gos\ has the sharp sound of th in thin ; as, Ssaj. f has the sharp sound of s in say ; except in the middle of a word before ft, and at the end of a word after and , where it sounds like z ; as, vS'io-cu tcixruos, TVS, ug. ff and r never have the sound of sh ; thus 'Aa-ia, is pronounced A'-si-a, not A'-shi-a ; K^r/aj, Krit'-i-as, not Krish'-i-as. At the beginning of a word, g sounds like z, and -^ like s ; and, of two consonants which cannot both be pronounced with ease, the first is silent ; as, %<, HroXipa.7os, /SJsXX/oy. So, in English, xebec, psalm, &c. 4. BREATHINGS. The rough has the sound of h ; the smooth has no sound ; as, OQO?, ogog. See 13. 5. ICTUS. The primary ictus is placed according to the fol- lowing RULE. In dissyllables, the penult takes the ictus. In poly- syllables, the penult, if long, takes the ictus ; but, if short, throws it upon the antepenult. Thus, nairiQ, pron. pa'-ter, yqa.- q>rjif, gra-phe-te, yguynt, graph'-e-te. NOTE. If two or more syllables precede the primary ictus, one of these, receive! a secondary ictus, in placing which the ear and formation of the woii will decide. B. MODERN GREEK METHOD. 1O. tt and a. are pronounced like a in father ; after the sound I V/, i, /, 01, v, vi} it i.s pronounced like a in peculiarity. at like i. civ, it;, w, uv, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute (/?, y, J) are pronounced like av, ev, eev, nv, respectively ; in all other cases, like af, ef, eef, off. /3 like . y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes, York; in aH other cases it is guttural, like the German g in Tag. yy and yx. like ng in stroiitjext. y| like nx. y% like ng-h, nearly. $ like th in that. t like e in fellow, nearly. u like t. tv, see ttv. % like z. n and like i. fiv, see etv. S like th in thin. / like t in machine. x, like k. X like /; before the sound I, like // in William. p. like m. pr like mi, as, i CH. l.J HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. 95 fSi* pronounced tmbrosthen. p.-^/ (j*.<*tr) like mbs. like n ; before the sound I, like n in oNion. The words rov, jgov, ^i/v "^ v x,yi pro* nounced TO/*TOVJ^O'V, ffuft\^v^. vr like c/, as, ivrifAos pronounced eudimos* | like a? or As. like o in porter. at like /. aw h'ke oo in moon. vr, g, like p, r. like s in soft ; before /J, y, S, ,, , it is sounded like ; e. g. xotrpas, fffiiffiti, S^t^vw, pronounced xo^ftof, %fi'iira.i, Zp,u(vn ; so also at the end of a word, rovs $o.ffi\i7s TVS y>jf, pronounced Tot^/Ja^Xs/j rr^yni- rh'ke t in tell. v like t. vi like i.

and X, the double consonant Y, and the sign for long o, II. These new letters they placed at the end. In distinction the short o was now termed "0 /U.IXPOV, small O ; and the long o, r H ^tyat, great O. The names of the other new letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them ; thus, 7, X/~, as, in English, ie, ce. S. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also 9 and ^, which were only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 m tne ' r proper places in the alphabet, but ty at the end. Thus employed, they were termed Sfitima (lj,tiav, sign, mark). See ^f 1, 11. F was also named from its form the Dlgamma, i. e. the double gamma ; and from its being longest retained among the JSolians, the jEolic Dinnnnna. It is still found upon sonic inscriptions and coins. In Latin it commonly ap- pears as v ; thus, F/ds/v, video, to see, FaJVaf, vinum, wine. Its restoration by Bentley to the poems of Homer has removed so many apparent hiatuses and irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. The general law in respect to the disappearance of F, appears to be the following : Before a vowel or an initial , it is usually dropped, or becomes one of the common breathings ; but otherwise, it usually passes into the cognate vowel v ; thus, /3Ff , /3F' ? /SaFif (Lat. bovis, hovi, boves) become /3aa;, /Sa/ 1 , /3ai; ; but /saFf, /3'F, /3aF, /3aF-< be- come /3aUf, 0av, flaw, j3a, The alphabet in its present complete form was first adopted by the lonians (cf. 2), and hence termed 'Iv/* yoa.(Aft.a.ra.. In Attic in- scriptions it was first used in the archonship of Euclides, B. C. 403. The Greeks first wrote, like the Phoenicians, from right to left ; and then alternately from left to right and right to left (as it was termed, /3sirre >jva. 0. In some cases the best critics differ : thus, hi the infinitive of verbs in -, some write r^av, as contracted from c/^ai/v, and others r/^v, as con- tracted from an older form T/^H. So in the adverbial forms *>?, or>j, or ?, Jrj, and the like. 2 6. 4. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned (a, 17, and <>>), the breathings and accents are written over the second vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels as, nvrili herself, but ai/rq, cry ; yvda, but ^'i/o ' uigwiq (a) but "Aidrjg (). If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced separately the second is marked with a diaeresis ( 16. 3) ; as, avrn, fort. For a full exhibition of the Greek vowels, simple ana CH. 2.] PLECESS1ON OF VOWELS. 99 compound, see the Table (fl 3). They are there divided into classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or leading element, as A sowids, &c. ; and into orders, according to the length of this sound, or its combination with other sounds, as short vowels, &c. The classes are arranged according to the openness of the vowel from which they are named. Vow- els belonging to the same class are termed cognate. The Greek vowels are subject to a great number of EUPHONIC CHANGES, which may be referred, for the most part, to two great heads, the PRECESSION OF VOWELS, and the UNION OF SYLLABLES. These changes diminish the effort in speaking, by reducing the volume of sound employed, or by preventing hiatus, and lessening the number of syl- lables. I. PRECESSION OF VOWELS. ^28. The great tendency in Greek to the pre- cession or attenuation of vowel sounds shows it- self, 1.) In the change of simple vowels. Precession especially affects or, as the most open of the vowels, changing it, when short, to e and o, and, when long, to ij, and sometimes to , we find the root in three forms, T^T-, T^S^T-, and T^OST-, trr^a., ri^au rtf&u. ari a, ij} and the liquid Aorist (see 56). /3. In adjectives, o before a and is absorbed ; as, WXoa y. In o Jaj, ear, the Nominative singular becomes aJj by an absorption of the a, but the other forms are contracted according to the rule ; as, Jrof, uret. S. For the change of aj into at, (r/#5Kn) ttfreaat n^fltft, (^Wovat) 5t5oaai didovai, xvuvat) NOTES, a. By a similar contraction with /Sa'a? /Wy, we find also a? vxus and you.u.s see 116 - & For Kxiv*t OiJ*x, see 109. /3. 35. 2. When a long is contracted with an O sound there is usually inserted before the w an f, which, however, is not regarded in the accentuation as a distinct syllable ; as, 'o$ fro)?) *uc (^f 9), MfreJido? Mivifatas, 'AiQflduo AtQlidtti (fl 8). So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. ( 48. 1, 242. a), when a is short. 36. III. (1.) fa becomes ??, and (2.) ff, /. (3.) and o, with o, form ov ; but (4.) with other O sounds are absorbed. (5.) In other combina- tions not already given (^ 32, 33), e is absorbed. Thus, become as become as la ;, %Vffia, %(>v?XTi ^XatiT. (5.) ea/ a;, 0E< ov, 00 0V, (4.) ,. , fW 0t, OffTtM OffTy. ^ 37. EXCEPTIOXS. 1. tat preceded by i, /, , or ^0 ( 29), or in the plural or rfwa/ of the first or second declension, becomes a ; as, lyi'ia. ityta,^ a(>yv(>a{, a^yu^ta. a.^yu^a. t trux'tots ffvx.a,s t ffuxia ffuxJa.^ offria. otrra,. Yet ^, Gen. pr0y Qgvros ( 104). 2. In the dual of the third declension, tt becomes n ; as, rti%tt ni%*. In the older Attic writers, we find the same contraction in the Nom. plur. of nouns in -ivt j as, /Sas^Xus /3a0-/Xf (incorrectly written -??), instead of the common /3a0-, the syllables on and 0/, except in the Infinitive, become M (i. e. the o and i unite, absorbing the n and i) ; as, Xt ^xr, ^X0t/; J>j- X07,-. Bt JjX0K (Infiu.) JiX0wy, 5^>jf (from J/'^/) J^f; ( 33). 4. In the termination of the second person singular passive, i/ is con- tracted into tj or n, and *eu into y ; as, /30t/Xi Jia< /SowXit/? or 5. For social contractions of i in the augment, see 188, 189. RKMAKK. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might take f)jce according to the preceding rules ; particularly in nouns of the third de- c*3nsion, and in dissyllabic verbs in -i. R. CRASIS. ^ 3S. Crasis (1.), for the most part, follows the CH. 2.J CRASIS. 103 laws of contraction, disregarding, however, an i final, which, according to the best usage, is not even subscribed. But often (2.), without respect to these laws, a final, or (3.) an initial vowel is entirely absorbed. Crasis occurs most'y in poetry. It is commonly indicated by the coronis ( ) ( 1 6), except when this mark is excluded by the rough breathing ; as, raf*ai } otipoi. When an initial vowel has been absorbed without any further change, the words are more frequently separated in writing ; as, el 'pot. The same is sometimes done when a final vowel has been absorbed. And, hence, cases are often referred to aphoeresis and apostrophe which properly belong to crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate rough, when the second word is aspirated, see 65. For the accent, see Prosody. 3O. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub- je<~t to crasis are the following : . The article; thus, for ! ix, a IT/. yx, euar/. For s/ E^a/', ovfto'i. 0,1 ayaS-a/', ayaS-a/. 5 fl^v/j, ougvif. TOV aurau, TUVTOV. (2.) o avj, , or, less (3.) a aTvof, Jxaj. Attic, avr,o. 01 ifio!^ el 'f-ai- r av^a/', Tavd^/ TOW V^XTOS, 3-ovoa.TOS* NOTICS. 1. The neuter forms TO and ra are especially subject to crasis thus, for (1.) TO avr/a, TovvetvTiev, For l)ro>, ' tr, y ovdiv, [ij ; while in the Attic it is retained after t., <, , and , but otherwise passes into ( 29). Thus, Dor. 'a^iga, Att. fi/tiga, ton. fi/u.i^ Dor. Sa^oj, iraLya., etixvra;, Att. and Ion. ^tifto;, wyn, uxvrvs Dor. and Att. >$id t voa.'y/u.ei, Ion. ffotyin, T^Jjy^a. So, even in diphthongs, Ton. vt/f, yo*iv; t for vj, y^af;, and in Dat. pi. of Dec. I., ->;]?, for -.T/ytflj, broad pronunciation, which was imitated by the Attics in the lyric parts of their drama ( 6). 2. Short a. is retained by the Doric in some words, where, in the Attic, it passes into g ; and in some (particularly verbs in -<*/) by the Attic, where it becomes t in the Ionic. Thus, Dor. r^a^, "Aora^jj, OK.&, (>Sffi Att. again,

ircieu, riffJiTlu, 3. In nouns in -/y, -tus, the characteristic t commonly passes, in the Ionic, into i throughout ; as, ra>./j, v, r/, /j (contr. f?). 4. As the long of t and o, or the contraction of n and oo or i, the stncter Doric prefers the long vowels n and u to the closer diphthongs u and w ; while, on the other hand, the Ionic is particularly fond of protracting t and o to 11 and 9v or 01. Thus, Dor. ^j'^ lu^os Gen. of Dec. n., TU u^a.tu Infin. lujjjv, ^;^>!v, vvvuv ' for /', ^oyXaj, row ovgctvov, lu^tTv^ ^a.ionv^ vvvovv. Ion. |s?v;, fiovvos, roiy, for ^svaf, povos, foe*. Att. xo^o?, flv^a, fl'^a; Ion. xoupof, otJ\fj.*, ou^of Dor. xv), \\i)ffei 3d pers. pi. of verbs, ip/tiffi, XOUVTOKTI, for ^d-/, K^virrovffi. The Doric has here great variety, both employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though > were simply dropped before ), the common diphthongs of contraction ( 34), and the ./Eolic diphthongs; thus, Ace. pi. rs^vaj and -ri%vus (Theoc. 21. 1) ; rovs Xuxovs and rus Xvxof (Theoc. 4. 11) ; its and y, one; Mowo-a, M^ passed into the other cases. We find also Ion. S-wiJ^a, r^uv/^a. (yet better rj^), for B-v//.K, r^ocvf^ee.. In all these words, ww is written by some with a dire- 8is ; as, Suvpct. 4O. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the Attic are often RESOLVED in the other dialects, especially the Ionic and jEolic, into separate sounds. In the Ionic, the reso lution of , with c prolonged, into r/t, is especially common ; as (faatlifirji xA/j'/c, for (SaatJitta^ xJidg. NOTKS. a. On the other hand, the Ionic in a few cases employs contrac- tion whene the Attic omits it, particularly of on into u ; as, ti s , i'/3(ra, tvu- fety fiuSia, fly&vxavTa, for /^j, i/Sa>?a-, ivevira, /3. The fondness of the Ionic for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in some cases, to change v to a. ( 50) after a vowel (which, if before , now becomes l) ; as, 'Agitrrayogia, t$wiTa, for 'Ag/0-Tasya^av, i^i/vay-ra. C. In CRASIS, the Doric and Ionic often differ from the Attic by uniting the o of the article with and ul initial, to form w and ot ; as, TO oiff&lfi Kii^dsg ' ol wj^of?, an'dyfg ' ol ainoloi (>j roAot. In the following erases, which are found in Herodotus, and the two first also in Homer, the smooth breathing has txken the place of the rough ; a up- CH. *^. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 107 el xx/, Jxxa/. Other dialectic erases are, Dor. a i'Xaif'j,-, uXufyoi o t, w| xai Jx, xi?x xa/ tin, xji-n Ion. a iVaef, 47. III. QUANTITY. For a short vowel in the Attic, the other dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the converse. Thus, Ion. $/rXjave? for /TXa-/aj Ion. T'/tIffw, 0, yikwvitg, ; and a palatal, ; thus, become as tin-nine tfif %/, yfft* yoxu. %-/3*i and many vprbs in -2> as, for pil.io'ttuj piXiZv, for QHeirbv, . ^T 0-T, (2.) yr *T, rsruxra/. EXCEPTION. Two lingual mutes may remain together, if both are radi- cal ; as, ^arrar, 'ArS/'f. ^ 9>$. III. Before p, a labial mute becomes , a palatal, y, and a lingual, a ; thus, become as become as rfjt 2rXA2, for ^ ^>v^ (Insc. Potid.) ; so, Al'KAI, TOAAOrON, and even E22AMOI (cf. 57. 5, 68. 3), for &, x/, X0y0y, Iv situ.'*. /3. Before ft in the Perfect passive, sometimes becomes a,(rp.u,i for xsxX?Xa, 2ffa.. Add these forms, mostly from Homer, %poet t (X^oe, iWa, 'io?o(*.a.i, x'lpffu, 'ixigtra., 3. In the Nominative, the formative a (1.) after p, and sometimes (2.) after v, becomes f, which is then trans- posed, and absorbed ( 31) by the preceding vowel ; as, for (2.) . Except in Sa^ ( 109). 4. In the Dative plural of the third declension, v preceding o without an intervening T, is dropped ; as, for ^.i>.a. U'"^ ''" Dat. Plur Verbs in 3d Pers. Plur. a.v(ra.i from 5O. 7. In the Dative plural of syncopated liquids, and of d(jT7?(>, star, the combination -t^o-, by metathesis and the change of t to , became -^j*a. (2.) ^/^oj, NOTES, a. Upon the same principle, i%u becomes i%*> and whenever p is reduplicated, the first p becomes smooth, and, as it then cannot stand at the beginning of a word ( 13. 2), is transposed; as, for pifitpa, 'ippiQet. Yet we find, by a softening of the second , piguv&ftiva, . 59, p^tt^ta^iva, Anacr. Fr. 105, fify&< Find. Fr. 281. /3. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by the same rough mute, bat, instead of it, by the cognate smooth ; as, the Epic upon the same principle, ILvppos ( 13. 2). O3. IX. The semivowels v, g, and s, are the only consonants that may end a word. Any other consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word, is either (1.) dropped, or (2.) changed into one of these, or (3.) assumes a vowel ; thus, for ^ttX/r, fAiXi. <0lc, yvtp (yvn$\ rv$ (v uxc), xo'o5. Hence the formative v of the Accusative is changed into (^ 50) after a consonant, except in a few cases, in which a lingual mute preceding v is dropped ; thus, for ywT, yuT, For xX/K and opviv. T, yiXoira and 'yiXwi* CH. 8.J EUPHONIC LAWS. 113 ^64. X. A consonant is sometimes inserted or transposed, to soften the sound. Thus, 1. When a simple vowel is brought by inflection or composi- tion before an initial , a smooth Q is inserted ; as, igytaaa, ccQQwatog, eniQ^cavvv^i, from Q(awvp,i (-, -, and inl prefixed) but evguuTos (the diphthong tv prefixed). 2. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought be lore A or p, the cognate middle mute is inserted ; as, from avdyog, from NOTE. If the nasal is initial, it is then dropped from the difficulty of Bounding it ; e. g., the roots of /SX/rrw and (&.*>* xu are thus changed ; ptXir-, ftliT-, (U/3X/T-, /3A/T-; po\- t t**.o-, ^/3A-, 0A.a-; so fyoros, mortal, derived from pofos, Lat. mors. 3. Transposition especially affects a liquid coming before another consonant ; as, for* #o'^axw, #>waxw, for /?/5Ax, /&'- ^ 65. B. IN THE CONNECTION OF WORDS. I. When a smooth mute is brought by (1.) era- sis or (2.) elision before the rough breathing , it is changed into its cognate rough ; as, for (1.) xee.i o, xoti oi } % and eJ?) ; go'if/.tov ( <]*>), S'ja* / from T II. Some words and forms end eithei with or without a final consonant according to . The v thus assumed is called y paragogic. It is sometimes employed by the poets before a consonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most kinds of verse, some of the best editors write it uniformly at the end of a line. In Ionic prose it is generally neglected, but in Attic prose it is sometimes found even befoi'e a consonant in the middle of a sentence. In grammars and lexicons, a paragogic letter is commonly marked thus: "*o$w(f), #4. ' . ^ 68. C. SPECIAL RUL:S. 1. The preposition ?, out of, becomes ex before a consonant, and admits no .further change ; as f'x xxo5v, fxastco, 2. The adverb ov, not, before a vowel, assumes x, which becomes^ before the rough breathing; as ov may perhaps be regarded as the original forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to their close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following word, and therefore forms no real exception to the rule in 63. When orthotone, they conform to the rule, the one by assuming f, and the other by dropping *. 3. In composition, the preposition fV, in, retains its v before Q and a ; while avv, with, drops its v before a followed by an- other consonant, and before ; but before a followed by a vowel, changes v to a ; as, {vgnnKa, tvatlw (yet tQv9paq often- er than frpvdyioc); avairjfjn (for aiWr^jtm), uvvyla ' ovaatvu (for OVV. Aspiration is sometimes transposed; as, Ion. etXri^uv, for iru II. COORDINATE MUTES 49) ; as, Ion. and ^Eol., x for S) for |svaj, /;AeVx, apple-tree, pear-tree, y ^Trf/loc, vine, ?} fivfaof, papyrus, y ^w(, country, ri Alyvnioc, Egypt, $ vrjaos, island, TJ 2'a^oc, Samos, y nolic, tity, fj sltxxfdni t uMr, Laced(zmo?i ; TO ovyor,Jig, 10 ^lov, apple, il Tty.vov, child, TO urdounodvt', slave, TO yvvaiov, dim. of yvrrji woman, TO -nuidlov, little boy or girl. $ 7 6. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the signification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form of the theme or root, according to the following rules. I. In the FIRST DECLENSION (fl 7), all words in -aj and -^ 118 DECLENSION. [BOOK II are masculine ; all in -a and -y, feminine ; as, o ictpiag, 6 vav- irjg' 7? OiXi'a, 77 Tt^UJ?. II. In the SECOND DECLENSION (ff 9), most words in -og and -ojg are masculine, but some are feminine or common ; vvordi in -oy and -wv are neuter ; as, o AO/O, 6 ytJ? * ^ o5o^, ^ f'w, dawn; o, ^ ^EO?, gorf, o, rj aoxros, bear ; TO ovxov, TO avw/fwr. Except when the diminutive fonn in -ay is given to feminine proper names ; w Asavr/ov, Yxtixtttov. III. In the THIRD DECLENSION (J[f[ 11-14), a. All words in -evg are masculine ; all in -to and -nvg, femi- nine ; and all in -a, -t, -v, and -o?, neuter ; as, o tTiTui;?, o |U- vg, amphora; rj ^w, 15 >'i'? * *b aw^a, TO fte'At, honey, TO TO b. All abstracts in -r?c and -t?, and most other words in are feminine ; as, 17 ^/UXI'T;C, sweetness; % dvra^ig^ power, , poesy ; r) ylg, y nohg. c. All labials and palatals, all liquids (except a few in which o is the characteristic), and all liquid-mutes are either masculine or feminine. d. Nouns in which the root ends in, 1.) -WT-, -*v-, or -J/T-, are masculine ; as, o /e'io^, -WTO?, laugh ter ; 6 AI/UJJV, -eVo? o Af'tov, -ovroc, 6 udovg, o ylyag, o Ifiag, -dviog, thong. Except r ouf, uros, ear, TO q>us, otvos, mind, and a few names of cities ( 75) ; as, i 'Puftvous, -ovvros, Rliamnus. 2.) -3-, or -i9-, are feminine ; as, ?y lu^nrdg, -'^oc, ^orcA, ^ toi?, -idog, strife, r\ gfapvd -vdog, cloak ; T) xo'ouc, -v&oc, helmet. Except ', tt ?;, ra/3'f, child, o *ous, *ol'os, foot, o, f> agv/f, -I^af, A/rf. 3.) -r-, or --, are neuter ; as, TO ^'TTO, -uiog, TO xc'oa^, -TOJ, -aog. B. NUMBER. The Greek has three numbers; the SIN- GULAR, denoting one; the PLURAL, denoting more than one ; and the DUAL (dufilis, from duo, two), a variety of the plural, which may be employed when only two are spoken of. Thus, the singular avS^ray signifies man, the plural uvfyavei, men (whetn er two or more), and the dual &&&>*(, two men. TVe dual is most usr-d in the Attic Greek. In the ^Eolic dialect CH. l.J CASE. 119 (as in the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek dialects,) and in the Hellenistic Greek, the dual does not occur, except in Ivo, two, and , both (Lat. duo, ambo). C. CASE. ^78. The Greek has five cases; 1. The Nominative, expressing the subject of a sentence. 2. " Genitive, " the point of departure, or cause. 3. " Dative, the indirect object, or accom- paniment. 4. " Accusative, direct limit. 5. " Vocative, address. NOTES, a.. From the general character of the relations which they denote, the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases. /3. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right case* and the other three, casus obliqui, the oblique cases. y. For a fuller statement of the use of the cases, see Syntax. D. METHODS OF DECLENSION. ^79. Words are declined, in Greek, by an- nexing to the root certain AFFIXES, which mark the distinctions of gender, number, and case. There are three sets of these affixes ; and hence arise three distinct methods of declining words, called the FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD DECLENSIONS. The first of these methods applies only to words of the mas- culine and feminine genders ; the second and third apply to words of all the genders. In some of the cases, however, the affixes vary, in the same declension, according to the gender ; so that, to know how a word is declined, it is necessary to ascertain three things ; 1. its root, 2. the declension to which it belongs, and 3. its gender. The mode in which the gender is marked has been already stated ( 74, /S). From the theme (i. e. the Nom. sing.) and the gender, we can often determine at once the root and the declension. If it is necessary to mark these expli- citly, it is commonly done by giving, with the theme, the Genitive singular, or its ending. If the Genitive singular ends in -0.9 or -r,;, or in -ov from a theme in -a; or -ns, the word is of the first declension; if it ends in -ov from a theme in -os or -ay, the word is of the second declension ; if it ends in -o;, tlie word is of the third declension. The root is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive} or it may be obtained by throwing off any affix beginning with a voweL Thus the nrwns, o r&uiett, steward. r\ O'IXIK, house, v y?,*W*, tonque, o "o7,u,af, DECLENSION. - GENERAL RULES. [BOOK II pe.ople, and o"A^a.-^, d.rab, make in the Genitive, rap'tov, a/x/ ftou, and "A/>a.fio{. From these genitives, we ascertain that ra^/a?, /*/, anc, yXuntra. belong to the first declension, ^jj^a? to the second, and "A^a^ to the third. By throwing off the affixes -ay, -as?, -;, and -at, we obtain the roots retfti-) oixi-, y^uiro-, 5^-, and 'A^a/3-. The words are then declined by an- nexing to these roots the affixes in the table (^f 5). (j 8O. In the declension of words, the follow- ing GENERAL RULES are observed. I. The masculine and feminine affixes are the same, except in the Nominative and Genitive sin- gular of the first declension. The neuter affixes are the same with the masculine and feminine, except in the direct cases, singular and plural. II. In neuters, the three direct cases have the same affix, and in the plural this affix is always a. III. The dual has but two forms ; one for the direct, and the other for the indirect cases. IV. In the feminine singular of the first declen sion, and in the plural of all words, the Vocative is the same with the Nominative. 81. RKMARKB. 1. The use of the Voc. as a distinct form is still further limited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and per- sonal appellatives and epithets, are sufficiently employed hi address to require n separate form for this purpose. Hence the partici]>le, pronoun, article, and numeral have no distinct Voc. ; and in respect to other words which are de- clined, the following observations may be made. . Masculines of Dec. I. are commonly names or epithets of persons, and therefore form the Voc. sing. ft. In Dec. II., the distinct form of the Voc. is commonly used, except for euphony or rhythm ; as, T H 0/Xaj, u

/Xaj 2, MiviAat A. 189. 'HiX/aj n *r. 277. To avoid the double i, Sta,-, god (like deus in Latin), has, hi classic writers, no distinct Voc. ; yet 0u St. Matth. 27. 46. y. In Dec. III., few words, except proper names and personal appellatives and epithets, have a distinct Voc. ; and even in those which have, the Norn. is sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Attic writers ; thus, r ll -raa-at xX< Ar. Ach. 971 ; but T ft ra'X/f Soph. Phil. 1213. ATv Soph. Aj. 89 ; but *fl

89. 2. An inspection of the table (fl 5) will likewise sho\v, that, in regular declension, a.) The Nom. sing. masc. and (except in Dec. I.) fern, always ends in ?. .) The Uat. sing, always ends in t, either written in the line or subscribed. y.) The Ace. sing, (except in neuters of Dec. III.) always ends in v, or its corresponding vowel ($ 50) ; and the Ace. plur. masc. and fern, is always formed by adding j to the Ace. sing. ( 34, 58). S.) The Gen. plur. always ends in uv. .) In Dec. I. and II., the affixes are all open (i. e. begin with a vowel), and ill constitute a distinct syllable. In Dec. III., three of the affixes, tr, >, and fft, are clone (i. e. begin with a consonant}, and of these the two first, having no vowel, must unite with the last syllable of the root. .) In the singular of Dec. III., the direct cases neut., and the Voc. masc. and fern., have no affixes. NOTE. It follows, from nos. t and , that words of Dec. I. and II. are par i syllabic (par, e(jwtl\ that is, have the same number of syllables in all their cases ; but words of Dec. III. are imparisyllabic, that is, have more syllables in some of their cases than in others. 3. The Table (fl 6) exhibits the affixes as resolved into their two classes of ELEMENTS ; T. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS, which are significant additions, marking distinctions of number, case, and gender ; and II. CONNECTING VOWELS, which are euphonic in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings with the root. For farther illustration, see the following sections upon the history of Greek declension. E. HISTORY OF GREEK DECLENSION. \> 83. The early history of Greek declension is beyond the period not merely of written records, but even of tradition. It can be traced, therefore, only by the way-marks which have been left upon the language itself, and by the aid of comparative philology. The following view of the subject has much evidence in its support, and serves to explain the general phenomena of Greek declension, and of the use of the numbers and cases. Greek declension was progressive. At first, the simple root was used, as in some languages even at the present day, without any change to denote num- ber or case ; thus, !%S-u, fish, yv-r, vulture, whether one or more were spoken of. Then the plural number was marked, by affixing to the root i, the sim- , pie root, of course, now becoming singular, as each new formation limits the gse of prior forms . thus, Singular, /^9-u, fish, Plural, i^vs, fishes. yvTT, vulture, yviri, vultures. The next step was to make a separate form, to express the indirect, as distinguished from the direct relations. This was done by annexing i to the root, and this form became plural by adding one of the common signs of the plural, We have now the distinction of case ; thus, u 122 DECLENSION. [BOOK 11 Singular. Plnral. Direct Case, l^M ; x M t yvT yvri Indirect Case, I%&u7 <$" yvtri ywiv ^> 8 41 Each of these cases was afterwards subdivided. (A.) From the Direct Case were separated, in the masculine and feminine genders, tw new cases, the one to express the subject, and the other the direct object, of an action, i. e. the Nominative, and Accusative cases. The Nominative was formed by adding 5, as the sign of 'the subject, to the old Direct forms ; thus, Sing. i%$vi, yuvs, Plur. 'i%Svis t yu*a- The Accusative was formed by adding to the root, as the sign of the direct object, v, which in the plural took one of the common signs of the plural, j ; thus, Sing. i%Suv, yvirv, Plur. 1%3-uvt, yv-rvt, or, by the euphonic change of into its corresponding vowel ( 58, 63, R.), Sing, yvxa., Plur. 4%3-vKf, yufxc. (13.) From the Indirect Case was separated a new case to express the subjective, as distinguished from the objective relations, i. e. the Genitive. This was formed by affixing $, or commonly, with a euphonic vowel, oS-. In the plural, this took the plural affix v ; thus, aS-v. But by the laws of euphony, which afterwards prevailed, neither $, nor 3-v could end a word ( 63). Therefore, 3- either was changed to e, or was dropped, or assumed the vowel i (commonly written with paragogic t, 67. 3) ; and oSv became uv by the absorption of the S ($, perhaps, first passing into , Xayan ra,fti-u-v, ra.ftta.9 Voc. Xay-a, Xayi ra.fti-a,, ru-ft'ta. Plur. N. V. \by-o-t, Aaym ra.ftt-a.-i, retftieti Gen. Xay-f-eav, Xayw ra.ftt-a.-uv, rufttuv Dat. Xay-a-sa-/, Xbyotfft, -aij rufti-ei-tft, ra.ftia.iffi, -a.it Ace. Xay-a-a;, Xflyaw; ra.ftt-a.-as, ra.ft'ia.s Dual N. A.V. Xoy-a-s, Xay ra.fti-a.-i, roift'ta. G. D. Xy-a-;>, Xaya/> ra.ftl-a.-iv, ru.ftia.it In the Nom. and Ace. sing, -of these declensions, the primitive direct form, without s or > appended, was sometimes retained ; as, Nom. Qviirra,, 'fr-rbrA ( 95. 2 ; compare the Latin nauta, poeta), o Ace. via, iu, *A$a ( 97). So the neuters ro, aXXa, a.vr'o, ixi7ve, o ( 97). - 87. We have thus far treated only of the masculine gender. In the neuter (which occurs only in the second and third declensions), since things without life have no voluntary action, the distinction of subject and object is obviously of far less consequence, and therefore in this gender the separation of the Nom., Ace., and Voc. was never made. The place of these three cases -continied to be supplied by a single Direct Case, which in the singular of Dec. III. was the simple root, and in the singular of Dec. II. ended in a (the > being either euphonic, or more probably having the same force as in the >cc., and marking the objective character of the gender). The plural has the same form in both declensions, simply appending, instead of the old i, a, (which, as the corresponding vowel of v ( 50), is more objective in its character), and without a connecting vowel. We give, as examples, ro ^tixov (poetic), tear, ul Dcr. III., and , i * v. /fy. of DPC. II. 124 DECLENSION. [BOOK II Sing. N. A. V. $eixV rs.rnant (cf. 117). Of these the most prominent appears to have been tbe rtigamma ( 22. J). And, although this has disappeared from the language, yt it has left other consonants which have either taken its place, or which were used in like manner with it. The insertion of these consonants, together with different modes of contraction, has given an especial variety of form, in the first and second declensions, to the Dative, singular, which, as the primitive indirect case ( 83), originally performed the offices of both the Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find, 1.) The i appended with the insertion of p, the natural successor of the digamraa. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and Dat., and sometimes oven supplying the place of these cases in the plural, is evi- dently of great antiquity. E. g. Gen. Sing. Dec. I. i| iiw. 295 ; et-r' avrott A. 44. Dat Sing. Dec. I. f

. 238: Dec. II. ?' airoQt M. 302 ; if' Itlttyn N. 308 ; 9f?< H. 366. Gen. and Dat. Plur. Dec. II. a P. 696, T. 397, J. 705 ; av' orrtoQiv %. 134 ; atpQ' orrtoQiv *. 145 ; !xi n. 811 ; Sprf! A. 474 (cf. 479), X. 139. ft. The following forms in -?^/ I. 300, o. 370. 3.) The / appended with the insertion of #. This form appears only in the Epic %%! (improperly written by some ?/, cf. 89. y), for the adverbial Dative $, where, A. 607. " 4.) The / contracted with the preceding o in the second declension into at ( 32). This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in adverbial Datives ; as, o'xoi, at home (but o!x,u>, to a house ; cf. in Latin, domi and domus), viloi, 'IirSftoT, 01, o-roi. Yet lv 'Itr^oT Simon. Fr. 209 ; l Inscr. Cret. ; rol ldp.ot Inscr. Boeot. 5.) The common form, in which the / is absorbed by the preceding vowel ; as, a.-i a, o-i of ; thus, O 1 . The forms of the Genitive in -o$tv or -3-u ( 84. B) remained "in the common language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence; as, "xo9-sv, from home, aXXeSsv, avroSiv, 'AS-jv>j9^iy. As examples of their use a>? decided Genitives, may be cited ig Attruft.v$tv 0. 304, l| ay^evoS-tv 0. 19, XT' a^oS-v X. 18; and the pronominal forms i^sSiy, O-J^EV, t^t, which even occur in Attic poets. 11 120 DECLENSION. [BOOK II CHAPTER II. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. I. THE FIRST DECLENSION. [For the affixes and paradigms, see TT1T 5 -8. J <$> OS. For the original affixes of Dec. I., which all had a as a connecting vowel, see 86, 88. In most of these affix. es, either became part of a diphthong, or else, either through contraction or the force of analogy, became long. Short however remained in the singular, 1.) In the direct cases of feminines, whose characteristic was a, a double consonant, or H; as, yluaoa, /Awaaav (fl 7), dtifiie, thirst, <5o'|, opinion, c', root, w^tPJU*, contest. NOTES, a. Add a few feminines in -Xa, and some in -v, particularly femaif. a})}>ellatives ; as, wayXa and avasrawAa, rest, 'i%i$v&, viper, ftigtftva,, care, Vioirot va, mistress, Xta/va, lioness; likewise axavSa, thorn. /3. Add, also, many feminines in -a pure and -^. These have mostly a diphthong in the penult, and may all be recognized by the accent, except the proper names K/p^*, TLvppa,, and the numeral /n/a, one. The principal classes are, (a) Polysyllables in -no. and -<, except abstracts in -/ from verbs in -ivu ; as, X]3-t/a, truth, tUvaid., good-will, /3U'w, to sell), perfumer , Voc. vaviix, 2xvftt*, //f'(Kj (but l/eyays, Perses, a man's name, VOC. UiQtjri), ytO)fltTQ(X, (JIVQOTlw'ku. ^ O3. In the singular, long passed, by precession, into TJ, unless preceded by f, i, o, or po (^ 29) ; as, OH. 2.J FIRST DECLENSION. ] 11 but TK^utac, T ( tm*, (/x:, ax<, #r^, dvytxv (fl 7), Idta, i< ea fof/w, need, po, color. NOTE. Long a. likewise remains in the pures, vo&, grass, O-TOK, jiorch, yv&, field, o-ocvet, gourd, XK^UK, walnut-tree, /., olive-tree, Nava^xaa, Nuusicaa; in the words, oc.Xa.Xa,, war-cry, i, a'aw, stream ; in some proper names, as Tvgws and in compounds of ^s- 9*5. I. In the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect retains throughout the original a ; while in the singular, the Ionic has in most of those words in which the Attic and Common dialects have long , and even in some in which they have short , particularly derivatives in -u* and -a/a ($ 44) ; thus, Dor. Ttpu,, r A/x-x, Sapph. 66 (44). On the other hand, A/u'ri? Ap. Rh. 3. 386, for A/T&, Voc. of 3. The old genitive affixes, and uv, which often occur in the Epic writ- ers, were contracted as follows : a.) In the Ionic dialect, they were regularly contracted into u and wv, with the insertion of t after a consonant ( 35) ; as, 'A-r^/Saa (' \-rotfiu} 'Ar^s/^w, A3-^5wy (Arf/**J>J AvgUMMV* Bateau B^y, 'Rgfttieo O. 214, ivfAfjtiKtu A. 165, 'A*-/* B. 461. /S.) In the Doric, absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became and av ( 45. 1) ; as, 'Ar^s/Baa 'Ar^t/Sa, 'A.rosiba.uv 'Ar^<5av. y.) In the Attic, 0.0 and a^/v were contracted into ov (by precession from ea, 28, 29) and uv ; as, 'Ar^/^afl ('Arg*) *Ar^/Jav, 'Ar^tAMw 'AT^/^A t. 119). An old contraction into -&i, -9-*, and -%i, see 89, 90. For the Doric and ^Eolic forms of the Ace. plur., *cc 45. 5. 7. Antique, Ionic, and Doric forms are sometimes found in Attic writers particularly, a.) The Dor. Gen. in -a", from some nouns in -as, mostly proper names ; as, ogviS-oS-ns&S) fowler, Tufyva.;, KaXX/a; Gen. flw3-o&jg, Tufi/avct, KA.- A/a. So ah 1 contracts in -j ; as, (Zappa.;, G. fioppa (^ 7). /3.) The Ion. Gen. in -, from a few proper names in -y ; as, r>jf Gen. y.) The old Dat. plur. in -r/, which is frequent in the poets. So, in Pla- to, ri%vemri Leg. 920 e, /i/u.'^aurt Phaedr. 276 b. II. THE SECOND DECLENSION. [For the affixes and paradigms, see 86, 87 ; TT1T 5, 6, 9, 10.] 97. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa ive singular are wanting ( 86), 1.) In the theme of the article; thus, o for og. 2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns aUog, d?, txflvog, and og thus, TO, aJUo, avio, fxttvo, o, for TO'V, , &c. NOTE. In crasis with the article ( 39), and in composition with the pro- nouns rtuos and rofof, the neuter a.lr more frequently becomes aura'v thus, TOtlrov and TO.VTO, for TO a,uri roiovrev and voiovro, TOITOVTOV and 3.) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension 98), particularly in f t i'o^c, dawn, r\ Aw?, threshing-floor, y r) K, &C. 7. In the Attic declension, the Nom. plur. neut. is contracted, like the the: cases, into i, -txos, fox, the last vowel of the root is lengthened in the theme. Compare 112. . y. Fyvsi, woman, wife, which is irregular in having its theme after the form of Dec. I., and also in its accentuation, is thus declined : S. N. yv\r tj G. yv- va.tM.bs, D. yifvatxi, A. yvva.7x.tx,, V. yvveci P. N. yvvKixiSi G. yvva.ix.uv, D. yv* /!/, A. ywxTxKf D. N. ywaTxt, G. yvva.ix.oiv. The old grammarians ha\-e alsd cited from Comic writers the forms, A. yvvfa, P. N. ywtti, A. yvv&s, ac- cording to Dec. I. 1 02. MASCULINE AND FEMININE LINGUALS. These lose their characteristic in the theme and Dat. pi. ( 55), in the Ace. sing., when formed in v ( 63. R., 100. 2), and in the Voc. ( 63). NOTKS. a. If a palatal is thus brought before *, it unites with it in Jj ( 51), as (avaxT?, avaxj) av (^f 11), fi (vvxrs) vv%, night ; if to the end of a word, it is dropped ( 63), as (avax-r, v*) v. Tliis distinct Yoc., however, is used only in addressing a god ; otherwise, S. v*$ (or, by frequent crasis, i'va|). /3. For the change of when brought before the affixes s and , or to the end of a word, see 112. *, 113. 3. y. Barytones in -if and -vf form the Ace. sing, in both and , the latter being the more common affix ; as, ^^/j (T 1 1 ), fi fyif, strife, i, '* %/*, bird; Ace. %cioira, and %a.oiv (as the name of a goddess, the form in -a is always used, and sonn-t lines, also, in poetry ; but, otherwise, the form in -, yet see H. Gr. iii. 5. 16), loiv and poet. ?/$, v/ and poet. S^i^a.. So also, xXtif (^f 11), o yi^v;, linu/hter, and the compounds of TUI/?, font ; thus, Ace. xXi?3a and xXtiv, yi'^ura. and yi^wv, OtiiToix and (">/3^Kros (a or ), pgqv-a; ( 37. 1 ). REMARK. Those linguals in which a liquid precedes the lingual will be treated as a distinct class ( 109). B. LIQUIDS. [IT 12.] ^ 1O5. MASCULINE AND FEMININE LIQUIDS. In these, except >lc, salt, sea (in the singular, only Ionic and poetic), the characteristic is always either v or Q. For the changes in the theme and Dat. pi., see ^ 57-59. When the characteristic is r, it depends upon the preceding vowel whether the v or the $ is changed in the theme ; as follows. 1.) If an E or vowel precede, the g is changed ; as in ijy, -8vo?, ditlptov, -ovog (IT 12) ; o fir t v, fi^vog-, month, o jgttf*k t , storm, winter. Except o unit, xrsv'.f, comb, the numeral &, lves,one (^[ 21), and the Ionic pits (as from root /*EV-, yet Gen. f*wos) for />jy, month (Hdt. ii. 82). 2.) If precede, in nouns the g is changed, but in adjectives THIRD DECLENSION. - LIQUIDS. [BOOK II. the v ; thus, o //', /Zuvoc, Pan, o naiar^ -avo?, j9#an ; but jieAas, -avos -(IT 19;, T'Aw?, -MVOC, wretched. 3.) If t or v precede, the v is changed; as in ^'c, giro's (IF 12), 6 foAqpfc* -Jroe, dolphin, o *o'^x^, -Bros, Phorcys. NOTES. . The v remains in ^so-j/v, -t7v?, wooden tower ; and most words in - t daughter, G. S-vyuTt^s 9-z/yar^oj, D. Svyarioi SwyaTgi. vt yaffTri^, stomach, G. ya.os, D. yatffriot yetrr^i. fl Anf*,vrv, Ceres, G. Af*.vrtot A^fir^e;, D. Ati/u.^Tioi A*J^JT^ also, A. AjJMJJTl NOTES. . In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and sometimes employ it in other cases than those which are specified. /3. For the Dat. pi., see 59. FWrrj has not only fc; (jttl^Mf) /nil^ovc f/Vo.v (5| 17). Compare .104, 119, 123. . NOTE. A similar contraction is common in the Ace. of "A-rflXXwv, Ajx>llo, and Heirtituv, Neptune; thus, 'A.Aft/, ('AoraXXwa) 'AwaXXw (iii. 1. 6); Hoviiluvn, Yloiriiiu. See, for both the uncontracted and the contracted forms, PI. Oat. 402 d, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, o xvxiuv, .*!, mixed drink ; Ace. xvxiuva, and, rather poetic, KVJUU (x. 316 ; xuxnu \. 624) : >j yXrf^wx, -; in the theme, instead of -us ; as, K*.vft,r,;, -tore;, Clemens, Outers, -ivros, Valens. y. If the characteristic is -v9--, the v remains before ; ( 58. 0). In 'ba.pZo (^ 13), the s is simply dropped in the theme. REMARKS. 1. A few proper names in -a?, -avros, form the Voc. after the analogy of the theme ; that is, v becomes , and is then contracted ; thus, "ArXaj, -KVTOS, V. ("ArXavr, "A-rXav, "ArXaa) "ArXa n.oXwS^}, V. HaXw^a^a. 2. Nouns and adjectives in -/<, -ivroe, preceded by a or >?, are usually con tracted ; as, o fXoLxbii; TXasxanj, cake, G. TXaxoivraj TXaxot/VTaj Vifnim r;/u%;, honored, F. rift^itriree, Tifj^naaa., N. riftjf, -tos, Mars, o ans py oars, or, as a substantive (vat;?, vessel, being understood), trireme (51 14). Except a few simple adjectives, in which becomes ; as, retQns, -iet (51 17), frXfl'fnf, -iof,full, ^it/^Tj'f, -iof, false. 4.) In monosyllables, o becomes ou ; otherwise, w ; us, V, Ace. /?otv (5f 14), o, ?} ^oi/tf, (>oo?, sumach, o o/* earth; but t<5w\-, -do? (5f 14). NOTES. . Tlu's rule applies also to linguals in which 9 precedes the char acteristic ; thus, and -a; have no plural or dual, except by metapla^m ( 122) ; unless, perhaps, t'ncavt ( 123. ) is to be regarded as simply con- tracted from tineas- ^113. (B.) In cases which have no affix, characteristic becomes c, v, or ft/, or else assumes a euphonic s; and o characteristic becomes 01 , ov . as follows. 1.) If the theme ends in -^c, f becomes tg ; but, otherwise PURES. 13.") is changed as in the theme ; thus, Norn. neut. auq>tg (1f 17), fjdv (Tl 19) ; Voc. T^tjjoft;, JSwx^aifft noh, nfi%v, Innti (fl 14), W (fl 19). 2.) In the theme of neuter nouns, assumes $, becoming itself o ( 28) ; as, TO m^og, -eoc (fl 14), TO i&vos, -eo$, nation, TO o'o?, -5, mountain. Except TO a*-, -105, toum (^ 14), the Epic ra iruiJ, -tot, .flock, and a few foreign names of natural productions in -/, as TO ifi-ri^, -*,-, pepper. 3.) In the Vocative, o becomes o7, if the theme ends in -a' or -we ; but ov, if it ends in -ovg', as, foot, i<5o7, fiov (fl 14) ; and in like manner (cf. 112. ), Oldinov (ft 16). 1 14. REMARKS. 1. After the analogy of s and o, characteristic becomes av in ygaitg and rav<; (tl 14), and as- sumes in the theme of neuters ; as, TO yigag, -uog (|f 14), TO oc, o/rf a'e. 2. In the Accusative singular of pures, the formative v be- comes ( 100. 2) except when the theme ends in -c, -1$, -fc, -avg, or -ot/c ; thus, #w'?, t/'(>o)c, nWrtv^, Tog, i]^(o (Tf 14), ooKprjS (tf 17) ; Acc. ^oj, ^'oo>, Innia, To<^f, uiSotx, rtfuj 5 - (t 14), A. 2x aj (Plat.), 2x S a-rw (Xen.); i "Aen;, Mars, A. "Ao and "A^jv. 3. When the characteristic is changed to a diphthong before o in the theme, the same change is made before at in the Da- tive plural ; as, Irnievoi, fioval, yQuval, vuvul (fl 14). 115. II. CONTRACTION. For the general laws, see ^ 31-37. The following remarks may be added. 1. Pures in -rjc, -oc. -oJ, and -w$, -oo^, are contracted in all the cases which have open terminations. See TQi^Q^g, .Ta^ar*^-, c //oxA8r/?, TfT^oc, fata, nidus (f[ 14), (woX? (ff 17). Add a few neuters in -ng ; as, TO yfQ<*$ (H 14), TO xo6c, meat. XOTKS. . Of nouns in -u and -j, -aj, the uncontracted form scarcely occurs, even in the poets and dialects. /3. In proner names in -X*K, contracted -*X>Jf (from xXsy, renown), the Dat. and sometimes the Acc. sing, are doubly contracted. See 'H^axXsjjj (1 14). For the later Voc. "H^Xsj, compute 6 105. R. The Norn, pi H*XUJ, in the Ion. form ( 121. 4), occurs, with Qvfiis, PL Theaet 169 b. 136 THIRD DECLENSION [BOOK II 2. In other pures, contraction is, for the most part, con fined to three cases ; the Nom. and Ace. plur., and the Dat sing. The contractions which are usual or frequent in these words are exhibited in the tables. Contraction sometimes occurs in cases in which it is not given in the tables, and is sometimes omitted in cases in which it is given. These deviations from common usage are chiefly found hi the poets. 116. 3. In the Attic and Common dialects, the endings go?, -, and -eas, instead of the common contraction, receive in certain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last vowel. This change takes place, a.) In the Gen. sing, of nouns in -/?, -vg, and -tt-c, and sometimes of nouns in -t and -v ; as, Tio'At?, Gen. nofoog JirixvG, -&), iTiTisuc, -a>, 'UTI>, -tog and -ts, IvviFtS twits' ettio'Sis afioos, T/2oj rii%io? } ya2f (t passing into its kindred vowel, 28), y2 yej (^ 14) ; Voc. 2war2 ^tux^a-n;, rein- fs2 Ttvt; (^ 14). The peculiar form of the Voc. of })%&> and a.'&us has arisen from the change of ? to its corresponding vowel ( 50) and then con- traction with precession ( 29) ; thus, ^o2 foot ^a/~ (cf. 45, 5, 86, 112. /3). (5.) rj?, a^o'2f aft at s (f 14). For y%u, see 112. /3, and compare w%o7 above (4.). In the Dat. p!, the short vowel remains unchanged ; as, i.i%iFv -rrtxiJii, xri%,iF fvtv, ai/rrtF eiffTt) (t 14). v ^ In feminines, it was natural that the inserted breathing or consonant should commonly assume a softer form. In this fonn, it appear* to 1-2 138 THIRD DECLENSION. [BOOK 11 have been most nearly akin to the lingual middle mute 2 (cf. 49. 2) ; and in a great number of feminines, it acquired a permanent place in the language as this letter. In its previous, and as yet unfixed state, we represent it, for distinction's sake, by a capital A. Before this inserted lingual, a. could re- main, but there was a uniform tendency in t to pass by precession into /. It is a remarkable illustration of this, that in the whole declension, there is not a single instance of t before a characteristic lingual mute. In the progress of the language, feminines in -i-, or with the inserted lingual -sA-, assumed three forms : 1.) The A fell away, leaving the vowel of precession / in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. sing., but the original t in the other cases ; thus, voXis, vroXius, wo- Xu, iroX?, Megarian man, and from the latter, Msya^'y, -tios, Megarian woman. This became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in -is, if we except the large class of abstract nouns in -trig . Especially many feminine adjectives, or words which are properly such, are thus declined. NOTE. We find, also, the same forms in a few masculine or common nouns and adjectives ( 111, 119. 2), and even, in a few words, a corre- sponding neuter formation in -i ( 113. 2). I 1 9. As might have been expected, these three forms are far from being kept entirely separate. Thus, 1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the latter especially in the Ionic and Doric dialects, which were less averse than the Attic to hiatus ( 45, 46) ; as, ri pwi;, wrath, G. pyvi$as and privies * T*- <*, keel, G. To-ribot, r^o-ries, and r^tus particularly proper names, as, KvTfif, G. -itf, and -tot *I, D. p.a.'ya.'bl vii. 3. 32 . o, ft riypis, tijer, (I. riyotof, and in later writers riy^as, PI. N. rlyoiit, G. viygtw some pnpi.'.r names, as, i 2vi**urit, G. -ios, i. 2. 12, r l^/j, G. -it vi. 2. 1 : and the adjectives foif, intelligent, vvrrit, abstemious In like mannei, , j fy^iXwf ( 117. N.), eel, G. iyx'tlvos, PI. N. G i^Xiy rfl , In, ATW, Latona, r,&>s, dawn, Ace. 'lavy Hdt. i. 1, AjjTatJy, '^oUy. The ^Eolic and stricter Doric have here -uv for -ouv ( 44. 4); as, "H^wv Sapph. 75 (91), AT Inscr. Cret. 2. In the Gen. plur., the Ionic sometimes inserts t (cf. 48. 1, 99. 2), S, %riviuv Hdt. ii. 45, /^voittotuv^ Kvdg'ituv, for y^nvuv, [AVOIO^ 3. In the Dat. plur., for the common affix -0- See 71, 84, 85. Homer uses the four forms, though -sv(y) rarely. The forms -s<7^() and !ii, rt^s/and ni^ti, II?>.s/and FI^Xs?, 9reAi/, x'ToXn, and raAu, YIOU! and %*> H. 453. The endings -//, -vi, and - (except in xgt'fy are always contracted ( 118. 2, 115. a); as, xv^a-rr A. 640, V'DCVI II. 526 (this contraction of -ui into -ui is Epic), M I. 618. (c) The endings -to,, -iv, and -sat; are commonly uncontracted, except by synizesis ; as, Stoiti'ia, F. 27, tyiptpi* S. 757, aXyia fi. 7, /SiXsi O. 444, y <. 283; wSCv* K. 95; -To/.U; A. 559, TsX^ia,- Y. 114. So -raX;aj S. 560. (d) The ending it; is used both with and without contraction ; as, TTu E. 194. (e) The neut. plur. ending -# is always contracted, or drops one 140 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [BOOK I*. K (cf. 4. below) ; as, K^O., M-rct, yigx B. 237. The form with the single short a sometimes occurs in the Attic poets; as, xgiA Ar. Pax. 192. (/.) Of eT,-, sheep, out, ear, and 'ygxu;, old woman, the following forms occur in Homer ; N. a'/V, G. oia;, oiog, A. ot'v P. N. '/?, G. oiuv, oluv, D. oliiffffi, o'ilfft, oifftri (cf 119. 2), A. S7 S . N. oZt, G. oSttros' P. N. ouaru, D. 08*,,, v*iut, D. yojj/', V. y^jjt/, 7?y' the Gen. and Ace. are supplied by yoo-ins and y^rv of Dec. I. 3. In common nouns in -ivs, the characteristic tf before a vowel regularly becomes n, in the Epic; as, ivxwas, l-wrii, 5a, /VcrSjsj (once in Horn. ;, this change occurs also in Herodotus, although questioned by critics ; as, /3aJ ; as, 'O^^jj r. 136, Tvtt A. 384, /Saw*? Hdt. vii. 220 (Oracle). We find faifaTf Polyb., D. x/tQett xviQct Cyr. iv. 2. 15. TO xux.s, fleece, poetic, ir. 47 ; PL N. nuia. u. 3, D. XUKTI y. 38. TO ou^xs, floor, poetic, G. otTSso;, D. ovbt'i oititi (all in Horn.). y. Miscellaneous Examples. TO yaw, knee, and TO Voov, spear, G. yovatrog, ^o^xTef, &C. ( 103. N.). For the various forms of Vo^v (of which in the theme there is even the late^form Antiphil. 9), see ^ 16. Those which occur of yoiv correspond; thus, Ion. and poet. y*/Tvvu.^ poet, yewas , yeovi, yauva, yevvuv, and y'ovuv Sapph. 14 (25), yovviffffi. n "tea;, dawn (r. '&-, Attic Dec. II.), G. t*>, D. tea, A. tu and "u> ( 97. 3) Dor. 'dtus (r. 'aa-), G. 0.009 iovt Ion. nus, G. wa?;, D. not, A. rv(>ec., rarer ft,a.gr$v D. pi. ftagruiri Epic a fAK^rv^as, -ev, vr. 423. o, jj a^7f, Wrd, G. %vr$a? (Dor. e^vr^aj, 69. II.), D. a^vrS/, A. e^vr^a and e^v-r PL o^vr^jf, &c. ; from r. e^i-, Sing. N. S^TS, A. a^vr, PL N. egvw,-, G. ogvtuv, A. o'^vt/f and e^r (^ 119). Another form is ro ogvtov, -ov. o of>Qt!>s and ogtyos, a sea-fish, G. l^fyu and l^ov. Compare xtiXu;, \u.yu(. fl G. (^faiaf, %atovt, %(>*f) %('**{ ( 33, 35). vt, skin, surface, G. %(vrof, D. ^{*>W Otfi 104) A. JA/T Ion. and poet. G. ^jaaj, D. ^ja?, A. ^jaat. For Ziy'f, O/7/a-ai/f, nr^a*Xaf, and w/af, see f 16. NOTE. Add the poetic Norn. A $ir Hes. Op. 354, = SoV/f, ^/l ; Ace. X//3 ^Esch. Fr. 49, 65, = X//33 from X//Jf , libation ; Nom. a X?j O. 275, Ace. X? A. 480, = X8w T. 23, XaT 2. 161, lion (in the later Epic, PL X/if, X/i, =*,^T*yu from sj A xav, xv, and Xi Call. Fr. 10-t, PI. N. X2?, &c. o ftuxn;, mushroom, G. JAVXOU and ftvxrirof. fi xn, -,-, poetic

J (u. 509) from X*j, might; Nom. r, ciowu.% lies. Op. 354, = aflcrayw, robbery; Ace. /vois and ^dx^viri Th. vii. 75. TO Sev^ov and Ion. Ssv^sav, ree, G. ^'tvl^u, &c. ; Dec. III. D. Vtfyu, A. jv^; Hdt. vi. 79, PI. N. Vtvlcvi. D. Viv^^tiri (the more common form of the Dat. pi. even in Attic prose ; e^ g. Th. ii. 75). 6 txrivo?, hawk, G. ixr'vau, &c. ; Dec. III. rarer A. JWi"va Ar. Fr. 525, PI. N. "xrlvis Pausan. 5. 14. o xXetios, twig, G. xX5*w, &c. ; Dec. III. poet. D. xXadt, A. *xSa, PI. D. K}.biffi Ar. Av. 239, xXa^fSO-av, A. xXa^aj. o xoivaava;, sharer, G. xetvtuvou, &c. ; Dec. III. PI. N. xoivuvis Cyr. viii. 1. 5, A. xoivavas Ib. 1 6. TO * ? /'vav, %, G. xt'ivau, &c. ; Dec. III. PI. N. x^'ma. Hdt. ii. 92, D. g/. < Ar. Nub. 911. TO ovuoov and o OVIIPOS, dream, G. oviigav and OVS'IOKTOS PI. ovtigx, and mor frequently fivs/^ara. Derived from oWj ( 127). o%ous, ewer, G. w^a^ow, &c. ; Dec. III. PI. D. r^a^ouft Ar. Nub. 272. TO -Uf, /r, G. fl-^of, D. r^/ Dec. II. PI. N. ; and T^V, peacock, G. raw and ruuvoi PI. N. a. and o %uos, space : Dec. I. and III. Sn^a, -uj, and ro $i$of -s*:, M /;*; yVj and TO yaTaj, dell; y /3Xa/3j and ro /3X/3ay, injury; fi yvu- p.r and Ion. and poet. TO yvu/*, -aras, opinion ; re -raS-a; and *$;, sujfer- ini : Dec. II. and III. o^aj (Dor. o%o;), -ou, and TO o^a?, -taj, and also T ^ (Ca, -ares, carriage; o and TO ffxoros (and also fxoriee.), darkness; o and xuQos, cup; &c. B. DEFECT OF DECLENSION. ^ ISC. 1. Some words receive no declension, as the nxmes of the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few ouier foreign words. Thus, TO, TOU, roi V.qp o, rov, TW, TO> 16, TOU, roi 7ia^, passover. NOTE. A word of this kind is termed indeclinable, or an aptote (ci without cases). 2. A few diminutives and foreign proper names, whose root onds with a vowel, receive c in the Nom., v in the Ace., and, & the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have no further declension ; as o A}, barley, etXtfii (r. aA.p6. /3) ; Dat. fern. 2*t (r), 6ofc, N. 286 (akin to this, Ace. & Call. Fr. 243) ; Dat. X/T/ 2. 352, Ace. sing. masc. or pi. neut. Xlra. . 1 30, = Dat. and Ace. of TO X/'vav, linen; Ace. fern. v/ viQeif, -dlas t snow-flake) ; Voc. fat 0. 128, = fati ft. 243, from Xsoj, crazed. j8. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote (P.OVOS, single, -rr&jffts, case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in ffoee, a triptote ; iu /our, a tetraptote. CHAPTER III. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [irir 17-20,22.] ^ IS 8. Adjectives are declined like substan tives, except so far as they vary their form to de- note variation of gender (^ 74. 8). In this respect, they are divided into three classes, adjectives oj one, of two, and of three terminations. NOTE. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is re- garded as the primary gender, and the root, theme, and declension of the masculine, as the general root, theme, and declension of the word. The mode of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the theme the other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings; and, if necessary, the form jf the Gen. sing. Thus, $,*, . rf *';, -is ^, 0( , -, . i, f, 139. I. ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION are de- clined precisely like nouns, and therefore 'require no separate rules or paradigms. They are confined, in the language of prose, to the masculine and feminine genders, and some of them are employed in a single gender only. E. g. 1. Masculine. Dec. I. ymaSa?, -ou, noble, i pavi**, -v, solitary, o i$iAi>. rri ft -w, voluntary; Dec. III. yi ? v, -tvrot, old, i jTf, poor (yet Hesych. gives fi irivvunrei}. CH. 3.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 147 2. Feminine. Dec. III. /*/>,-, -otoo;, frantic, TKT^S, -fits, native, fi Tgucis, -5o;, Trojan, A*>/?, -So;, Dorian. 3. Masculine and Feminine. Dec. III. i, fi ayws, -urs, unknown, o, ra/j, -ados, childless, e, fi X/|, -txos, of the same age, o, ty*;Svf, -Jjroj, /io//"- dead, o, fi Qwytis, a^os, fugitive. NOTE. The indirect cases of adjectives of one termination and of Dec. III., are sometimes employed by the poets as neuter ; as, yvupw TI p.tya.\w lv vrivDTi 7ufjt.a.rt Eur. El. 372, ftctvteio-iv Xvtrartfj.a.ffiv Id. Or. '210, Sgopeiffi ^ivtueuv /3>i- agva,%, -ay a;, rapacious, TO a,^ra.xTixov. . The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, one for the direct cases singular, and the other for the direct cases plural ( 80). Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neuter plural is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the neuter singular ; as, T'IKIO. to-T^os arara^a Eur. Here. 1 14, i'3-vsa ... iw>j'X^a Hdt. viii. 7:?. y. In ^Ivavs (^ 1 7), and in similar compounds of TOVS, foot, the Neuter sing:, on account of the difficulty of forming it from the root, is formed from the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. II. (^ 18) ; thus, o, ii Ji- rat/f, TO VITOVV o, ri T^iwevi, -c^aj, three- footed, TO T^tirouv. Cf. 136. 2. 131. III. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS differ fiom those of two in having a distinct form for the feminine. It is only in the first declension that the feminine has a distinct form from the masculine. These adjectives, therefore, must be of two declensions, uniting the feminine forms of the Jirst with the masculine and neuter of the second or third. The feminine is formed according to the following rules. RULE i. If the theme belongs to the second declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an- nexed to the simple root. If the root ends in f, t, p, or po, the feminine is declined like oxt otherwise, like n^r, (If 7, 93). Thus, ^X/, QiXi&s ' ffatpj, ffoQrt; %V (^ 1 8) ; ftetx^as, -a, -, long, oi3-(>6<>s, -&, -fl, dense ; xXa;, -, -o, beautiful, p,if, -t>, -cv, middle, ^f, -n, -av, written. 148 ADJECTIVES. [BOOK 11 ^132. RULE n. If the theme belongs to the third declension, the feminine affixes of the first are annexed to the root increased by a (i. e. to the theme before euphonic changes). Thus, from the roots vravr-, %aitvr- (^ 19), /Sai/Xti/ovr-, a^ayr-, Qunvr (^ 22), are formed the feminines (sravra-a, travtra) va.'ue, with a few other adjectives ; as, cplhog, t/oqpo?, ^ptWo? (1J 18) ; ^apttf, ijdv?* ncig, /if'Aa? (fl 19); sxwv, -oi)(w, -ov, G. -oWo?, willing ; ra^a?, -atva, -a?', G. -ayo^, wretched ; Tt'^Tjv, -ara, -ey, G. -tyo?, tender. NOTES, a. For the number of terminations in adjectives in -as, only gen- eral rules can be given. For the most part, simples have three terminations, and compounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many sim- ples, particularly derivatives in -uos, -tog, and -ipos, have but two. Deriva- tives from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially those hi -xos, -. Adjectives in -us, of the Attic Dec. II., have but two terminations ; as, iyr^us (U 17), o, f> ivytus, TO ivyiuv, fertile. For rXsa/f, see 135. y. In (a.) words in which the Fern, has commonly a distinct form, the form of the Masc. is sometimes employed in its stead. And (b.), on the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the Fern, hi words hi which it is commonly the same with the Masc. Thus, we find as feminine, (a.) Adjectives in -os (particularly in Attic writers, 74. i), ^SJXa? Eur. Med. 1 197, (payXoj Id. Hipp. 435, Th. vi. 21, uvefynuieu Th. i. 2, xXwre; B. 742 Adjectives in -t/j (particularly in Epic and Doric poetry), rfivs ft,. 369, ai Theoc. 20. 8, 3->jXw; T. 97, xov'kvv K. 27 ; Comparatives, Superlatives, Parti- ciples, and Pronouns (all rarely, except in the dual, see $.), a*o&>TSos Th. v. 110, Wi^/SoX^Tara; Id. iii. 101, faoururot S. 442 ; ri^ivns ^Esch. Ag. 560; nlixoZros Soph. El. 613, (Ed. C. 751. (b.) aSavarj K. 404, 9^.vrt- pvrv Ar. Pax, 978, for the common f> u&eivuros, &c. This use is especially epic and lyric. 3. This use of the .masc. form for the fern, is particularly frequent in the dual, in which, from its limited use, the distinction of gender is least impor- tant ; as, TU x,tii vi. 1. 8 (the fern, form tvrirm, ro ivrriris, seven years old, and fi tirr'tris, -ibog rov i%irn xut TV l^inv PL Leg. 794 c. ; ray rgiaxovrourus tr-rov^cis Th. i. 23, but rgiKxovrovrtieM ffvrevSut Ib. 87. y. Some compounds in -, -y have a poetic (particularly Epic) fern, in */; as, ^/yivy, -is, n fi^yivna A. 477. So ftevvoyinic^ ^*, fat; o *ifffiu{, old, venerable, Fern., chiefly poet., r^iii^y., Tgia-firis, vgifffiif e, fi ftaixet^, and fi ftoixeti&, blessed, poetic ; a, fi -r^^uv, and Ep. fi ^otp^etffffo. K. 290, kind. ^135. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. Among the adjectives which deserve special notice are the following. fiiyetf, great, and wxJy, much (^ 20). In these adjectives, the Norn, and Ace. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the roots p-tya- and . Cyr. vi. 2. 7, . o -ratios (by some written *?), fi #(>, = the common *'j, , living. 1 3 G. RKMARKS. 1. Some compounds of ytXa*;, laughter, and xi(*i, Aorn, may receive either the Attic second, or the third declension ; as, p/Xay- Xy, -, G. -a and -aTaf, laughter-loving, ^vfoxt^ws, -, G. -w and -uros, golden-horned. Shorter forms also occur, according to the common Dec. II. ; as, 2/*a, vqxtgai, eixigK. 2. Some compounds of -revs, foot, have secondary forms according to Dec. II. ; as, voZ.ii'Tovs (poet. vouXvvovi), many-footed, G. irov;, -o$os, and Ep. r^tvro;, -at/, X. 16'4, three-footed; *lg<; afXXaVa; 0. 109; t**oi. 87 ; 4 1 9, a^ra 0. 133, et^yi-ri A. 818, a^yer* . 127; ? yi/(pa> 2. . 621 ; TeX; ... ivrti%tov A. 129, ?roX/v iuri!%ta, II. 57 ; T^o/n T. 74, T^a/wx iot&ulov I. 329 ; *Xu-rXaf i. 171, *a*.wrl.yif*.uv ff. 319, X. 38 ; &c. Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of synonymous adjectives with different forms, might be greatly multiplied. 4. Among defective adjectives, we notice, .) The following, chiefly poetic : a', ctio.xvs, ro $*, tearless, Ace. $- * wv (the other cases supplied by aJax^Prej, -av) ; -reXySax^t/f, tearful (supplied in like manner by iiir$iffi, Tgtfffiiufiv Lye. 1056, A. w^a-jSs/y, Du. v^iir^Yi Ar. Fr. 495 (the plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by lf>,iusing (Hom.). 152 NUMERALS. [BOOK II y.) Poetic plurals which have no corresponding sing. ; as ol B-,f*.iis K. 264, and rctgtpiss A. 387 (yet cas, having beautify* women, Sapph. (135), xaXX;ywva/x< Pind. P. 9. 131, 'EXX<5 *XX/yvyaux B. 683; KoXua.pi Quiffrri B. 106; ToXwraraya $ty*iXay Pratin. ap. Ath. 617 c; v^ixigdrot rir^ttv Ar. Nub. 597; %ig*ios, %igi, #*> a ^ so ^* %>*' tin, XW (of which ^^a , T, Tlfi'lTS, JlVC- Those above 100 are declined like the plural of yttio? (IT 18). NOTES, at. E7f, from its signiiication, is used only in the singular ; l-jw, only in the dual and plural ; and the other cardinals only in the plural (except with collective nouns, in such expressions as a-vieis pu^'ict *< TST^o!XT CH. 4.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 153 Hes. Op. 694, Dat *-oinx,ovrt ftoioduv K.. 253, "bva xxvovitrtrt X. 407, %ipffi* xcti^ixx. Yet we sometimes find Ti/Tffagii xat Sixuros, Ib. 83 ; &c. Also, Jj xctt uxoffros, Th. viii. 109. See 140. 1. 3. TEMPORAL. The temporal numbers are formed from the ordinals, by changing the final -o? into -to?, -a, -ov ; thus, dfVTtQoi;, divrfQcuo?) -a, -ov. From TT^WTO?, no temporal number is formed. Its place is supplied by i}#?^if@o, -ov. 154 NUMERALS. [BOOK II 4. MULTIPLE. The multiple numbers end in -TT/IOO?, con traded -nlovg, and are declined like dmloo?, dtnlov? (IT 18). Other forms are those in -, secondly, ryliov, thirdly ; TQI%OV, in three places, ntvruxov, in Jive places ; n:f/T^aJ?, in Jive ways, eSaxug, in six ways. III. NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES. The numeral substantives, for the most part, end in -'?, -ddog, and are employed both as abstract and as collective nouns. Thus, ^ ftvQiug may signify, either the number 10,000, considered abstractly, or a collection of 10,000. These numerals often take the place of the cardi- nals, particularly in the expression of the higher numbers ; as, dsxu pvQiudt;;, ten myriads 100,000 ; kxarov pvQiddfg, a mil- lion. REMARKS. 1. When numerals are combined, the less commonly precedes with xal but often the greater without xt, and sometimes also with it. Thus, TJVTI x< tixonv, Jive and twenty, i. 4. 2 ; rTrtfxflr tvp.iv*of iW IT) lix.ee., upon tht CH. 5.] PRONOJNS. 155 [6th after 10] 16th of the month Boedromion, Dem. 261. 12 ; ixry ta.xoirot:, forty ships wanting one [40 1 =39], Th. via. 7 ; va.ua-} $uo7v $iovtu., Id. ii. 13. It will be observed, that the participle may either agree with the greater number, or, by a rarer construc- tion, be put absolute with the less. See Syntax. y. The combinations of fractions with whole numbers are variously ex- prassed; thus, (a) v^a. ^juU^unJ^ three, half -dories, i. e. l darics, i, 3. 21 (b) Particularly in Herodotus, T ? /TV ^trd^etvrov, the third talent a half one i. e. 2^ talents, Hdt. i. 50 ; 'i&opo* ^/raXavrav -\~ Ttret^rav vfttrciXavrav =- raXavra Sixet, 6^ -f- 3^ = 10, Ib. (compare hi Lat. sestertius, shortened from semistertius) ' (c) Less classic, ^uo xett fift/met* ftvti, "$vu xcti npie-u $gct%ftKi, Poll. ix. 56, 62 : (d) i-/r^r, a third in addition, i. e. l, Vect. 3. 9 } T- 15, Ib. : (e) nptoXiov, half us much again, i. e. l, i. 3. 21. 2. The Table (fl 25) exhibits the most common numerals with some of the interrogatives, indefinites, diminutives, &c. which correspond with them. CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS. I. SUBSTANTIVE. [IT 23.] 141. PERSONAL, /w, aw, ou. The declension of these pronouns is peculiar. The numbers are distinguished not less by difference of root, than of affix. Thus, the 1st Person has the roots, Sing, ft,-, or, as a more emphatic form, ip-, PI Yift,-, Du. v- ; the 2d Pers., Sing, a--, PI. up,-, Du. r- ; the 3d Pers., Sing, the rough breathing, PI. and Du. a-f*-i-is v/u.ti;, (i~s tlft-i-uv {I/HUH, iifA-i-u* v/u.u*, enp-i-eav irQuv (^-s-iv) i^r, (v/tt-t-fy) i>/u.7* (u (iu and fftytu are sometimes \vritten incorrectly vy and ccur in Homer, whether common or dialectic ; 3d, the principal other forms which occur. The forms to which the sign f is affixed are enclitic when used without emphasis (see Prosody). When the oblique cases Sing, of tyu are not enclitic, the longer forms iftav, Ipoi, ipi are employed. 2. The pronoun ov is used, both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a *e- flexive. In the Attic and Common dialects, however, it is not greatly u ed in either sense, its place being commonly supplied by other pronouns. The plur. forms trQiTg and fftpio. first occur in Hdt. (vii. 168, i. 46). For the lim- itations and peculiarities in the use of this pronoun, see Syntax. 3. Besides the forms which are common in prose, the Attic poets also em- ploy, (a) the Epic Genitives I^ISsv, o-iS-in, V9-e (6) the Accusatives / and ff$i, without distinction of number or gender ; (c) the Dat. pi. cQiv, which even occurs, though rarely, both in Attic and in other poetry, as sing. ; (d) the Dat.pl. of \yu and av with the ultima short (especially Sophocles) ; thus, */*;, VJMV, or fait, Spiv. See 5. below. 4. The DIALECTIC FORMS arise chiefly, a) from want of contraction, as, tp.it, &c. ; (b) from protraction, as, ip,i7o, vi7a, i7a, fiftitu*, vp.ilci, ffor. *]/- and $-, Mol. a7 wV X. 88 : TV Ar. Lys. 1188, Sapph. 1. 13, ruvn E. 485, rnv Cor. 2 ; ui A. 336, i A. 8, r^ or rQu P. 531 ; ff n the Greek Pronoun. Y 14:3 6. HISTORY, a. The distinction of person, like those of case and number (\ 83), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely separating the person speaking from all other persons, whether spoken to or spoken of. We find traces of this early use not only in the roots common to the 2d and 3d persons, but also in the common fonns of these persons in the dual of verbs. The most natural way of designating one's self by gesture is to bring home the hand ; of designating another, to stretch it out towards him. The voice here follows the analogy of the hand. To denote ourselves, we naturally keep the voice at home as much as is consistent with enunciation ; while we denote another by a forcible emission of it, a pointing, as it were, of the voice towards the person. The former of these is accomplished by closing the lips and murmuring within, that is, by uttering wi, which hence became the great root of the 1st personal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending the voice out forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place of the aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a lingual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d and 3d personal pronouns. In the progress of language, these two persons were separated, and their forms became, for the most part, distinct, although founded, in general, upon common roots. /S. The u.- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old Plur. (which afterwards be- came the Dual, 85) into the kindred v- (compare Lat. nos) ; and in the Sing., when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial & (compare the /Eol. aerQi, unfit), which passed by precession into t. In the new Plur., the idea of plurality was conveyed by doubling the p. (dp/*-, in the Ep. and yEol. ajup<;, jipftiuv, el/u.fttv, KftfAtiri, oLftfts) ', or more commonly by doubling the 8. to ( 29), pronounced with the rough breathing (V-> m V &c.), or, in the Dor., to ('ap,-, in 'etuis, V/^aJv, 'f*7v, 'dut). From this the new Plur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, by changing, for propriety of ex- pression, a, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (fy*/*-, in the Ep. and ^Eol. t^,iaj, vpftiuv, ilp,p.iv, vp./u,i and '>,-, in iiu.i7s, &c.) With the 158 PRONOUNS. - SUBSTANTIVE. ffiOOK II. exception of this imitative plural, the Plur. and Du. of the 2d and 3d per- fions have the same root, in which plurality is expressed by joining two of the signs of these persons (trip- = , of which ph and / are strengthened forms. 14:4. B. REFLEXIVE, cpavTov, ami/rov, eetvrov. These pronouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first also the neuter. They are formed by uniting the personal pro- nouns with In the Plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and sometimes of the 3d, the two elements remain distinct ; fif^uv etuTav, iif&uv OLVTUY, atyuv KUTUV = tetUTwv. In Homer, they are distinct in both Sing, and Plur.; thus, if^' avrov A. 271, i : ui$iv * ig/?Uoc, other. From its nature, it wants the N^rn. and the Sing., and is not common in the Dual. NOTE. For A.A-was appended, it received a double declension ; when -iv, it had only the declension of the article. It belongs properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aris- tophanes. II. ADJECTIVE. [TT24.J j 1 47. All the pronouns which are declined in IF 24 may be traced back to a common foundation in an old DEFINITIVE, which had two roots, the rough breathing and T- (cf. 143. , /?), and which performed the offices both of an article and of a demonstrative, personal, and relative pronoun. REMARKS. . To this definitive the Greeks gave the name a^an, joint, from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing spoken of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to be spoken of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek name a^S-^av be- can>e, in Latin, articulus (small joint, from artus, joint, a word of the same origin \vith *9^ov), from which has come the English name, article. This definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the definite article, naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken of; but when used as a relative, usually follows it ; as, euros \,, 01, t, with the t- forms of the neuter, the oblique cases, and the dual. NOTE. The forms rat and rut are also used, for the sake of metre, euphony, 160 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK U or empaasis, in the Ionic (chiefly the Epic), and in the Doric ; e. g. rot A i47, Hdt. viii. 68. 1 (where it is strongly demonstrative), Theoc. 1. 80 ; ra.' r. 5, Theoc. 1.9. So, even in the Attic poets, rot ft Msch. Pers. 423, Soph, Aj. 1404 ; r; Ar. Eq. 1329. For the other dialectic forms, see 95, 96 99. For the forms and re, see 97. 2. RELATIVE, o?, rj, o. The postpositive^ article, or as it is now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone aspirated forms of the old definitive. NOTE. For the old Masc. Z (II. 835, 0. 262), as well as for the Neut. ?, see 97. For the reduplicated Sou (B. 325) and fa (FL 208), see 48. 149. 3. ITERATIVE, avrog, -ij, -o ( 97). This pronoun appears to be compounded of the particle av, again, back, and the old definitive xog ( 147. /?). It is hence a PRONOUN OP RETURN (or, as it may be termed, an iterative pronoun), mark- ing the return of the mind to the same person or thing. NOTES, . The New Ionic often inserts i in tti/ros and its compounds, before a long vowel in the affix (see 48. 1, f 24). This belongs especially to Hippocrates and his imitator Aretaeus ; in Hdt., it is chiefly confined to the forms in - and -v of etvros and ovrof e. g. etv-riu, a.vriuv and a.uruv t Hdt. i. 133, Kvrieav rouriuv Ib. ii. 3. For the other dialectic forms of tturot, see 95, 96, 99. ft. The article and auros are often united by crasis ( 39) ; as, auros, raurov ( 97. N.) or rauro (Ion. rulr'o Hdt. i. 53, 45. 6), rttlrou, ravrei, for o auroi, ro etvr'o, rov nlrou, rot, eturei. 4. DEMONSTRATIVE. The primary demonstratives are ovro?, this, compounded of the article and uvrog ' o<5t, this, compounded of the article and <5c (an inseparable particle mark- ing direction towards), and declined precisely like the article, with this addition ; and exuvo?, that, derived from txfl, there. NOTE. Of IxiTvos (which, with aXXaj, other, is declined like xvro;, 97) there are also the forms, Ion. xtTvos, which is also common in the Att. poets, jol. wot Sapph. 2. 1, Dor. . 93, ro7o^iretv$t Id. Thesra. 646, ivfAtvriuS-ivi Ath. 269 f. ^> 1 5 1 . 5. POSSESSIVE. The possessive pronouns are de- rived from the personal, and are regularly declined as adjec tives of three terminations. We add references for the less common possessives : vcatngos, O. 39 ; a$ui- rios, A. 216, in Ap. Rh. = ff(f>iri^os, 1. 643, 2. 544 ; o f , T. 333, Hdt. i. 205, Soph. Aj. 442; apo; or 0,^09, Z. 414, Find. O. 10. 10, Theoc. 5. 108, .&sch. Cho. 428 (used particularly in the Att. poets as sing.) ; a/u,irt(>os, Theoc. 2. 31; a^o,-, Ale. 103; K^TI^OS, Ale. 104 ; ra;, y. 122, ^Esch. Prom. 162 ; upi>{, . 375, Pind. P. 7. 15 ; ios, a. 409, Theoc. 17. 50 ; rtpis, A. 534 ; Foi (= of), 3/u.ftof, cited by Apollonius. For the use of the posses- sives, particularly os, ios, fffingos, uir^os y see Syntax. B. INDEFINITE. 1 52. 1. The SIMPLE INDEFINITE is Tt?, which has two roots, iiv- and T-, both appearing to be formed from T-, the root of the article, by adding -iv- and -- to give an indefinite force (cf. 146. N.). REMARKS. . The later root riv- is declined throughout after Dec. III., but the earlier rt- only in the Gen. and Dat., after Dec. II. (except in the Gen. Sing., which imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction ; thus, rrj, it t T/VO'S, Tir/, &c. ( 105. &} ; G. rio TOW, D. riy rf, and, in the compound, PI. G. onuv oruv, D. or'ifitri orotffi (also Ion. t (see Syntax). 14* 162 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS [LOOK II Thus, the forms of the indefinite ns (except tKj peculiar TT, which is rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never used interrogatively) are enclitic ; while those of the interrogative T/J are orthotone, and never take the grave accent. In lexicons and grammars, for the sake of distinction, the forms of the indefinite, ns and n, are written with the grant v-cent, or without an accent. 1 53. 3. The composition of og with ilg forms the RELATIVE INDEFINITE oartc, whoever, of which both parts are declined in those forms which have the root nv-, but the latter only in those which have the root TC- ; thus, ovuvos, but or so OTOV. The longer forms of the Gen. and Dat. are very rare in the Attic poets. NOTES. . The forms . 200, oVi x. 39, Hdt viii. 65, ?rv vii. 6. 24 : riurt Hdt. ix. 27, JriTin* 0. 491, Man Hdt. ii. 82, faun Soph. Ant. 1335 ; envois 0. 492 (at/Vr/vaj A. 240). ^ I fi^. REMARKS. 1. Adjective Pronouns which have not been specially mentioned are regularly declined as adjectives of three terminations (S 133. 4). For the Correlative Pronouns, and for the Particles which are affixed to pronouns, see f 63, 317, 328. 2. Special care is required in distinguishing the forms of e, es, o$, TIS, and ns- Forms which have the same letters may be often distinguished by the accentuation ; as, /, el, a". Special care is also required in distinguishing the fcrms of ovros, those of et-lres. the combined forms of e a.vrtt^ the same, and the contracted forms of CH. 6.J COMPARISON. 163 CHAPTER VI. COMPARISON. ^ 155. ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS have, in Greek, three degrees of comparison, the POSITIVE, the COMPARATIVE, and the SUPERLATIVE. I. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. In adjectives, the comparative is usually formed in -T6os, -a, -ov, and the superlative in -TCCTOS, -??, -ov ; but sometimes the comparative "is formed in -toy, -7ov, Gen. -tovos, and the superlative^ in -ttfros, -??, -ov. A. COMPARISON IN -Tfgog, -TTO?. ^156. In receiving the affixes -rfpos and -TCCTOS, the endings of the theme are changed as follows ; 1.) -os, preceded by a long syllable, becomes -o- ; by a short syllable, -a- ; as, xouqpo?, ilgfit, yovapoifQog, xovqpozaTOff. aocpdg, wise, . aoqpw'rf^oc, C;O uve!>os v. 376, l.d.ura.ro; /3. 350, o'l^u^un^n P. 446, o^U^ururov t. 105. In respect to xtvas, empty, and irrtvos, narrow, authorities vary. /3. A mute and liquid preceding -as have commonly the same effect as a long syllable ; as, irQoSgo;, vehement, trorii>os, f^yS^aruroi. Yet here, also, the Attic poets sometimes employ -u- for the sake of the metre ; as, iu(JTf Q?^ evident, aoKf^aitQog, poor, 7ifveai(jo$, REMARK. In adjectives of the first declension, and in -^/ivbfis, -*tf becomes - ; as, trXiavJXT*};, -ov, covetous, vr^tovix'riff'rot'ros * $>iti$ris, -ios, false, ijsiv retrof. Except, for the sake of euphony, u^^io-rrts, -ov, insolent, vfyifrort t v. 8. 3, v^iffTorcires, Ib. 22 (referred by some to vfyifros)- 3.) -vs becomes -v- ; as, 7i(jia(Svg, old, nQsaflvngos, For the sake of the metre, /Swyrara 2. 508. ^ 158. 4.) In adjectives of other endings, -TSQOS and -xaios are either added to the simple root, or to the root increased by -.rio;, A. 277, and (ttXetvarigos, Strab. ;

jA./, -ixo{, elder- ly, K. 203, ^sch. Ag. 598 ; x^a-rwf (Epic, II. 181), strong, xot'itrffuv (Ion. xfaffeav, Hdt. i. 66) ; /3^a^'j, glow, fyoiXuv (Hes. Op. 526) fyla%uri(>os, figuSiuv, and Pgeiirci$is and pei/rirav, fActx^oraras and (a. becoming by precession , as in the noun ro (jwxos, -so?, length) ttrixtcrras, Cyr. iv. 5. 28, Dor. puxttrro;, Soph (Ed. T. 1301. Other examples of double formation are u'tf^o;, ixfyos, xv- l^'os (poet), renowned, otxr^os, pitiable, /SaSivj, fyaxvs, short, yXvxus, #/?, uxvf, twift, xetxof ( 160), ^/Xaj ( 156. a), &C. C. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. Some adjectives in the comparative and superla- tive degrees are formed from positives which are not in use, from words which are themselves comparative^ or superlatives. or from other parts of speech. Some of these are usually re ferred to positives in use, which have a similar signification and some of which are also regularly compared ; thus, good, Poet. eifAtivert^as Mimn. 11. 9; !/ JEsch. Ag. 81, a^tiart^of, Theog 548 ; /3iXTiof, J5sch. Th. 337, /SsXraraf, Id. Eum. 487 ; ros, H. Gr. ii. 3. 49. before, comic -rgirigetirtgos AT. Eq. 1164 ; KA. 'Ova.; ; \yu ffoi Tgortgo; IK AA. 'AXX.' aw r^awi^av, aXX* ly ;, first, rguriirrof, first of all, B. 228. lJ(.*%ifros, least, i*.ct%nrroTtos, less than the least, Ep. Ephes. 3. 8. NOTE. See also examples of a poetic double formation of the Comp. (apuvorifas, aguaVsga?, &C.) in 160. For xaAX/wrtgov Th. iv. 1^8, is now read 2. Examples of adjectives in the comparative and superla- tive degrees, formed from other parts of speech. king, (ZetffiXivrtgos, more kingly, a greater king, I. 160, /3.nos, -t.ffTa.rot. , of importance, ^ov^ytatr^of) more important, PI. Gorg. 458 c, l|, out of, i(r%ay; or a common root, and signifying originally best in war\ and also 159. $, i. Add the poetic xv$ia.rt a.vr Dual (fidfuf Qaru Qartr CH. 7.] HISTORY. U K 173 1 7 3. Tne distinction of tense, like thoje-of number, case, and per- son (<} 83, 113), was at first only twofold, simply d^tingui.shiiitf a punt ac- tion from a. present or future one. Tin's was naturally done by prefixing i- (in Sanscrit, 5-), to express, as it were, the throwing back of the action into past time (5 187). This expression, it will be observed, is aided by the throwing ',.ack of the accent. With the prefix of -, a distinction was also made be- tween the 2d and 3d Persons dual (perhaps because, the more remote the action, the more important becomes the specific designation of the subject). In the 3d Pers. the inserted i ( 172) was lengthened to , while in the 2d IVrs., as in both the 2d and 3d Persons of the unaugmented tense, it passed into the kindred o ( 28). We have now two tenses, the unaugmented Pn- mary Tense, which supplied the place of both the Present and the Future, and the augmented Secondary Tense, which expressed past action both definitely and indefinitely, and supplied the place of all the past tenses ( 168). Thus, PRIMARY TENSE. SECONDARY TENSE. IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P. S. $a.fA (pas q>iir P. Qufttv j^, passing of course into -ftw, 63). Thus -^ became -p.i and -/aw ; -?, -/ and -tro ; -r, -rut and -ro ; -VT, -vrcti and -vro. If the' affix ended with the sign of number, the preceding sign of person took a longer form. In the 2d and 3d Persons, this was f6 (which might be considered as arising from the r by the addition of 6, since r6 must pass into trd, ~> 52). The 1st Pers., in imitation of the others, inserted 6 (or, if a long syllable was wanted by the poets, tr6\ after which either o was inserted, to aid in the utterance, or, what became the common form, the final passed into its corresponding vowel a. ( 50). Thus -n, -rav, -T>jy became -K-S tcpa-a,-ft>jy i It will be observed, that all the affixes above begin with a consonant. While, therefore, they could be readily attached to roots end- ing with a vowel, euphony required that, hi their attachment to the far greater number of roots ending with a consonant, a connecting vowel should be inserted. This vowel, which was purely euphonic in its origin, was, doubtless also from euphonic preference, -a- before a liquid, but otherwise -t- (the forma- tion of the Opt. and the analogy of Dec. II. lead us rather to consider the -i- as a euphonic substitute for the -a- than the reverse, 28, 86, 177). As an example of euphonic inflection (in distinction from which the inflection without connecting vowels is termed nude), we select the root yga.et- was p ; and of y^a^-, y^aipi*. Subse- quently, to mark more specifically the prevalent relation of the Inf., that of indirect object, the dative affix of Dec. I. ( 8(5) was added to these forms ; thus, tfavai, yza.tpiva.i. Voice appears to have been distinguished by the in- sertion, in these forms, of rO (before which the > fell away, cf. 55, 57), after the analogy of 5 174 ; thus, Act. (or Subject.) Form, iv-ff6-a.i) y(>a.q>iff6a.i. But the verb is also used as an adjective, and, as such, receives declension. The root of this declension, in the Act. (or Subject.) Form, may be derived from the original form of the non-personal mode in -, by adding T, which is used so extensively in the formation of verbal substantives and adjectives ; thus, avr-s, yoi$ovTS ITT*. In the personal mode, a threefold distinction arose. DouDt leads to hesitation in closing a word or sentence ; and hence the idea of con- tingence was naturally expressed by dwelling upon the connecting vowel (or upon the final vowel of the root), as if it were a matter of question whether the verb ought to be united with its subject. The strongest expression of contingency that of past contingence, protracted the connecting vowel, or final vowel of the root, to the cognate diphthong in i (^ 3), and thus formed what is termed the Optative mode, which, as denoting past time, takes the secondary affixes ; thus, '<, q>a,7[*., ioc.o^.nv y^ee.- if*v*. The weaker expression of contingence, that of present contingence, as less needed, seems to have arisen later, after the conjugation with the con- necting vowels -o- and -t- had become established as the prevailing analogy of the language ; and to have consisted simply in prolonging these vowels to -ta- and --, attaching the same affixes to all verbs. This weaker form, termed the Subjunctive mode (yet see 169. 7), as denoting present time, takes the primary affixes. Thus, yoa,cofAix.i, -cof^ -vt -IT P. ygaip-eftiv -ITS -ovr y^a.^-eafjt.ii -tin -uvr D. u-oiv -trot -trot titp-ufiiv -nro* -qroi Sec. S- %ypec.tf>-eu -i; -IT y^eity-oi/jt, -01; -air P. iygoitp-oftiv -in -DVT y^a.ty-oiu.1.* -em -etvr D. i-yoKQ-ou.tr -tr* -irr>f ypa.to-otu.lv -oirov -aim* 176 CONJUGATION. [BOOK II IMPERATIVE. 2 P. 3 P. 2 P. 3 P. T> - / ^ ' - / OBJECTIVE INFLECTION. INDICATIVE. CONJUNCTIVE. IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P. Pfim. S. yt>dq>-op.a,i -tffeti -1*0.1 P. y(>a,(f>-o[*,i6a, -tfffa -01*0,1 D. Sec S. ly/jaQ-b/Arii -itro -1*0 y^atp-oiftvii -OHTO P. tygutp-oftttiot -iv6i -01*0 ygotty-oifAiQa, -oieSt D. ly^otty-OfAiSa, -iffffoi -iffDrii yoify-oi(&i6ct -010601 IMPERATIVE. 2 P. 3 P. 2 P. 3 P. D. tyd-ffQoi (pd-trSui ^178. We have, aa yet, but two tenses, the Primary, denoting present and future tune, and the Secondary, denoting past time, both definitely and indefinitely. In a few verbs, mostly poetic, the formation appears never to have proceeded farther. In other verbs, more specific tenses were developed from these, as follows. 1. In most verbs, the Future was distinguished from the Present, and the Aorist (the indefinite past) from the Imperfect (the definite past) by new forms, in which the greater energy of the Fut. and Aor. was expressed by a a added to the root (cf. ^ 84) ; and consequently, if the old Primary and Secondary Tenses remained, they remained as Present and Imperfect. The Fut. followed throughout the inflection of the Pres., except that it wanted the Subjunctive and Imperative, which were not needed in this tense. The Aor. had all the modes, following in general the inflection of the Pres. and Impf., except that it preferred -a- as a connecting vowel, and simply appended the later affix -* t in the Inf. act. ( 176) ; thus, SUBJECTIVE INFLECTION. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTTVTE. S. 1ypjtfy-a&(4. -fctf -fa,* y^dd(Q-0*ftii -fo.*t -trttvr da,q>-iru(*,i0tt, -u.fy--vai, Part, yiy^d^-vrg. But all these forms were forbidden by euphony. Hence in the Ind. -p. became - (which, since ^ final passes into , may be considered the corresponding vowel of p. as well as of v, 50) ; thus, y'ty^ot.^fA yiy < and after this change the in- flection proceeded according to the analogy of the Aor., except so far as the primary form differs from the secondary. The a in this way became simply a connecting vowel ; thus, yiy^a.$u. (or, if the analogy of the Aor. be followed here also, yiyooiQ-et.-/*?), yiyoeiQ-a,-!) --T, -a-^sv, -#-T, -a-v S O The middle and passive voices were at first undistinguished. The form simply showed that the subject was affected by the action, but did not determine whether the action were his own or that of another. In the J78 CONJUGATION. [BOOK II. definite and complete tenses, the action is so represented, that this would be commonly understood without special designation. But in the indefinite tenses, there would be greater need of marking the distinction. Hence, a special Aor and Fut. passive were formed by employing the verb tiptt, to be, as an auxilia~y and compounding its past and future tenses with the root of the verb (th augment being prefixed in the Aor., as in other past tenses, and the i being lengthened in some of the forms from the influence of analogy or for euphony) , thus, Aor. i-ydiyoa.iee, ygdipofx, and y^a-tyup. became (yt>a.q>oa., y^dQua.} y^d$u, and y^d-^o/ji, and yt>d^*>(4, became yf>d-$/u yf>dq>oi(Jt,, ygdij/oif*,, ygd-Jsetift, tfdf* became y/>d$aif*i, ygd-^oip.!, y^d-^utfji.!, tydfti lygettpof*,, iytygei- o,. 2. Final r, in the secondary forms throughout, and in the Perf. sing., was dropped ; but, in other cases, was changed into -; , which after -i- or -u- con- nective passed into -i and was then contracted, but otherwise was prolonged to -ft. When, by the dropping of -ctovr fygettpov, iy^et,^>o,T 'iy PU.-^/ O.Y , y^dtyoir ygdQot, y^a.^etir y^ei-^/ai, yiya.fya.r yi- yttt.Qovr (yfitt.Qovo'i) yt>ei NOTES, a.. In the prolonged forms of the endings -T and -VT, the Doric retained the T ( 70. 2j ; as, >.up.t A. 549, rv^ufjti E. 279, "xufti I. 414, 7Sdiicci y^a.^ Or y^ti^ii ( 37. 4), >y^a,^&ffeti y^d-^y Or -, iy^dtyuro ty^difta iygeityou, ygdtyiffo ygeityov, \ypd^/a, &c. This tendency does not appear before endings beginning with T, since here the syllable is already long by position. Of other endings, it appears chiefly before the shorter ; hence, before the subjective far more than the objective, and in the Sing, more than the Plur. or Dual. We give here ex- amples of the two last only of the cases that have been mentioned above : ; tQvsy tet tQti, but PL iQxfti* (^[ 53) ; 2 Pers. y^dts ygdipus (so some form y^dQu and ygdQti by lengthening the connecting vowel and dropping the flexible ending), y^d-^ts y^d^/ng y^dtpiv (the old form of the Inf., 176) y^dQuv (this became the common form of the Pres. and Fut. inf. act.), y^d-^tv ygd\l>iiv. NOTE. The old short forms of the 2d Pers. and Inf. in -is and -it remain in some varieties of the Doric; as, fu^elis Theoc. 1. 3, u/ti*.yis 4. 3, 1. 14, /3o-ot-vr) ygoiipaitv, (^a'-v/'- ett-vr) 'ygei'^KtiV) (o.7ri (ftet'itiri, (00 ; yjr (=s"XiTfl) 0. 43; yivra (= \yiviro} lies. Th. 199, lyw> Theec. 1.88; tiiy/*** i. 513, Vix.ro O. 88 (so even Pres. 3 Pers. pi., Si^r< M. 147, for }i%rai, 60), Imp. Kg. T. 10, Si^i Ap. Rh. 4. 1554, Inf. titf*, A. 23, Part. Viym*oi B. 794 : iXtLxro A. 39 ; 7*r lies. Th. 481 ; ixi^v /. 335, Xi*T J. 451, Xiga ft. 650 ; ^/av^v (3 Pers. du. for i/tiu**tv, $ 60)*; I^/*T . 433, p.',xro A. 354 ; rt E. 590, ^sch. Ag. 987, V ^- 204 > k fttl 0.474, SSMW, A. 572, Soph. (Ed. T. 177; a-aXra O. 645 ; -i e ^ (for o5, 60) x 708. * A. Uli. TH. 7.] HISTORY. Ifll . NOTE. These Aorists, being nude, agree in their formation with the Perf and riup. ( 179), except that they want the reduplication. i.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) Aorists which have the tense-sign - Uall. ^ er 136 Ar - Kan - 48 ~> 'T* T. 173, 070-tri u. 1 54. The use of this form in the 2 Pers. Imp. will be specially noticed. Perhaps the common 2 Aor. tvruror, fell, and the rare, if not doubtful, i'^iry, belong here. . ^ Aorists without the tense-sign --, but with the connecting vowel --. See 201. 2. Compare the omission of -a- both here and 200. 2 with 117, 182. III. w.) Reduplicated tenses, having the connectives -0- and -i-, and thus unit- ing the forms of the Perf. or Plup., and of the 2 Aor. See 194. 3. NOTB. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1st or 2d Ao- nst according to the connective ; a classification which is rather convenient than philosophical. ^ I f 56 * fo VII. The formation of the complete tenses requires further remark. The affixes of the Perf. and Plup. seem to have been originally nude throughout, and they continued such in the objective inflection, inasmuch as here each flexible ending has a vowel of its own. That this was the reason appears from the fact, that in the subjective inflection also we find remains of the nude formation, but only in cases where the flexible ending has a vowel of its own. These remains abound most in the old Epic, but are also found in the Attic (SS 237, 238). The inflection with the connecting vowel, how- ever, became the established analogy of the language ; so much so, that even pure verbs, no less than impure, adopted it (cf. 100. 2). Here arose the need of another euphonic device. The attachment of the open affixes to pure roots produced hiatus, and to prevent this, x was inserted. This insertion appears to have been just commencing in the Homeric period. It afterwards became the prevalent law of the language, extending, through the force of analogy, to impure, as well as to pure roots. Other euphonic changes were now required, for which see 61, 64. 3. The history of the Perf. and Plup. active, therefore, is a history of euphonic devices, to meet the successive de- mands of pure and impure roots. The latter first demanded a connecting vowel : then the former, the insertion of -x- ; and then the latter, that thi? -x- after a labial or palatal mute should be softened to an aspiration uniting with the mute. We have thus four successive formations : 1. the primitive nude formation ; 2. the formation in -a, -j/v ; 3. the formation in -xa, -xtiv after a vowel ; 4. the formation in -xa,, -xuv after a consonant (after a labial or palatal mute, softened to -a, -tiv, 61). The last formation nowhere ap- pears in Horn., and the third only in a few words. The forms with the in- serted * are distinguished as the First Perf. and Plup. ; and those without it, although older, as the Second ( 199. II.). 16 1S2 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK li CHAPTER VIII. PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. VI 8 7. The Greek verb has two prefixes he AUGMENT, and II. the REDUPLICATION. I. AUGMENT. The Augment (augmentum, increase) prefixes - in the SECONDARY TENSES of the Indicative, to de- note past time (^ 168. I., 173). A. If the verb begins with a consonant, the - constitutes a distinct syllable, and the augment is termed SYLLABIC. E. g. Theme. Impf. Aor. /3fiwXiy, to counsel, ISovXivov^ tGovXiuo-et. yvu^u, to recognize, iyvu/av, tyvueiira,. p't-rvu, to throw, tppnrrov, typist* ( 64. 1). B. If the verb begins with a vowel, the s- unites with it, and the augment is termed TEMPORAL. NOTE. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time}, because it increases the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic augment before a vowel, see 189. 2. The breathing of an initial vowel remains the same after the augment. 1 8 8. SPECIAL RULES OF THE TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 1. The prefix f- unites with to form 77, and with the other vowels, if short, to form the corresponding long vowels ; as, ', to hope, rfx-/^o, XTT. 'ixtrtuw, to supplicate, 'txirtvov, 'rxinviret. t0ov, to erect, ugjovv, H^fuxra.. VCflZ*, to insult, "DtyZtr, "Dtyff*. 2. In like manner, the f- unites with the prepositive of the diphthong at, and of the diphthongs av and ot followed by a consonant, as, Ulrica, to ask, yrovi (25. 8), yrrtfftt. nl^dvu, to increase, v$%a,voi, t>S%vf. ixriu, to pity, % XT/, UK-THTO.. So also, ttopau, to think, yopw, 5Vv. CH. 8.J AUGMENT. 183 3. In other cases, the t- is absorbed by the initial vowel or diphthong, without producing any change ; as, tiyioftat, to lead, fiyouftnv, Ytynira,(x.nv. u$i\'.u, to profit, uty'iXaw, ^i^Yiff. t'i'xcj, to yield, T*a, il. tieo*iZ,op,.i, to augur, eiMvi^o/u-nv, f/MMM^JM* ouTciZu, to wound, ovret^ov, ovrettrot. NOTE. In verbs beginning with w, and in i/*f/riv, iv%etftt)v, *iv%et/u.tiv. i}x.aZ,ca, i"xa.^ov, y,x,ct^ov (Att.), iixetv See, also, the Plup. fi tn (f 58), and 2/v (t 56). 1 89. REMARKS. 1. The verbs /WAo^w, to will, dv- ?///, to be able, and ^A/lw, to purpose, sometimes add the tem- poral to the syllabic augment, particularly in the later Attic ; thus, Impf. i6ovlo^i]v and ri6ov).6^v, Aor. P. eSovlij&yv and i]6ov- 2. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes* a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment ; as, yvOf*i, to breaA, ia. uvoiyu, to open, ivituyoi ( 188. 2), iv'ita^a.. u6iu, to push, Itu0avv t 'iuaa.. Add aX/Vxa^a/, to be captured, etvteivu (Ion. and Poet.), to please, o^uu, h tee, eloiu, uviopat, to buy, and some Epic forms. Cf. 5 191. 3. The sylla- bic augment in these words is to be referred, in part, at least, to an original digamma ' 22. S) ; as, Fa| {!, y. 298, iv. 2. 20 ; ifdv^eivi IMV^KVI Hdt. \\. 5, bfelvN y. 143, iFa^s ?2i Hdt. i. 151, i'FF^sv i3s (cf. 71, 117. 2) H. 340. 3. In a few verbs beginning with , the usual contraction of is into ei ( 36) takes place ; as, /. j / law, to permit, fitai, t'aira. Add Wi^u, to accustom, \\itrtra, to roll, (Xxo, to draw, ?r, to 6e occupied vith, i^yei^e/*xi, to work, tg-ru, to creep, iffrieiu, to entertain, i%u, to have ; the A.orists it\i*, took, Ura, (Ion. and poet.), set, tTfttv and tipw (\ 54) ; and the Plup. iltrrvxiiv (^| 48), stood, 4. An initial , followed by a vowel, remains in the augmented tenses of a very few verbs, chiefly poetic ; as, <&>, to hear, ai'/jy (yet iwwtri Hdt. 9. 93). See, also, uvee.xiirx.ta ($ 280). An initial 01 sometimes remains even when followed by a consonant ; as, aitrrgieu, to sting, i*>u'kivKitvfiteti, , to die, riSv-nxct, , to prate, ippa-^'u^nx , to recognize ( 187), lyvu^tKa., iyvaeixuv. to bud, tXaWj*a, iZXao-ryxst Tw, to hurt, /3sXa, to emulate, ifykuxx, iZ,nXeax.>tvou, to crown, i/r-n^aivuxx, ivrnpavax O^IK'-W I 188. I , (atetb'ixvxet} vdixvxa,, ifrtm4U*> a.iz.civu, to increase ( 1 88. 2), riyioftai, to leail 1 88. 3), oooitv, to set; ( 189. 2 , lu^dnet, i&^cc.x.nv. uviofActi, to huy ( 1 89. 2 , ieuvn/u.ai, UmyMlf. i, to work ( 1 89. 3), tl^ycto p.a.i, iigyeiouy/u,a.i. This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropriately ( 7), CH 8.] COMPOUND VERBS. 1 {-..") the Attic Reduplication. It seldom receives an augment in the Plup., except in the verb axiuu, to hear ; thus, aXwX/ipa, XX/,*.oi and 2. Prepositions ending in a consonant which is changed in the theme, re- sume that consonant before the prefix j- ; as, lpa.XXu, to throw in ( 54), meaXAov IxGciXXv, to throw out ( 68), i%iGal*.o9. 3. A/ew verbs receive the augment and reduplication before the preposi- tion ; a few receive them both before and after; and a few are variable; 33, Ivi/rrafAeu, to understand, v5T;xa, iSsJ/^TTj^^v IxxXriffioi^u, to hold an assembly i 8^*Xj- 'ict^v and txK^Yifictl^ov, iZzxXyieria,ff vretgoivicti, to act thr. drunkttra y-ot.Qtovvc'a, v. 8. 4 ; lyyvu,oa, to pledge, for the various forms of which see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 55. 1 O3. IT. Verbs compounded with the particles dva-, ill, and ft-, 7tffi/7, and beginning with a vowel which is changed by the augment. ( 188). commonly receive their prefixes after 16* 186 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK I these particles ; as, dvaaQiaTiu, to be displeased, d tvtyyiTto), to benejlt, fv^oyttow and [vtyyt'ioi". III. Other compounds receive the augment and reduplica tion at the beginning ; as, hoyonouu, to fable, lh>yonoiow SvaTv^iw, to be unfortunate, iduurv^rjau, dtdvarvxuxa ' iinv%tw to be fortunate, eviv^ow or rjvrv^oin' (^ 188. N.) ; dvutontta, tc shame, fdvaumovv. Yet innoiftyoyiixu, Lycurg. 167. 31. DIALECTIC USE. 1 O4L* 1. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign of past time ( 173} became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets it appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at pleasure ; thus, 'i6wtv A. 2, 3-tjxt 55 ; us t^etro A. 33, 457, 568, ' u; a.7X:iudSa.'ro 219; and even, for euphony's sake, jfraX/XXoywra i. 118. In respect to the augment of the Pluperfect, and of the impersonal i%(>v, this freedom remained even in Attic prose; thus, iftw TtrtXiurriKii vi. 4. 11, a-ra- $$i*/ Ib. 13, ;EIX/ vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the augment occurs chiefly after a vowel) ; i%g*iv Cyr. viii. 1.1, oftener %(>*iv Kep. Ath. 3. 6. Of the poets, the Ij-ric approached the nearest to the freedom of the old Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined the most closely to the usage of Attic prose. Yet even here rare cases occur of the omission of the syllabic augment (though not undisputed by critics), chiefly in the narratives of messengers and at the beginning of a verse ; as, xrvirvo-t Soph. (Ed. C. 1606, fawn 1607, S^tv 1624, x^Xj/ 1626. 2. For such forms as f^i^ov -^. 56, itv B. 274, t^tv Horn. Merc. 79, and for such as i23t/> A. 33, tXXa 0. 371, ifj.pa.fav . 226, i'mov <1>. 11, tffftva E. 208, see 71. For the Dor. ya for wyav (Theoc. 13. TO), &c., see 44. 1. For piUTap.ivet, &c., see 62. . On the other hand, we find, after the analogy of verbs beginning with p, ippip A. 278, \affv^a.t N. 79. For Sn'W, I. 224, ^i^/* A. 555, Sn'S/i 2. 34, tiax7*i 2. 418, sec 47. N. Compare *xX7 A. 168, xixu/W . 303, Xi\a.^ufft H. 80, XX6. a^-riwaXwv T. 355, firttoiTv or jytfv 9-. 264, xt K. 127, -rsr^sv Z. 374, ITST^EV 515, rirpoipiv Theoc. 25. 61, a.-ra.^oiro I. 376, iyvr?riy (also edited mwa-rti- and IVSV/O-TSV) 0. 546, 552, T. 473, '^s B. 146. Two Second Aorists are reduplicated at the end of the root : vt tra^r-ov from r. v<-, B. 245, and wx*x-av from r. tyx-, E. 321. NOTE. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Att. poetry ; thus, ^a. fe Soph. El. 147, KiK\oft.ivos Id. (Ed. T. 159, iVi^vi Ib. 1497, i&*-afu E\ar. Ion, 704. "Hyayav remained even in Att. prose ; as, i. 3. 17. CHAPTER IX. AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [TT1T2S-31.] I. CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS. The AFFIXES of the Greek verb may be divided into two great CLASSES ; I. The SUBJECTIVE, belonging to all the tenses of the ACTIVE VOICE, and to the Aorist passive. II. The OBJECTIVE, belonging to all the tenses of the MIDDLE VOICE, and to the Future passive. NOTE. The affixes of the Aor. pass, appear to have been derived from the Impf. of the verb tlpl, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass., from the Fut. of this verb ( 180). Hence the former are subjective, and the latter, objective. Of the affixes which are not thus derived, the subjective represent the subject of the verb as the doer of the action, and the objective, as, more or less directly, its object. See 165. 196. The affixes of the verb may likewise be divided into the following ORDERS ; 1. The PRIMARY, belonging to the primary tenses of the Indicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive ( 168, 169. y ). 2. The SECONDARY, belonging to the secondary tenses of the Indicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative. 188 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK U. 3. The IMPERATIVE, belonging to the Imperative mode 4. The INFINITIVE, belonging to the Infinitive mode. 5. The PARTICIPIAL, belonging to the Participle. E97. These affixes may be resolved into the following ELEMENTS ; A. TENSE-SIGNS, B. CON- NECTING VOWELS, and C. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS NOTE. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may be de- nominated simply signs, connectives, and endings. For a synopsis of thest elements, see *|[ 31. A. TENSE-SIGNS. 198. The tense-signs are letters or syllables which are added to the root in particular tenses, and to which the flexible endings are appended, either immediately or with connecting vowels. In the Future and Aorist, active and middle, and in the Future Perfect (^ 168. a), the tense-sign is -a- ; in the Perfect and Pluperfect active, it is -x- ; in the Aorist passive, it is -6s- ; in the Future pas- sive, it is -Ono- ; in the other tenses, it is wanting See H 31. Thus, /?OI>AV- ; thus, Ko^'urea (xeftitu) xopnu, xa/u.ifftiv xofunv, xnftiirav xoftiuv Mid. JttfMftfttU (xef4tic/u,cci) xofAioufAou, xof&i- fftfftieti xofAiiifffai, xop.tffOft.ivts xo/u,iovft.tvos (*|f 40;. y.} In the Future of xx0i%oftat, to sit (root iJ.) ; thus, (xetff&a-oftai, xuHt- "ttiofsai) xK0i'bov{Acti. Add the poetic (rx ' MW. (%ietuu) %'toftxt. Add xuXtu, to cull, p.ci%oju.ai t to fight, up../, to weep, viu, to swim, */, to sport, vrt-rru, to fall, vrviu, to blow, 7rvv6u.vof^ot,i, to inquire, %'%*>- REMARK, a.) The Liquid, Attic, and Doric Futures, from their formation, are inflected like the Present of contract verbs (^ 45, 46). It will be ob- served, that in a few verbs the Pres. and the Att. Fut. have the same form. b.) In a very few instances, the Fut. is in form an old Pres. ( 178. 2) ; as, IffSica, to eat, F. JfSa^ai, A. 237, Ar. Nub. 121 (in later comedy eSsU^ai, cf. y. above) ; /, to drink, F. or/'o^a/, x. 1 60, Cyr. i. 3. 9 (later -riou^ui) ; tipt, to go, commonly used as Fut. of s%epeti. Add a very few poetic forma, which will be noticed under the verbs to which they belong. 190 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK E 2O 1. IV. The sign of the AORIST, 1.) Becomes -i- in liquid verbs. See 56. 2.) Is omitted in iH-ra, (^[ 53), jjvsyxa (r. myx-, to bear}, 1%ia (Ep. t%tvtt) from %'iu, to pour, and the poetic 'ixia, (Ep. txtta and 'ixu\ from xxiu, to burn Add the Epic jjXsa/*>jv and faivtipvv, N. 436, 184, jWswa E. 208, Sa-rsa^a Hes. Op. 765. See 185. . 3.) Is the same with that of the Perf. in 'i6nxa, n&ixa, and xa. These Aorists are used only in the Indicative, and rarely except in the Sing, and in the 3d Pers. plur. In the middle voice, the Att. writers use only the Ind. r,x.ci(*.nv Ear. El. 622, with the very rare Part, fixei/t&vo;, ^Eschin. 72. 9 The other dialects add iSnxdpw, K. 31, Snxdptvos Find. P. 4. 52. NOTE. These Aorists in -K.U. are only euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor., after the analogy of the Perf. First the iinal -v (originally -ft) passed into -, which became a connecting vowel ; and then -x- was inserted to pre- vent the hiatus ( 179, 186) ; thus, ttv-v 16*-* Wu-*-, Wu*.-. W*. * 5v ffiaxa, vv fix*. This form became common only where the flexible end- ing had no vowel (cf. 5 186), i. e. in the Sing, and in the 3d Pers. pi. ; and was properly confined to the Ind. act., although a few middle forms are found after the same analogy. The nude form disappeared in the Ind. act. sing. (cf. 186), but was elsewhere either the sole or the common form. See tt 50, 51, 54. B. CONNECTING VOWELS. ^ 2 O2. The connecting vowels serve to unite the flexible endings with the root or tense-sign, and assist in marking the distinctions of mode and tense. NOTES. . In each tense, that which precedes the connecting vowel (or, if this is wanting, the flexible ending) may be termed the base of the tense (/3a.ii/'ii /3>.ic, /3v>.ii;ff/f /Si/X*i. Sc 5 181. 1, 2; 183. CH. 9.J CONNECTING VOWELS. 191 /3. In the 3d Pers. sing, of the Aor. and Perf. act., -- takes the place of it- ; as, (ISavXtuo-it- r) ISavXtvffi, fiiGovXivxt. See 181. 2. y. In the 3d Pers. pi. of the Plup., -- commonly takes the place of -ti- NOTE. The original connective of the Plup. was -ta-, which remained in the Ion. ( 179); as, 3i 3. 71, Hdt. ii. 150, intfaut . 166, \ntfai* s v. 90, j$if B. 832, puf 2. 404, l-yt-yntt Hdt. i. 11, trw-An Id. ix. 58. The earlier contraction into -j- is especially old Attic, but also occurs in the jEp. and Dor. ; as, I Pers. *>$ Soph. Ant. 18, tTfrovdv Ar. Eccl. 650, x.t%jvt) Id. Ach. 10 ; 2 Pers. j$i? Soph. Ant. 447, >$W r. 93, UiAn'Sn; Ar. Eq. S22 ; 3 Pers. * A. 70, Soph. CEd. T. 1525, IxiX^u Theoc. 10. 38. By precession ( 29), ->j- passed into -<-, which became the common connective, and in the 3 Pers. sing, is already found in Horn, (arising from -it) ; as, iirr-n- x*i 2. 557 ; so XiXcuru Theoc. 1. 139. In the 3 Pers. pi., -*- became -i-, by the omission of the , which was only euphonic in its origin (179). So, hi the 2 Pers. pi., ** for $uri, Eur. Bac. 1345. SO4. II. The SUBJUNCTIVE takes the connecting vowels of the Pres. ind., lengthening -- to -77- and -o- to -w- ( 177). Thus, Ind. &evXtu-u, Subj. fiovXtv-u, fiovXtvo-tu fievXtv-ti-s, fiauXtv-y-s, fiauXiv-tt, QavXtu-y, fiovXiur-n fiouXtv-o-fttv, fiovXtu-u-f*.s fieu- v. It is likewise found in the Perf., as vtx-odaiv (f 39) AT. Ach. 940 ixyrKpivyoinv Soph. CEd. T. 840, tr^otXnXvfoins Cyr. ii. 4. 17; and in the 2 Aor. of 'ix, u i to have, which has, for its Opt., o-%oiw in the simple verb (Cyr. vii. 1.36), but f%oipi in compounds (xarov\ivx.'ot ftav^iv-o- The INDICATIVE, IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, and PARTICIPLE are nude (nudus, naked), i. e. have no connecting vow^l ( 175), ) ) In the Aor., Perf., and Plup., passive, of all verbs. I* the Aor. pass., the flexible endings are affixed, in these modes, to the tense-sign ( 198); in the Perf. and Plup. pass., they are affixed to the root; as, \Zou\iv -6n- ( 199); 2.) In the Pres. and Impf. of some verbs in which the char acteristic is a short vowel. These verbs are termed, from the <: riding of the theme, VERBS IN -^ut, and, in distinction from tiiem, other verbs are termed VERBS IN -w ( 209). The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, ;^/, Uuov, (ffiovlfva-a-o) e'Sovlfv- o( ' .^ot'/ft'-oi-o, j5oi if i' olx Id. Nub. 1347, rTjj*s/v *vroZ T. 691, bitifain al %f tt E. 661, ?v ti i. 2. 3. In all these cases, the v appears to have been retained from an uncontracted form in -i(). See 203. N., 230. y. So Impf. fr* c < 7 ? / T. 388. 2 1 2. FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS PL., WITH THE DUAL. 1. The 1st Pers. is the same in the Plur. and Du., having, for its subjective ending, -^ucv, and for its objective, -pf .9, or some- times in the poets, -fitta&tx thus, and poet, NOTE. Of the form in -pdov ( 1 74), there have been found only three classical examples, ah" in the dual primary, and all occurring in poetry before a vowel: 9i$(Aiin Y. 485, AtXe/>^t4av Soph. El. 950, oytupdov Id. Ph. 1079. Two examples more are quoted by Athenaeus (98 a) from a word- hunter (ovofAitTo6riiis), whose affectation he is ridiculing. 2. The 2d Pers. pi. always ends in -i. The 2d Pers. du. is obtained by changing this vowel into -ov ; and the 3d Pers. du., by changing it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -t\v in the secondary, and into -wv in the imperative. Thus, PI. 2, fiovltv- fte, (6ovitvtTB Du. 2, fiuvhvfrov* tBovfavetov ' Du. 3, REMARK. In the secondary dual, the 3d Pers. seems originally to have had the same form with the 2d ; and we find in Horn, such cases as 3d Pers. huxtro* K. 364, TiTiw^ira* N. 346, X, iflrtS^i/THv PI. Euthyd. 273 e. $ 2 1 3. THIRD PERS. PL. 1. The en ling -IT, in the pri <:H. 9.J FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 195 mary tenses, becomes -vat. In the secondary, after -o- or -- connective, it becomes -v ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -tv ; hut, otherwise, -auv. Thus, (/JovAfvoytft, 58) fiovhvovui, fiovfavaovat, /tfctfoi/Aevxaat, fiovfavuoi, ' loiciai, euTuoi (fl 48) ; fGoiifav-o-v, I6ovkev(j-a-v ' fiovfavoi-tv, fiovkevaai-ev, Pov\tvdti-sv' tCtSovktvxB-aav, t6ovktvdr]-aav, fiovksv&tlTj-auv ' taTa-aav, I'aTif- av, laralrt-aav (fl 48). See 181, 184. /?. 2. In the Perf. and Plup. pass, of impure verbs, the 3d Pers. ol. is either formed in -TCU and -TO ( 60), or, more com monly, supplied by the Part, with elal and your (fl 55) ; as f'qi&tiy-uTui Th. iii. 18, from cpdtlyo) (r. qpi9a^-), to waste, yt- /'Qixfjipivoi tlal, ytya(i(tiv6i ^aav (^[ 36). REMARK. The forms in -TI and -u.ro are termed Ionic. Before these endings, a labial or palatal mute must be rough ('iu htini, fiovXivffn Subj. Act. S. 3, and Ind. and Subj. Mid. S. 2, /SonXsw*) Fut Ind. Mid. S. 2, and Aor. Subj. Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, frovXiwy Aor. Imp. /Sat/Ast/frov, Fut. Part, fiovteutrov Opt. Act. S. 3, $ou\ivffu.t, Inf. Act. fiovXivsui, Imp. Mid. S. 2, 3. With respect to the changes which take place in the root, or in the union, of the affixes with the root, the tenses are thus associated : 1. the Pres. uncl Iinpf. act. and pass. ; 2. the Fut. act. and Mid. ; 3. the Aor. act. and mid. 4. the Perf. and Plup. act. , 5, the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; 6. the Aor. and Fut. pass. It will be understood, that whatever change of the kind mentioned above takes place in one of the tenses, belongs likewise to the associated tensus, if nothing appears to the contrary. For the Fut. Perf., see 239. II. UNION OF THE AFFIXES WITH THE ROOT A REGULAR OPEN AFFIXES. ^ S 1 6. When the regular of e% altkes ( 215. 1 ) are annexed to roots ending in a, , or o, CONTRAC- TION takes place, according to the rules (^ 31 -37). See the paradigms (HH 45-47). NOTES. . Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed CON- TRACT VERBS, or, from the accent of the theme, Perlspomtna. In distinction from them, other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs. See Prosody. /3. The verbs *, to burn, and xXaw, to weep, which have likewise the forms Jtat'tu and xX/w, are not contracted. Dissyllabic Verbs in -iu admit only the contractions into u ; thus, vxiu, to suil, vXitis (^ 38, r. *y) i w^a^w, vrgufyfteti, if^^df*nv, vrir^a^o ( 51) ( 61)^ ? ( ; 53); -TtTS^rra/, iTsir^xt, vtipffp,ivo; (^ 42); *-oj-L/v, or ^o ft 29) ; as, vipciia (^f 45), Tiftvffu, tTi/u.^ffx, nr'i/jt.'nx.a., Tirlfjinu.a,i, irifiriSvii. (fitXiu (^| 46), ^Xjjyw, $iXr,ffof&cti, iri(f>iXn{4aii, vi(pi%.ricro/4at. JjjXsa; l ^f 47), S!XjXi;ff i / tt>jy, ^bCor^aiu.r,v^ ^n\ut)wffoftettt vtre, A. i^uffot,, Pf. -ri^Uxx. iu, to permit, F. /iKffu, A. s^aa-a, Pf. nQfyoixa, ( 62). NOTES. . Xjaw, to wtter aw oracle, %ga,o/u.oti, to use, and nr^otivw^r. T-), to 6ore, lengthen to v ; as, F. ^^>j, to thresh, with the common F. a.\w, to draw, F. r^,r (Ion. Pf. P. Part. i H'vo;, 2. 548, Hdt. iv. 97, 191. 2). liu, to bind, F. Mra, A. ftnffa, 3 F. Wropai Pf. Si^xa, Pf. P. (S&lO-fttt,! Hipp.), A. P. ^^>J. Svu(-ij), to sacrifice, F. Stria, A. i^ua-a, A. M. liSr&pw Pf. Pf. P. vifSftatt, A. P. JT^V ( 62). . Verbs in -awi)/*/ and -iwvpt, and those in which the root ends 198 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II. in >.-, for the most part retain the short vowel ; as, yeXa/w, to laugh, F. v* t, A. lyi)>.cii>, xetiu, to burn, and xXa/o>, to weep. . III. After a short vowel or a diphthong, a is usually inserted before the regular affixes of the Passive beginning with 6, p, or r ; as, fffuu, to draw _( 219), Pass. Pf. "iffira.-ff-p.u.i, farasau, "fffK-ff-nti, fttGa. iffvra.-'T-fjt.f.vo; A. Ircra-ir-^v F. ffr vou-e! or dipJithnng in some it is in sat ted after a swn;;/f /o?^ vowel; and some are variable ; thus, n^v. Ji^^a/, f^^?, rifSpeti, \rv6yv ( 219) ; ^OV^IV^KI, iSouXiufav (^f 35)' ^;** PMVVU/U.I (r. po-}, to strengthen, tppuftui, Vf'ptua.i>p,tti, \6(>a.va6vv. It will lil observed that the . \Vlicn v rw*J, to mate a libation, F. (.jj.v, oiu, olta (Dor. olu Ar. Lys. 156), fiai, Pf. w^jj^a/, and poet. OI^MKO. or eu^uxa. (R. /3) Soph. Aj. 896 Ofc*s K. 252). jfetlea, to strike, F. veiiyu, ill Att. poetry . See e"%op,cti (3. above), Spuvfti, \v6ta, a.yu, I'luGa. (in the two last the inserted vowel even precedes the characteristic). y. In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake of vuphony. That the vowel should be commonly j, rather than t, results from 200 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II 218. Tn \. Kot.fjt.vu> (r. zap-, transp. x^-), to labor, to be weary, F. xapovftai, 2 A. i'x ttov, Pf. xix/Arixcc. C. VERBS IN -^t. [For the paradigms, see 1T1T48-57.] ^324. I. Before the nwc?e affixes, the CHAR- ACTERISTIC SHORT VOWEL (^ 183, 208. 2) is lengthened (a becoming ??,' unless preceded by p, ^ 29 ; and ^, ft), 1.) In the Indicative singular of the PRESENT and IMPERFECT ACTIVE. Thus, toriMu (1j 48; r. ai-), IW^v r/^^t (ff 50; r. ^s-), ldwfii, (^\ 51 ; r. <5o-), fSldwv dslxvvpi (^f 52; r. <5x-, i;-), tdflxvvv' dpi (fl 56; r. 'I-), ft, flat. 2. N In the SECOND AORIST ACTIVE throughout, except before VT (^ 183). Thus, e'tfTTjv, tajrjftfv, aT^t, aT^rwanv^ arrival, * (ata-i'i?) ata? " aTridyav (^| 57 ; r. 5^a-), anodqavoni ' eyrotv (If 5T; r. yvo-)^ tyvupev, tyvwiov^ yvw&i) yvwvai (yvov-iq) yvovg. EXCEPTION. The short vowel remains, in the 2 Aor. of r/V*?^/, $/S,w/, and Inpi, except in the Inf., where it is changed into its corresponding diphthong ( 29) ; thus, ili/tcir, ^if, !?*, l^i-vrj) St/f l^/uiy, Say, 3oJy4, (l^-vrf) iouf tiptt (^ 54; r. I- ; for the augment, see 189. 3), ?f, 7*/, (' vr?^ i7j (for the Sing, of these Aorists, see 201. 3). Except, also, the poet. fitr&v and awrav. 3.) In a few MIDDLE forms, mostly poetic. Thus, dl?niai (r. <5/f-), to seek; urn >,in, tn profit, 2 A. M b>n'i(j.tjr, and later wvu^t^v ' n^^Ar/w/, to fill, 2 A. M. poet H. 9.] VERBS IN -fit. 201 22o. IT. If the characteristic is c, o, or v, the singular of the IMPERFECT ACTIVE is commonly formed with the con- necting vowel (^ 185. /?) ; thus, tiidtov, contr. nltiovv, fil&seg fdlSoov sdldovv tbtixvvw (flfl 50-52). REMARK. In like manner, the regular affixes sometimes take the place of the nude, in other forms, particularly in verbs in -vpi, which may be regarded as having a second but less Attic theme in -vu ( I 8.5. } ; thus, hixvufti and ^nnvvca, s/xv. 80, Xvrt 114, At/vro H. 16 ; Qua, to produce, 2 A. tyvv, Cyr. ii. 1. 15, Sufi;. Qua, Opt, tw ( 226. 4), Inf. Qvveti, Part. vs. REMARKS UPON PARTICULAR VERBS. 4>iftut, to say. [IT 53.] 228. (a) In certain connections, Quftt, tQw, and tyj are shortened, for the sake of vivacity, to ^/, v, and thus, v S' ly&, aatdf /, Ar. Eq. 634 ; jf $' o?, said he, PI. Rep. 327 b, c 5 J, Ae s/jaAe, A. 219; r7, ^/, srr, ys, as if contracted from i Mk. 1. 34, tyilt Rev. 2. 20, Pf. P. ^iwvra, Mt. 9. 2, 5. Elpl, to be. [IT 55.] In the Present and Imperfect of this verb, the radical syllable e-, 1.) Before a vowel, unites with it ; thus, (-j>on, t-ixai, 58) f ial ' (f'-w) w, (i-n?) V." (e-inv) ei'rjv. 2.) Before rr, becomes o (cf. ^ 203, 206) ; thus, (I--VTS, o'-fTs, ^ 109) wV, Imp. (t-vifav) OVTUV (less used than tie other forms, PI. Leg. 879 b). 3.) In other cases, is lengthened, as follows. .) It becomes tJ in the forms tipi, iTf, 7, iTv< (cf. 218. /S, 224. E). The form J, both here and in 1| 56, is either shortened from iTf (which is not used by the Attics), or is a middle form employed in its stead. /3.) In the remaining forms of the Pres., it assumes f (compare 221) ; CH. 9.1 COMPLETE TENSES. thus, i-ff-fti^ l-tr-ri t t-nv in the 3d Pers., 21 1. N. ; for faiv, $n, &c., $ 237. ' (d) The middle forms "tpat, Up** are regarded by some of the best critics as incorrectly written from "vpu (^ 54). to He down. [IT 60.] 233. (a) This verb appears to be contracted from xiifioti, a de- ponent inflected like r/Vs^aw (^ 50) ; thus, x.itpu,i xt7/u.a,i, xiivreti xiTvrai, xiifft In the Subj. and Opt. the contraction is commonly omitted ; thus, xiuftai, (Ec. 8. 1 9, xtoifAw, iv. 1 . 1 6, like p.Ki (also accented T/Va/^a*) and Ta Ar. Plut. 991, or fAiftwfAiiv, ptftvuo (or fti/u,v, to send, ^riro^at Vtloix.* (\ 58). (6) Analogous to the change of i into e, is that of into u in pvyvupi, to break, V Pf. ippuyu. (c) In the fol- lowing Perfects, there appears to be an insertion of o or u (} 222. ft) : ctyco, to It-ail, a.yrto-^et (^ 191. 2), Dem. 239. 1, i/r0iu, to eat, i^oxet, iv. 8. 20 (Ep. Pf. P. &$3/u4u, %. 56'), uuSa. (r. sV-), to be wont, preteritive, o'!%ux.a, ( 22i :i). (d) In the following dialectic forms, the change or insertion of vowels lias extended to the passive: a. ; Inf. Efl-rava/ iv. 7. 9 ', Part. Ep. tM. T^VT iv. 1. 19 ; Subj. rfl*'x, Th. viii. 74 ; Opt. r^v;iv, Cyr. iv. 2. 3 ; 18 CO"; AFF1XKS OF COX.JltfiATTON. . [BOOK II Imp. ritvatt X. 365, rio PL Leg. 933 e, &c. ; Inf. r0vv/ Mem. i. 2. 16, ri6vDx,i*u.i Soph. Aj 474, and Poet. (Vs^va-e-va/) rs^vava< ^Esch. Ag. 539 Part. rtSvnxus (fern. X 734), Ttfva,-tus, Find. Nem. 10. )39, commonly contr., with t inserted (cf. 35, 4. l), rtfatia;, -uffo,, -us or -os, vii. 4. 19, TVva ( 6csv, -T, -tf"v H. Gr. vi. 4. 16. Pf. Ind. Sing, Itiotxa, Cyr. i. 4. 12, and Vttia, Soph. CEd. C. 1469 (f 58 , base $$;-, ltbotx.-\ ^otxas and $$s PL Prot. 320 a (contr. or sync, tutrittt Ap. Rh. 3. 753), and li&oixus Eur. Ion, 624. Plup. Sing, l^o'ixtiv PL Charm. 175 a, and t^^itiv, -us, -ii PI. ^5/^s, titdin, iSibiiruv PL Leg. 685 C (t&i$ot*tffetv Jii. 5. 18). Pf. Ind. Sing. ofta. (J 58 ; base ^-, /^-), 7^ (for a TS-^, 182 ; Jfia., scarce occurs in the Att., yet Eur. Ale. 780 ; the Att. poets, by a mingling of forms, sometimes use !><>? Eur. Ion, 999), otit PL (ft-pi, 53) f, to go; Pf. /3tjx (r. /3-), 2 Pf PI. poet. B. 134, 0t& Soph. El. 136 ; Subj. PI. 3 faSS-i PI. Phajdr. 252 e ; Inf. /3ify< Eur. Heracl. 610, Hdt. iii. 146, Part. Ep. /SsSa^j, -i/r, -ra;, E. I9R. H. 81, Att. contr. /Ss^j, -Z/. ^t^a^ix I. 64 I, ^i^an II. 160, ^i- ttddrt K. 208, 7>M. ^iftaroy 0. 413; Imp. S. 3 ftiudru A. 304 ; Part. ,u- ^a^;, -i/r, -*T9f, A. 40, 440, 0. 118, and ^ittafii;, -Ty, II. 754, B 818. Plup. PL 3 ^arav H. 863. n~ yo^ai (as if from lyptyfffuct) K. 67. M. Ep. lirn J. 27, Plup. ifxr*)* A. 104. t%eftxi, to come; 2 Pf. iXX^, Ep. P/. 1 ip.ai. (6) Other examples of a reduplicated Fut. in the active voice are nrofau Ar. Pax, 381, and the Ep. KX-tt^ffea, Hom. Merc. 286, xixuSwffea, , and- ( 216), the Liquid, Att., and Dor. Fut. ( '200), the Aor. Pass. Subj. ( 199), the Subj. of Verbs in -ftt (^ 226), and the 2d Pers. Sing, in -< and -o ( -210 3). In these forms, the first vowel is either (I.) , (II.) t or , or (III.) * Of these, t or is far the most frequently uncontracted. 243. I. The first vowel . (a.) In the Ion., the is commonly contracted or changed into t ( 44. 2) ; and when with an O vowel is con- tracted into u, t is often inserted ( 48. 1, cf. 35). Thus we find, as va- rious readings, cguvns, o^savrsj, and ogieavTi;, Hdt. i. R'J, 99. So luga/as* i. 120, u^ir>[jt,tv ii. 1:51, xgu.aSa.t vii. 141, %grjtr0a.i ( 3.'?. ) i. 47, ^t^a-fa.1 1.57, \%(>suvro 53, X>^ u (for %ociou) 1.55, if/iii%a.viat.'ro (for l,a>j^avaavTa, one t dropped; see 248. 2, 248, /) v. 6:5 Subj. of Verbs in -pi, Stma^tla iv. 97, 2 Aor. xrsa^sv or xricu^^ %. 216, for xruuf&tv, contr. KTfuft.iv (see also b. below). NOTE. In the 2 Pers., the termination -aa commonly remains ; as, \w*~ OHO Hdt. i. 117, \fltvM vii. 209. (b.) In the Ep., protracted forms are made by doubling the vowel of con- traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, or its corresponding short vowel, commonly e with v oguv E. 87 -', o^out A. 350, o^'outrat A. 9, ou*0oti X. 156, Of>iiu.'jdtti -r. 1O7, ogayn A. 347, u.vri'ouHra.v A. 31, -^;aX B. '_'!>3, a^^aXa- y 297, 1/u.vaovro 6'f<6, yXwvTi-- a*. 40, ysAaJavTEy 111, aXow , Imp. for aAt^ -w) i. 377 ; fA\>a,a.ff6a.t a.. 39, fAtvaivuu N. 79 (^iva/viay M. 59), ^j T. 387 ; (Aivaiwr,.j. Thus, Qtxioi o. 305 (yet p/Xa/w 3. 692, and $oo'tti i- 320),

) 365 ; /ui/^rai ^. ISO (pottoi or pvtiy |3. 202, 243. a. 2), v7; X. 114, for pvftieu, nt.t - i*\io X. 281, jf^rXtw T. 69, 0gs E. 440, ^^v 5. 395, xaXav A. 477, xaX?av ^. 550, xuXwra B. 6H4 ; viixsi&i A. 359, irtXliim A. 5, I^CM^MI 62, s^s/a A. 611, -sr7 K. 285 , Aor. Pass. Subj. Setfttia j! B. 34, Siupsv a. 485, &s/p(y A. 143, Stiopeu 2. 409. (c,) For the Dor. contraction of a and aw into tv, and, in the stricter Dor., ot % into n, see 45. 3, 44. 4 ; e. g. 1X1711; Theoc. 1. 86, ^a^t/ 113, uftx^nw 2.73, tuira. 76; vroin Ar. Lys. 1318. So, in Horn., ofiugrvw N. 534, KKtiXri'rtiv X. 313. REMARKS, a. Some varieties of the Dor. change a into 10 or iu, and < into / ; as, ftoyioftts Ar. Lys. 100'2, ofAiupiQot, 183, bniifS* 198, for fAoyioftiv, -Ot/f/.iV, OfAOUftiffoi, i-TTKIVOJ. /3. The later Dor., from the influence of analogy ( 44. 1, 248. d), haa sometimes * for , in verbs in - ; as, qn\& Theoc. 1. 145, (dffiofteci, 45. 3) u vEsch. Prom. 28, irat/fa^v Hipp., ivga.ro Ap. Rh. 4. 11:53, otr(f>ga.vTo Hipp. i. 80 : (6) in the Alex, and Hellenist, dialects, to a number of verbs which in the classic Greek employ the 2 Aor. ; as, X^TI Mt. 25. 36, I/XTO Acts 7. 21. 5. For the doubling of . is doubled to compensate for the loss (f the r. C. CONNECTING VOWELS. ^ 24G. 1. For -ti~ connective, the Dor. and ^Eol. sometimes employ - ( 44. 4); as, MiXnrfe Theoc. 29. 4, for MAi/f, ivfiv 1 1. 4, for tfyt7*, &yw Sapph. 1.19. For the Dor. forms in -if and -iv, see 183. N. 2. The Dor. and Mo\. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel of the Pres. ( 185), especially in the Inf. ; as, $$<,/* Theoc. 15. 58, for $&- *a, rivro*0r>f 10. 1 (see 1. above), crtu'm 5. 7, x-witti 5. 28; Inf. Ititxw CH. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS*. 211 I. 102, ytyixw Find. 0. 6. 83, rdvuxw Sapph. 2. 15; Part. Find. P. 4. 318, Ts6i'opio-6a. 5. 87, Qtit-reu T. 173, tfiopH A. 363, tfttrt 0. 18. 4. In the following poet, chiefly Ep. forms, the connecting vowel is omitted : a.) Of Pure Verbs. a.vvu, to accomplish ; Impf. tjvuro t. 243, "avtra Theoc. 2. 92, "avvpis 7. 10. iguu, Ion. and Poet, tlgvu, to draw, Mid. to draw to one's self, to protect ; Act. Inf. iigt/Aivxi Hes. Op. 816'; Mid. igOrou Ap. Kh. 1208, tigta-reti A. 239, lovffo X. 507, 'i^vro A. 138, t't^vro II. 542, 'i^vvra Theoc. 25. 76, ifyuvro M. 4*54, l^ffSa-i i. 484, ifyvffat ^. 82 ; Pass. <^7 Hes. Th. 3O1 ; from the shorter puopai, ippuro Soph. CEd. T. 1352, pta.ro 2. 515, fuffSai O. 141 ; Iter. fufKtu II. 730. ffivM, to shake, trivrai Soph. Tr. 645. ffnvreti, he takes his stand, purposes, I\ 83, irrtvvrai uEsch. Pers. 49, ffrturt B. 597, X. 583. rctvvtv, to stretch ; -ruvvrxi P. 393. /3.) Of Impure Verbs. i^, comm. to-^, to eaf ; Inf. ftfttvui A. 345. Xs/crw, to leave; Impf. sXs/Tra Ap. Rh. 1. 45. waste, Inf. Pass, (x-ty-ftai, 60) we&w IL 708. ;, to Aear; Imp. ^^Tt I. 171. to watch, (r. 0wXax-) ; Imp. !r^a-^wXa^;^i (cf. 238. ft) Horn. Ap. 538. D. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. S47. a. 2. 442, contr. pipvy 0. 18, Theoc. 21. 41, /3xja/ E. 284, farus II. 585. (d) On the other hand, in the S. S., we find 7rr N. 488), ?i M. 33, Pind. I. 1. 34, ,,'fc, Id. P. 3. 1 14, ft,2f Honi. Cer. 437, ?yav Pind. P. 4. 214, and 'iywv Ib. 9. 137, ffft i. 481, Pind. P. 1. 82, #yigS A. 57, rgttyiv 251, ', i'la.ra.1 ( 47. N.) B. 137, ?r H. 414, AUTO V. 149, for yr*/, VTO, -n- q>a&/ia.To C I>. 206 ; tSov^aTO Hdt. i. 4, for ISovXovro, 0,'rix.iet'ra 152; ^utietTMt Id. ii. 142, ^varo iv. 114, ayaTTTaT; ix. 9, for ^i/yavrai, &C. ; x,ia.r.t A. 659, Hdt. i. 14, i/r/ H. 527, ix.ia.ro Hdt. i. 167, xtiaro tXia.ra Hdt. ix. 50, for xwrcii, &c. (so, with an intervening consonant, i^^etro.1 ^. 284, IgtigiSura . 95, from ^/^cts, -o-*i(y), -ffxo* in the subject in- /////'<>, and to -a-x.op.vv, -vx.it (-iw, -ou), -ffxtro, -ffx,o*ro in the utiji-rtir.i;. This form, wliich is callcil the itria- tive (itero, to repeat) is likewise used by the Dor. poets, ami soim-times in lyric portions by the tragic. It sometimes a|pc-ars to be used for metrical etFeit, rather than for spivial fiii|>liasi.s. It coiunioiily wants the augment. Thus, Impf. 'i%iffx.ot, I was in tin: hulnl uj citrri/imj, ^. 2.37, l%^ftt E. 472, \^TM 126, lldt. vi. 12, PI 3 ii,r* S. fi27, for J^y, -.j, -t, -y, ^mrxi, the kept weaving, fi. 104, XXiif,SXIO X. -I:}:'), ifAifyitrxovra u. 7, ^vvvurrxiro E. 857; "2 Aor. "%'trxi \\ 2i7, Aa<7jc H.lt. iv. 78, iXuGiffxav ISO, 2ii have connnonly the iterative hnpf. in -atrxov, sometimes doubling the for the sake of the metre (cf. 24'2. b) ; as, 'ixa-xtg T. 295, for t"aj, va/s-raao-xav B. 5.'59 ; so PI. 1 vtx.ciffxo/u.iv X. 5 I 2, for ivixtoju.ort0iaiffi} A. 291 ; 2 Aor. Opt. Hdt. i. 53 ; Inf. rmtM Theog. 5G5, $t6vifft r. Ill, 112, for avs^u, &c. (unless rather Subj. vs;!/', to 6e (f 55). (a) Those which arise from different modes of lengthening the radical syllable ( 230. 3) : ipfti Theoc. 20. 32, Sapph. 2. 15, ia-tri (/ assumed after the analogy of the ether persons) A. 176, Theoc. 5. 75, S. 3 ivr'i (v inserted instead of /, to 6e) . 49S ft. 139, tJfofteti 3. 8, sJVara A. 1 3S, | S< VT O. 41,5, tu- fftitrffnv 544. (b) In the Impf., we find both nude forms and forms with a connecting vowel, from the root <-, both unaugmented, doubly augmented ( 1^9), and doubly augmented with contraction; thus, (/v, cf. 251. 5) nice. (from which may be formed by contr. the Att. /;, ^ 231. It) $. 427, JIdt. i. 42, n'ii A. 47, Hdt. i. 65, ru M 371, It B. 87'-% jpopttt x. 25!, JVy A. 494, wiVav K. 197, Hdt. i. 62, #; <],. 37O, 7w A. 347'. (c) The Opt. hi* (only T. 2O9) is formed, as if from the root h- (cf. 5 231. rf). (d) The Inf. Tv. Ath. .ISO c, is the regular nude form, (e) For tis see 230. ; for slW K. 450, JW K. 67, 182; for 5V/ I. 701, 18! . ; for Vsv B. 44O. 24(J. 3'; for 7^j A. 170, Find.' 0. 6. 108, fyava/ T. 32, J^sv** 365, '250. 6. F. PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 1. In Perf. Participles ending in -a; pure, the Ep. mon frequently lengthens the preceding vowel ; and the Part, is then declined in -oro; or -UTOS, according to the metre. If the preceding vowel remains short, the form in -urog is commonly required by the metre. Thus, fi as, XEAaxyr p.. 85 (XgA.*xa; X. 141), fttfAa.xu7Ki A. 435 (ptfttixvs K. S62) ip.uia. S T. 331, Tt^aXway I. 208. CHAPTER X. ROOT OF THE VERB. ^ 254. The root of the Greek verb, although not properly varied by inflection, yet received many changes in the progress of the language. These changes affected the different tenses unequally, so that there are but few primitive verbs in which the root appears in only a single form. NOTE. The earlier, intermediate, and later forms of the root may be termed, for the sake of brevity, o/d, middle, and new roots. The final syllable of the earliest form of the root is commonly short ; and the oldest roots of the language are mon- osyllabic. 2*15. The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the degree in which they exhibit the departure of the root from its original form, in the following order. I. THE SECOND AORIST AND SECOND FUTURE. REMARKS, a. The 2d Aor. act. and mid. is simply the Impf. of an old root 216 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK li ( 178. 2) ; thus t^t-rov and iXt-roftw (f 37) are formed from the old root A/w- in precisely the same way as tXtivev and i*.u and 2 Pf. St^xa, to see, poet., T. 342, Soph. (Ed, T. 389, "2 A. ftgax< () 262) Eur. Or. 1456, 1 A. P. $itx&!v, JEsch. Pr. 53, 2 A. P. iSgaxfly, Pind. N. 7. 4. 2g (r. $*-)> to flay, F. Itfi, A. ftuga, Pf. P. 2ft0ej, 2 A. P. ftt^u^ iii. 5. 9. Poet, and Ion. 2/0a, Ar. Nub. 442, 2aiu, . 53, ffrek> 352 '(i/r Theoc. 22. 26, Eur. Here. 681), &c- For aiiffto, see 185. i. a.ffau or urrea ( 70. l), to rush, F. '-) ylyvopni, nljiioj, n^vo) ( 286) : others in the 2d Aor. ( 255. 8) ; as, (r. iysQ-, f>0-) WQOMV ( 268), rjli&ov ( 301. 3), Ep. defect. (r. TC/U-) tittnov ( 194. 3), found : others in other tenses ; as, *Xta, to call, F. xaX6. 516. See 64. 2, 222. . NOTE. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they are best referred to syncope, or to metathesis with, in some cases, contraction ; thus, (r. xaXf-, xXaet-, xX*i- 262. 4. In some roots, METATHESIS takes place, chiefly by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs, (a) in the theme; as, /5Aw'axw, ^y^'axw, &Qtaaxta (281): (b) in the 2d Aor. ( 255. <3) ; as, laxA^ ( 227. /?), m^v ( 301. 2) i' xov ( 259. a), wQa&ov ( 288) : (c) in oJ/ier tenses ; is, ( 223). 263. 5. A few roots are changed to avoid a IOUBLB ASPIRATION (^ 62) ; as, r. $-, ^i^. 259, reip-, T^I^.)> to nourish (Old T^U, Pind. P. 4. 205), F. ^J^, A. W e i^a, Pf. Tir e p*, Pf. P. ri^^^/, 1 A. P l/i, commonly 2 A. P. irg^j. Ep. 2 Aor. intrans. or pass. E. 555, Pf. fut-ir^etpt Hipp. NOT*. Se, also, ^ ( SCO), SVr, S^Jrr* ( 272), SJ* ( CH. 10.] EUPHONIC AND EMPHAHC CHANGES. " 219 rt%u ( 1501), TVQ* ( '270). A few other roots have both aspirated ana unaspirated forms ; as, rv%. and rvx.- ( 27O. 9, '285, C 29O), $- and x$- ( '27.5. ), ^u X n, to cool, F. tyl*, &c., 2 A. P. t^yywv, Ar. Nub. 151, and ^Esch. FT. 95. 6. In a few cases, a consonant is DROPPED or ADDED for the sake of euphony or the metre ; as, /U/w, to pour out, Ep. el'fta, 11. 11 ; dovnsw, to sound, A. IdovTryoct, i. 8. 18, A. 504, and tydovjtviaa, A. 45 ; Affcw, to ZtcAr, Pf. P. Isleizpas Hes. Th. 826. So, in reduplicated forms, nlfm^fit, nl^ngrj^ii ( 284), and in the Att. Redupl., tyyrjyoQa ( 268), ^u, to bow down, tpvrjpv- xs X. 491 (for tufavxe, ty- being prefixed according to analogy, 191. 2, although the 77 is radical). With to fo angry, we have also the Ep. (xooofiai, 29. ao^uou, 4. 80 (see r. 413, 414). 3G4. 7. In some verbs, the omission of the DIGAMMA ( 22. <5) has given rise to different forms of the root ; as, &Xivt (r. aXsF-, A-, Xst/-), to at?er#, poet. ^Esch. Prom. 568, F. u^ivtet Soph. Fr. 825, A. jXsw to F> r F - ^ ( 20 - 2 )> A - ? A;* ( 201 2), rare and doubtful fas**, Pf. P. xt^Sftai, A. P. i^w^v. Ep. F. xtveu, xivtt ft. 222, A. l%tu, net, *-X (| 22O), }/, xa/a>, x/ ( 267. 3). An Ep. and Ion. form of &'-)> to divide, chiefly poet. . MO, F. 5a-a^;, A. ^v, CEc. 7. 24, &$eae, F. wet-, Impf. oit %. 502, F. P. 155 ; from r. v ( 194. 3), 1 A. M. . 270, 2 Pf. /><. *i^ e j ( 253. 1), H. f 12. Late, 1 Aor. 2 F. P. 3. Various Changes of . (r. JF-, J-, ^'-) to 6um, poet. ^Esch. Ag. 496, 2 Pf. as Pres. in- trans., $i$j, T. 18, 2 A. M. i5^, T. 316, Pf. P. SJt/^/, Call. Ep. 52. xa/ii/ and xa.u (r. xF~ -, *- 259, */-, -), to 6urn, F. x.a.vffu and i5-a^ai, A. i*/, p. 176), Pf. xtxairxa, Pf. P. xtxi/uj, A. P. IxavVqy. Ion. 2 A. P U, Hdt. ii. 180. '.H. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 221 xA.ot.iet and xXai, to weep, F. K\a.uffoft.Ki or x\,vtrov 1^.0.1 ( 200. S), and *Xa/7*. Th^, 1 Pf. ipfe{*, 2 Pf. iv. F. 0^, N. 625, F. M. 0et^off.xi Hdt. viil 108, ^iofca, ix. 42, 2 A. M. tyfegiar* ( 248. /) Id. viii. 90. 269. 5. Change of r to r. xXtva/, to tewrf, F. xxrvw, A. *Xfva ( 56), Pf. P. xixMpcu ( 217- *; J A. P. IxXfSnv and ixXj'vSny, 2 A. P. Uxtnv. r, to rwfe, to wear, F. r^i-^/eo, A. ir^-v^a, Pf. rsr^^a, Pf. P. ri 1 A. P. ir{iQ0w, commonly 2 A. P. irgf v. 6. Change of ? into /. aXt/'ipw (r. Xp-, aXt/(p-) * anoint, F. aXsrvJ-w, A. fatr^a, Pf. a ( 191. 2) and fatitpa, Pf. P. aA^'X/^a* and jj'Xs/^^a/, 1 A. P. 2 A. P. fcfynv. i^t/'x^, to fcreaA, F. te '1 4 '' ! A - e '? a > Ar - Ves P- 649 > and e^ a ' Hipp., 2 A. ;^xo, P. 295, Pf. P. l^i'y^oci, Hipp. Collat., Ep. i^i^u, t. 83. t^s/Tw, to cas^ rfown, F. l^t'i-^u, A. ^s^a, A. P. fytiftw. 2 A., comm. tntrans., figi-rov, E. 47, Plup. P. l^irro S. 15, late Pf. P. i^gt/^a/. See, also, Xf/V (t 37) and wt/V (^ 39). 7. Change of into au. a.x.t>vu (T. -, &xov-\ to hear, F. axou/repoti, A. tfxovtrtt, 2 Pf. a*x t 2 Plup. j*,xi/v ( 191. 2), A. P. fatMw. Late, F. ixowVw, Pf. P. faov. Ep. axewa^w, Horn. Merc. 423. 2 7 O. 8. Change of v into 0. $y, to afflict, F. Xy0w, A. ffryvwe, A. P. t<>uoo[jt.a.i and itigo/Acti, to lament, F. ii$vov/u,eu t A. q-Xwvw, to M>o*A, F. ?rXCyw, A. ?TXffa, Pf. P. wicrXw^ai ( 217. ), A. P TW^- 263), to fumigate, to burn, F. v-4>t;ya, 2 Pf. i/y. Ep. Pf. orts (cf. 274. ^) 4>. 6, vtfvyttlvtt . 18. CH. 10. | EMPHATIC CHANGES. 223 10. Change of i, in the diphthong u, to j. *X/' and *X?, to shut, F. xXs/ ^ 245. 1). II. By the ADDITION OF CONSONANTS, usually either z, tf, i>, tfx, or ?. Of these consonants, T is chiefly added to labial roots ; a, to palatal and lingual roots ; i/ (without further addition, 289. 2), to liquid and pure roots; ax, , &c., to pwrfi roots. In a few instances, the close terminations are affixed to the protracted root. 2 73. 1. ADDITION OF r (see 52). . To Labial Roots. (r. p-, a-TT-), to fasten to, to set on fire, F. u-^/u, A. H\, Pf. P. i, A. P. flippy (oi^nv, Hdt. i. 1 9, U ( 296). (iet-rru (T. @ct* ( 263), T. 363. xac.ff.frea (r. xa^r-), to 6enrf, F. xaftij/tu, A. i'xa^-v^a, Pf. P. xixap.ftati ( 217. y), A. P. ixa^*?*. Kindred, y^vru. (r. *X-T-, *Xtr- 259), to sfeaZ, F. xXE-v^w, A. tx\.f-^et, Pf. *t- ( 236. a), Pf. P. xix*.i/tp.o,i, 1 A. P. i*X^jy, commonly 2 A. P. Late 2 A. ixXarav. xovru (r. xer-), to CM*, to sfriie, F. x'e^iu, A. ixo^tt, Pf. *xp, Pf. P. *- 8 ^//, 3 F. xixo^op.*,, Ar. Kan. 1223, 2 A. P. i*aTn. 2 Pf. jP*. *iafr; N. 60. (r. xv-), to hide, F. x^u^/u, A. 'ix^v^o., Pf. P. xixUftv,cti, 1 A. P w, sometimes 2 A. P. ix^vStiv. In Hipp., Pf. xixgva e cr fl y, shortened pipum ( 194. 3, 255. $, 263. 6j, and i> ray, Hes. Sc. 23 1 , 2 Pf. pipa^*, Id. Op. 202. rw3- Hdt. ii. 40. For rsrwaravTEy, see 194. 3. . To Other Roots. avta, KVuru (r. otvv-, ctvvr-), to accomplish, F. avw.i/*-), to //Aen, Ep. F. 19' (also * t 237. ?), an^ Ion. oTxfe Hdt. i. 1.55 ; Plup., a Impf., ^'*/ ( 189. 5,. F i7w, Ar. Nub. 1OO1. Ep. Impf. intrans. (or Pf.) i7* 2. 520. IT and iyvi-rw (r. I'VIT-, i/r- 259, iW 253. 2. Deriv. forms, Tp. Xuxiw, ^. 379 Dor. X*i, Theoc. 2. -J4, Att. Xx, ^Esch. Sup. 872. /*. Affixed. (r. aXix-, Xig-)> to wnrdoff, poet, in the Act., F. JXf|wVw, Z. 109, y. 346, and #Xi, ^Isch. Sup. 1O5J, 2 A. X ^* (^ 194. 3, 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 225 261), faxetfn (N 299) jfcsch. Fr. 417 ; Mid. to repel, F. aXt&jVo^a/, \\\. 7.3 A. flXsga^uy, i. 3. 6. 0$aga,ttfln, to bite, Ion. and Poet., F. o^a^Vo^ai, Hipp., A. ^Sa^a^v, Anth., Pf. P. ubt*.y/*Kt. Act. $, to smart from a bite, Symp. 4. 27. 274. y. Uniting with a Palatal to form 99 (TT). X/.j^. 3 TTjjrjjy H.-136, Pf. PL *i**v*,s ( 253. 1), B. 312 (cf. 238. a). Kindred, -rreaiTfiu, A. 371, -rrurxa^a, A. 372. Tctoa-fffu (r. raoa^;-), to disturb, F. j^ ( 62), H. 346. reiffff* (r. ray-), to arrange, F. ra|, A. iTa, Pf. rsra^a, Pf. P. -ri- rnyfAiu, F. Pf. TiTa^a/, Th. V. 71, 1 A. P. ira;^jv, rare 2 A. P. Irayjjy. i*and 2 Pf. i e 7 ( 238. j8), to cry, F. Pf. xix^^m ( 239. c), 2 A. ix^aysy. Kindred, xX2> (^ 277. a), ^^, -ul*>, xX^u. oi/*.%t>ftati, A. af*.u%ot, Pf. P. o7ftuy>ftcu (; 189. 4). A. P. Pf. l(tu X 6t'is Theog. 1204, late F. 0<>jugw, Anth. oXaXtJ^u (r. flXoXwy-), to shout, to shriek, F. oXeXt^o^a/, A. XXw|a. ffrtvci^u, and poet, trrtvai^u, to groan, F. arivaQw, A. ItrTiva.^. Poet, forms, fl-Taya^sw, Soph. El. 133, ffrtK%i%u or o-rtvat.%%it>, B. 781, A. tt.\K, 1 A. P. lei%- inv, commonly 2 A. P. e C 277. ). '226 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 2 7 5. . Uniting with a Lingual to form . KttB'^u (r. i-, it- 282, !-, <- ^259), to *ea, to p/ace, F. xa&Vw, xafiS 200. /3), A. lxV, Th. ii. 76), A. tl B. 549, Pt. 1r*f, x, 361 (Ion. ine-iit*t Hdt. iii. 126); Mid. '%o(*i, T. 162, and rarely i^*, Soph. CEd. T. 32, F. ty-ifffuOeti I. 455, later fYrqtuei Ap. Rb. 2. 807, i" A. ilrupw, Theog. 12, irpn, Pind. P. 4. 363, hava^v, g. 295, 2 A. i$y** ^Esch. Eum. 3 ; Pf. P. /, to sit ft 59), A. 134, Eur. Ale, 604, of which the comp. xMnpeu is also common in Att. prose. Derir. fyvet, -txru, &c., A. P. AgvSnv and RtwSw ( 278. y). ovoftei^u (r. avatar-), to name, F. ovopiiiru, A. avoftettra, Pf. uvof/.axet, Pf. P. uv'rt(jt.a.ff[t,a.t, A. P. uvttft.a.ff6v)v. Ion. olvoft.a,^u ( 44. 4), Hdt. IV. 6, ^Eol. o- ^a2> ( 44. 5), Puid. P. 2. 82, chiefly Ep. nofutlvu, B. 488. f^a^w (r. (p ? a$-), to'fe//, F. Hes - P- 653 For (r. ^a^-, xa$- 263. N.), < drive back, retire (- iv. 1. 16), more frequently, but chiefly Ep., Mid. %, to fay, rfrip, poet., F. iva/g, A. 191, A. lv e /| P. 187, and fiva,i. 214, F. ?g* i. 360, and fifa Eur. Ale. 262, A. Z{g ^Esch. Sept. 924, and Z#ig or Zgiga, I. 536, Soph. (Ed. C. 539 (observe the augment), 2 Pf. fyy, B. 272, 2 Plup. iJ e yi/y ( 189. 5), $. 693, l^yta, Hdt. i. 1 27, A. P. Pt. pix^'is, I. 250. uigungig*!, to ponder, poet., F. ftt^n^ *. 261, A. i^^/ga, A. 189. and lfe.ifAVKra, Ar. Vesp. 5. before a consonant, see 54. A short vowel is sometimes lengthened before . a. Prefixed to a Consonant. (r. 'aX-, avA.-, aXX-), to Zea/7, F. aXaw/Ka/, A. Xa/*|v, SM^;'. '>. ^*a< ( 56. a), &C., 2 A. ^Xa^jjv, fi'Mi;. 'aXeapoti, &C. Ep. nude 2 A. S. 2 aXr jv, S. 39, commonly pass. A. 675, Opt. S. 2 /SXjja or (r. /3X- 259, cf. %iiri, 284) /3Xr N. 288, Inf. /3x5J'jy. Ion., Pf. P. iXrfXar/eaf Hipp., A. P. Xar^y, Hdt. iii. 54. For UjAa$H/J. ^a5i ( 242. b) Mem. ii. I. 20 (Epich.), Inf. (as from r. ^a-) ^^a, Theog. 769. Extended, paiftdv, ftffu, Soph. Aj. 50. ay, to expiate, F. -rf/rw, A. irfira, Pf. rrr*a, Pf. P. TfW- raai, Ai P. tr!. Mid. r/vo/^ui, and rlvuftai or p.a.i (^ 293), to avenge, to punish, chiefly poet. T. 279, 366, Eur. Or. 323, 1 1 72, Hdt. v. 77. Poet. T/W, to pay honor to, F. T'O-* I. I 4 2, trTru, Soph. Ant. 22, Pf. P. Ft. rtnpivaf, r. 426. ^>va (r. 6a,tra, commonly $6*rofjt.i ( 2 1 9), I A. p^<, Plup. P. and 2 A. M. (^> 227, 'J26. 4) tyfffw. Ep., pfi, i-. 446, /3. 368, A. P. i>^^, ^. 33 1, 2 A. Act. fytifn (cf. 299) E. HO. Extended poet, form, fSi*fo, A. 49 ! , . 250. J. Prefixed to . irm/xi, rx.'&in(ju ( 29"), i C 285), :H. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 229 4. ADDITION or r. The addition of these letters is commonly attended with the precession or protraction of the preceding vowel, with metathe- sis* or with the loss of a consonant. u. Without further Change. a^lrx*, (r. -), to please, F. agiavw, A. fyi to propitiate, F. /Xaa-a^a/, A. tXa.aiip.nv, -A. P. ffx.u (r. fiifu-}, to intoxicate, F. fti0uff&>, A. i/u,i0Sffct, A. P. l^s^iW'/jv. fhe intrans. /KS^V^, to 6e drunk, occurs in the Pres. and Impf. 9 8O. ]8. Vowel changed by Precession. , commonly a^xitrxta (r. a^fXa-, a^A/s-*- 259), to miscarry, F. */**.&>*&>, A. l^tCXMW, Pf. J}>A?^Sx^v in Suid. Ion. tl-a^Aura/ Hipp. avaXfw, communly avaX/Vxw (r. X0-, aX/ff-x-), to expend, F. KvaXuffu, A. a,vr,*.utra, Pf. av^Xwxa, Pf. P. vx&//ta/, A. P. avwXiw^v. This verb often retains a in the augment ( 189. 4), especially in the older Att.; and some- times, hi double composition, augments the second preposition ( 192. 3); thus, A. avaXwira, Soph. Aj. 1049, xa or fy*e[t,eti, A. 'H^nea., &c.) is rare or late. For the contraction of , see 33. a,. From the contr. forms of the Impf. ('sj) tfyf, i'^>, appears *3 have arisen a 1st Pers. i'*v Eur. Ale. 295, and a late Imp. %%0i Anth. Th* prolonged ^ and ?* ( 242. b) have given rise to A *-* Hdt.i. 12O, Inf. & M Simon. Fr. 231. 17. * *. Metathesis. j3xrxw (r. ^9X-, jctXa-, /SXa- 64. N.), to go, to come (in the Pres., Ep. and found only in composition, .uu ( 223) d*n'r (r. Sv-, Sv.), to -) to leap, F. $oofyai, 2 A. tfo^oi. Collat. Hdt. iii. 109. . Consonant Dropped. %a.ffxu (r. #-, 55), to gape, F. ^etvovftxi, 2 A. slavey, 2 Pf. xi%r>va. Late XKIVU. Extended ^eta-xii^u, Ar. Vesp. 695. u (r. *4-, /u,i, to chase. vMa (r. vi; *r>6- 266), to spin, F. VYI, Eur. Rh. 555, or -rXaitiu, Soph. El. 220 (r. ierft,ai, A. P. r^w (r. ffo.0-, *v- 261), to save, F. ^. 238 ; contr. , Ap. Rh. 4. 1 97 ; , in the Subj. viyt I. 6*1, r 424. T^'W, to afflict, F. T^UITU, Pf. P. rir(>v/u.eti and r(>u%u (r. T^I/-, *"%-, r V %a- $ 298), F. T f ^, Pf. P. TIT^^A.^/, Th. iv. 60. So yto> ( 220), to poet. n^, i. 375 ; -^uu and ^*x,u, to rub. ^ 283. III. Bj INCREASING THE NUMBER OF SYLLABLES, either, 1. by reduplication, or 2. by syllabic affixes, or 3. by exchange of letters. 1. REDUPLICATION. Reduplication in the root is most frequent in verbs in -i and -axa. Jt is of three kinds : CH 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 23l a. Proper, which belongs to roots beginning with a single consonant, with a mute and liquid, or witli pv, and which pre- fixes the initial consonant with i, or rarely with e. See dl- dotfjii, xlxyr^i (^ 284) ; {3i6(jd!)<}x, to bind, rarely ltt*(u (r. Ss-, S/Si-), v. 8. 24 (Impf. ^ A. 105), F. 3*V. See 219, 216. 0. titvfiu (r. $-, $/$-), to 0ire, F. $, Ep. \tiuau, . 358. See f 51. tT.pi (r. i-, /-), to sewrf, F. fr. See 1 54, 229. "urrvpi (r. ffT-, , Rom. *14. 4 ; *riqte< ( 246. ) - A^e a - *'^ a - 62 ) fo fenrf F - /te" /(rii; A - ^" Pf - p - ** Mid. xi%g&f4ai, to borrow. The primitive sense of the root #- appears to be to supply need. Hence we have, 1 . Ktxcr.fti, to supply the need of another, by lending him what he requires. Mid. Ki%pap.*x.i, to supply -ones own need by borrowing. 2. ; (5 218. a), to supply the need of one who consults an oracle, by answering his inquiries, F. %(>ncru, A. 'i^nvffft(xi, A. P. l^rtffSnv. Mid. ^ao/^a*, to consult an oracle. Poet. %(>ri'.u or x,tf^> w i Eur. Hel. 5 1 6. 3. xgciaftiti, to supply one's own need by making use of a thing, F. %(>vjv, A. M. i%oinroi/u.t)v. In the Att. contract forms of %eeia and xa,ofjtou, * takes the place of ( ?3. a), which, on the other hand, is commonly retained by the Ion. ; as ^ Hdt. i. 55. 4. XQVI (3 Pers. sing., for < or xfifft}, it supplies need, i. e. it is useful or necessary, it must or ought to be, impers. ; Subj. %(>*, Opt. * %oa,-, %,t- 259) /!, // xfivut, and poet. (;s/v) x,&v, Part. Neut. (%oce.ov. i in- serted after contraction, 35) x,itov Impf. i%or,v (with y paragogic, for i'^oaj, or ;{/?, cf. 211. N.) or unaugm. ( 194. J ) -goTi* Fut. ^VHTII. The par- ticiple ^fiv is sometimes used as an indeclinable noun : thus, rov %otuv. Personally, S. 2 x,^- ( 18 ^) y **'. AT. Ach. 778 (Meg.) Pf. 1\, as Pres., xi%gn/u.eti, to need, want, Eur. Iph. A. 382, a. 1 15, F. Pf. xixgya-oftKi, Theoc. 16. 73. Kindred, WT&U, to want, desire, Ion. x,^^> u Hdt. i. 41, Dor. xwrta Theoc. 8. 12, and'^ ? '^, Ar. Ach. 734-( 70. V.); Ion. depon. gjk*s/t/, Hdt. Hi. 1 1 7. 232 ROOT OF THE VERB. | BOOK If 5. a.-r'n-xp, it fully supplies need, i. e. it suffices, it is eno-ugh ; Inf. uri. ovj/ttvos /3. 33. Doubtful 2 A. Act //" avjjva/ PL Rep. 600 d ; late 1 A. M. wvsio-a/^v, Antb. *-,>irXVM (r. 4jv, 2 A. M. ssrXy>jv ( 224. 3), Opt. (rXj-/Vjv) **.faii Of (rX-, rXs- 2.59) {rXi/^*?* (cf. %titi, 4 above, /SXsro, 277. a), //>. orX?- . 31 1, Pt. (r. TAS.) i^ #vXiis, Hipp. Collat. Ion. forms, ^r/^TXa^, -&, Hes. Th. 88(>, 5nVx, Hea. Sc. 291 Gaisf., jn/u.-rt.iivoftcti I. 679. Kindred, ^rXj^aw, and the intrans. a-X^w (2 Pf. r^xj<', Theoc. 22. :58), whence rXj^, F. 3V 253. 2. Deriv., upitrxu ( 279), K^TVU and a^T^vw, &c. IliS^utrxu (r. /Sao-, /3/f^(w ^ 29H) and r^uyu ( 267. 3). yiyvu/rxu (r. yfl-), to know, F. yvutroftai, 2 A. i'yvwv (^f 57), Pf. t'yvwxa., Pf. P. fyva^a;, A. P. tyfl yEech. Sup. 210', Ion. 1 A. av-iyvuffa, /mmutitlnl. Ildt. i. 68. NOTE. The Ion. (not Horn.) and the later Greek softened / ywaxu and y'iyvo(/.a.i ( 286) to yltuffxu and ytvoftxi. (r. 5., W^., ^>r-), to /eac/,, F. J^^, A. l$;$*. Pf. JtS,^., Pf. P. }tl&a>yti*i t A. P. iU^. Ep., 1 A. i^>(a.i r. . : . (> CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 233 246. 2), 2 A. P. &jy, Soph. El. 1 69. Hence, likewise, the Ep. F. contr. (la.i. 454, A. t^- ? a. 58. The Fut. and Aor. of this verb are supplied by a,voluo-ot*.*i and acrs- $o/*jjv, mid. tenses of aro'Stiufti. TI-CUO-X.U (r. roo-\ to ivound, F. . 342, 2 A. ri. ( 194. 3) . 77, nrvKo/tvv, A. 467. 386. y . Other Verbs. a.x.ax.'& (*' *X-> **#-, **^'C- 297), to afflict, Ep. w. 43'2, F. axa^w- rw. 1 A. axa^nira, commonly 2 A. vxotxov, Pf. P. a,x.u,%rifjt.a.i and ax^i^a* (P. 3 X;$T< 248. /^. Collat., u.%o[jt.oii r. .129, and ei^vvpai, Soph. Ant. 6 1 27, to sorrow; Pres. .P. a^s^v B. f>94, a^swwv E. 869. 7/yvo^a/ (r. ya-, 7v- '259, 277, y<vu>, and poet, pipvu, ^Esch. Ag. 74, F. ptvZ. See 222. 2. Ep. deriv. pipvu^w, B. 39'2. wS *262, -rra- '236. a) TSflrTx* (see 238. a). Dor. 2 A. Trtray, Rnd. 0. 7. 126 ; late Pf. TS- *OV, FT. 469, *>iyxay, E. 749. yoeiu (r. ya-), to bewail, Ep. II. 664, F. yon, /TI/. iJiv*/, P<. / Pass. ^a/, ?. 131. Deriv., i^, 0. 252, and to *^ 7 "' /rt /A ' W * F ' ^5 A - 5 I. Pf - P- Vtloyftett, A. P. iSe^^v. Poet, and Ion., F. SoxtiV*, A. t Vown*,, Pf. Ji5*j*a, I'f. P. $i3ox/*ett A. P. t5x}Vjy. Impers. Soxi/", <7 seems, F. Ja^i/, &c. iV^ i X ,*/ and f-r/^iXi^a/ (r. ^iX-, /iXi.). to <^ ca^ o/", F. /*<, Pf. P. \u and xv^lu, to meet with, to chance, chiefly poet, and Ion. Eur. Hipp. 746, Med. 23, F. KU^U ( 56. jS), Soph. (Ed. (3. 225, and xw^Vw, Eur. Heracl. 252, A. i'xt/$f.u (r. T#-, ;rs^- 259, *&-), to /ay waste, F. fo^6^. i, commonly *, Plut. ; Ep. and Ion., A. . 79. a.tu (r. a^aa^r-), to ^rr, to m?'ss, F. KfAx^ffeftKi, 2 A. sj^a^rov, Pf. , Pf. P. M^a^TJj^a/, A. P. fiftagrMnv. F. a^a^rwVw, Hipp., 1 A. t Orph. Arg. 646, Ep. 2 A. (a^a^r-, etft^etr- '^62, otpGoar-, 13.4, 28, 64. 2) Sfteprav, E. 287 (a>a f KirTtivu, and poet. p>\a.irria (r. jSXao-r-), to sprout, to bud, F. $\a.ffrviffu, 2 A. f/3A,, Pf. /Sx;*< Th. iii. 26). 1 A. , Ap. Rh. 1. 1131. "236 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II iKpfdvu (r. $0-), to sleep, usually in composition with xar*, 2 A. Pf. SsSagSuxa, 2 A. P. poet, iliitfnv. Ep. 2 A. ftptOn $. 296, 2 A. P. l^a- <7>jv, s. 471 ( 262). e-pX/rxavai (r. (*-, oQXirx- 296), to inewr, F. oQXwa, 1 A. , to please, commonly fyoftai, to be pleased, F. rxr^ira/ta/, A. wW (A. M. riVara /. 353). igwyyavu (r. ty-) to disgorge, 2 A. #i/yav. Ion. \(n.vyo(t.a,i, O. 621, F. igiv&f&eu, Pf. i^svy^a*, Hipp. &yyyftKi t Soph. (Ed. C. 1487, 2 A. Jf^a, Eur. Ale. 22. Ep. xr^v, P. 672, and xtx'iu u. 284 (Mid. Pf. Kixnpttos, E. 187), F. xi^7, Ap. Rh. 4. 1482, 2 A. (from r. x<6-, or Pass, with sense of Act.) lxf^jv, r. 379, Subj. (xt%) KI^I'IU ('- 243. b), A. 26, &c. 1 A. M. l^^trdftnv, A. 385. Xy^va> Cr. Xa^-, X^- 266, Xy^- 259, 277, Xay^av-), to obtain by lot, F. Xnloptti, 2 A. i'Xa^av, Pf. iJ'Xw^a ( 191. 1 ) and XsXay^a, Pf. P. tfXwyttKi, A. P. Uw'^^v. Ion. F. Xags^a*, Hdt. vii. 144. For 2 Aor. Swfy*. XsXa^;ava/M< and X'/j^a/, to forget, F. XflVa^a/, 2 A. \Xa.6'ofArtv, Pf. X{Xiv, Theoc. 2. 46. For XX*&, &c., see 1 94. 3 Collate U-X^avw, . 221. XI/TW (r. x/r-, Xt/cr-), to feare, and sometimes in composition X/^wavw, Th viii. 17, F. Xu'V'*;, &c. (t 37). Late 1 A. i'X<^. ^v^ay (r. ^.) to karn i F - P*MjX$yav, , A. P. &>ff$gci)i0nv. Ion. 2 A. uff^^o,fjt,nv, Hdt. i. 80, late 1 A. uftp^o.^^. See, also, /** ( 292), ^y ( 290). ^ 2O3. c, ADDITION OF . /iiJvsw (or /Sysw), to Stop /> (r. /3w-), F. /Sua-w, A. ?Si7o-a, Pf. P. $iutrfton. Also Pass, ftvvafixi, Hdt. ii. 96'. ixnnp.ee.1, and poet. 'TX.O.VM (r. <-, /xay- ^ 291), to come, F. 'i^opai, 2 A. *fx- ^v, Pf. 7 y/ a<. Ep. "rxw, K. 142. For 7xr and J|, see 185. 3, i. xwv^ (r. xt;-), to A/ss, F. x,vvvffoju.jy, PI. Phedr. 235 d. Poet, and Ton. uf'ia^ofAct, ^Esch. Bum. 804, Hdt. vii. 104. See j'^w ( 300). 293. d. ADDITION OF vu. (1.) If , F, or o precede, the v is doubled, o becoming w. (2.) If A precede, the v becomes L (3.) A lingual or %wid preceded by a diphthong is dropped before vv. . To Pure Roots. E'VVO^/ (r. Ft., \. 3*. $), toc/o/^, poet., chiefly Ep., F. ?<,,*, (71), a. 337, A. iW, E. 905, Pf. P. gT^a/ and Wa/, r. 72, Hdt. i. 47. Prose form, a^. ^/vvJ7^, F. i^p/s, a^ipw ( 200. 2), r^Uffx ( 192. 3), Pf. P. w^W^ai. Ion., xara-E/vyav . "135, ix-twvd, F. ^w, A. i'^wc-a, Pf. P. J'^a/. Late Pf. ?*, Anth. xs^ayvt?^ (r. xs^a-, x^a- 261, x/oy- 259, 278. S), to mz>, F. xtoairu, K, A. txogiffet, Pf. P. xixaottrpat, A. P. ixafsa-^y. Ep., F. x^ew (^ 245. 3), 0. 379, 2 Pf. intrans. sjfa ? W ( 25:3. 1), i. I.), to receive a*,, A. Ut^nv, Pf. 3i*iy^/, F. Pf. it^^/Mai^for tiiytw, &c., see ij, and the poet. $i$/V*, A. i^^, / > r<. ii^f and ?$*(, Pf. P. iJfy,a<, A. P. T/e^v. This verb ap- pears to have been ori^in.-illy the same with if^y, to s/ntt out, and the dis- tinction which afterwards arose, and which was marked by the difference of Ijn-utliing, appears not to have been always observed. Ion., in both senses, ? f y, -*, Hdt. iii. 48, 0. 325 (Ep. ii^y*, B. 617), and l^yvUft, or Jpyivfu, Hdt. J. W>, iv. 69. Ciyy w > (r. ^y-, ^"y- 270), to yofc, F. Ji^, A. ?C'^, Pf. P. H*>, 1 A- P. iC^w, 2 A. P. i/yj. ftiyvvfti (r. ^/y-), to mingle, to mix, F. /(*<'*, A. ?,t*/|a, Pf. P. 3 F. fttftfypat, iEsch. Pers. IO52, 1 A. P. i^'^v, 2 A. P. l^/y,,*. The older form ftifyu ( 273) is always used in the Pres. and Impf. by Horn, and Hdt. For ?^*r, &c., see 1 85. *. (r. wy-, a-y- 266), to /rf, to fix, F. , A. f-5, 2 Pf. CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 23& intrans., as Pres., ri-rwyit, 1 A. P. \ to fcreaA, F. pjg, A. tppn%et, 2 Pf. intrans. ifpuyat ( 236. 6), a A. P. if- f 'A>yw. Ep., ^Ww, 2. 571, Pf. P. Itfn-yput, &. I 37 ; Ion. 1 A. P. lppv%0*v, Hipp. Kindred, paaau and a.0dde.(r(rtv, and rarely Pfayntyu, Th. vii. 74 (r.

a.y-, $a,poy-\ to wipe off, poet. E. 416, F. epo^ta, A. eSfto^a,, Eur. Or. 219, A. P. tfMcxfav, Ar. Vesp. 560, A. M. ^a^a^jjv, 2. 124. Collat. , Horn. Merc. 361, late p.'oyvvpi. to stretch out, and Ep. o^'iyvUfti, A. 351, F. o^u, A. ^i|, A. P. v, Pf. P. uiyft,ett, Hipp., ouo<.yfjs..i, II. 834. fljy!/^/ (r. o-), to rowse, F. O^TW ( 56. /3), A. z'afw, M. 279 (see 185. S, i) ; from r. a^s-, Impf. o^pw, B. 398, Pf. P. ^ s . ^a; ( 191.2), T. 377, S'uy. o^nrett M. 271. Kindred, chiefly poet, %- ftxi, ovu, oa^uvu, ogova Lat. orior. vrrdgvijfitKi (r. TT^-), to sneeze, 2 A. l-Tra^av. 2 A. P. Pf. J (tJV, Hipp.). 20G. e. ADDITION OF /*. ifvr\Kxttx,u (r. ap.iei.aiK-), to err, poet. 2 A. tift (r. t^-)> t fi nd > F- ^" /irw ( 222> 2 ) 2 A> '^* or "^ a ( 188. N. , Pf. st/ ? jx ( 219), 2 A.M. ifyoftw, and less Att. 1 A. M. tu^K/u.nv. trrig'iu and yi, A. i to accustom, F. i^W, -/ ( 200. )3), Pf. t7&x ( 189. 3) &c. ; 2 Pf., as Pres. intrans., fat* ( 236. c). Ep. Pres. Pt. intrans. Jf^ 1. 540. tXfr^ (r. FSA.T-), < /j. (/tsv, J^sv) tufti* (also written t^iv, as if from Idea} T. 402, see 24 2. a; for ////. iipueu, see 250. e ; for Pres. Mid. attreti, see 242. 1. Deriv. 'a.aio^.t, Theoc. 25. 240, A. P. *-Vv Hdt. iii. 4 1 . $^* (r. J/t*-), to subdue, F. ^a.p.a,ru, A. iSajUflKra, 1 A. P. l^a./u,eiirf>:v, and poet, ftp*'*** ( 223), A. 99, Eur. Ale. 1 27, 2 A. P. poet. tS^jv, Eur. Med. 6-17. Ep. Pres. and perhaps Fut. ( 2OO. a) ^, A. 61, Z. 368, Pf. P. itipvfuu, E. 878, F. Pf. U^fr^MM Horn. Ap. 543. Collat. poet. forms, l*ftv, X. 221, ^^ E. 893, JEsch. Pr. 164, l*p**.%* P ind - P - 5. 1 63. Lat. domo. ?X* (r. iXx-, iXxw-), to rfraw, F. ?X$ (iX*(/ F- ifwrnVw and i^W*/ ( 222), A. ^ CH 10. J EMPHATIC AND ANOMALOUS CHANGES. 241 Pf. fyuTvxa, Pf. P. ti*>r9>p,ai, A. P. ^wrr'^v, 2 A. M. fi^e^nr. Ep. and Ion., tfypoti A. 553, Hdt. Hi. 64 (tlp'optvos Ib., 243. 4), F. tiffafteu J. 61 ; ilourdu, -, J. 347, Hdt. iv. 145 ; l^ia, H. 128; igcu'iw Z. 145. i4', and poet. 2^, ft. 415, ^Esch. Ag. 1597, or ft, . 341, Eur. Cycl. 245 (r. !>-, M- 282, 52, Wi-), to eaf, F. ftp< ( ^- *>) Pf. ( 236. c), Pf. P. tS&tffMi ( 222. a), PI. Phaedo, 110 e, A. P. 2 A. fyayav (r. (pay-, 30 i). Late F. (payola/ ( 247. , Ep. ws/xw fr. , to yield, s'txitov, Soph. (Ed. T. 651 ; t'gyu, to exclude, i'i>yK0v, Soph. CEd. C. 86'J (s'^ya^v, A. 437, u^ya^ov, E. 147), ilyu.6'ofjt.viv, ^Esch. Eum. 566; ujtivea, to ward o^", ^tva^a*, Ar. Nub. 1323, r^-jvy.f'ofA'nv, ^Esch. Eum. 43S ; nica, to ^f), ftir-ixfoiffav A. 52; Xx'x^v ( 273. 0), iV^s^y ( 300). Cf. i'^ov ( 278). These extended Aorists, which are chiefly poet., are regarded by some as Imperfects, and are commonly so accented. 3OO. 3. EXCHANGE OF LETTERS. In the two following verbs, a passes into e aspirated ( 50). ifu (r. ffjv, ^M^/. ffTTUfteti, &c. Poet. IO-TO/AOU, 5. 826, Impf. (considered by some 2 A.) 8o-ro^v, T. -J39. A. P. rtp-tyfai, Hdt. vi. 15. The act. 'ivu scarcely occurs except in composition. i'^a; and ?. o-%<; (ff%t- 288 ; compare B-i;, 'is, 210. 2), and rarely, in composition, p,ett, see ^92 , for ai^a,/, 301. 2. For the . [BOOK Ii referred to roots originally distinct, or ividely removed from each other ( 257. 2) ; as, 1. u'teiu (r. a/J-), to take, F. ttloYiffu, Pf. i'^xa, Pf. P. ygtifteti, A. P. fa'ifnt ( 219) ; 2 A. Jxay (r. lx-, 189. 3), 2 A. M. lix^wtr. Poet. 1 A. M. ig. filfra AT. Thesm. 761. Doubtful or late F. ix, sXaU^a; Ion. Pf. ^/. jjxa, Hdt. V. 1O2, ioa.'i^n/jt.a.t, iv. 66; Ep. 2 A.M. S. 3 ylvra for FsXra ( 69. III., 1 85. 3) 0. 43. In the sense to capture, the Pass, is commonly supplied by aX/Wa^a/ (r. aX-, whence sX- 259, Xa-, Xrx- 28O), Impf. flliffxepw, F. a.Xu to 0> to come > I m P- Wg%oftw F. iXjvra^*/ (r. JXw^-, IXst;^- 27O), 2 A. Xi;^y, commonly %\6ov ( 2^1), 2 Pf. ix*iXt^ (191.2). Ep. 2 Pf. ^Xi?^, Hes. Th. 66O, ci'An'Xavla ( 47. N.), Dor. 2 A. ?v^v (-.. 69. III.), Theoc. 1. 77, Lacon. X, &c., 2 A. M. ifiop.vy, Subj. ftvftKi, &c. ; 2 Pf. aTSa, (I have seen) I know ( 233) ; Mid., poet., tftopai (r. s/'^- 268), to seem, to resemble, JEsch. Cho. 178, 1 A. t'ureifttiv, /3. 791. NOTE. In the preteritive oftct (^f 58, 237), the root has four forms, (1.) #- ; 1ffp.it (Ion. TJjttty A. 124), 7, Pf. iyya^ ( 191. 2, 236. a), Pf. P. iv^'viy^*/, A. P. fivi^v, F. P. ii^i{ a-ajtta*. Ion. (r. iy<*- 268 ; ffvv-tviixireti Hes. Sc. 44()) 1 A. Hv.ix.it, E. 88.5 Hdt. iii. 30, 2 A. Opt. in', 2. 147, /n/. iyi/*i^iy T. 194, Pf. P. iriwyp*!, Hdt. ii. 12, A. P. wti%tw, i. 66 ; 1 A. //. (aya-ara-a/) yya-a< Ib. 157 Late Pf. P. -rti-otffrai Luc. Paras. 2. For aTn, &c., ee 185. ; for OH. ll.J FORMATION OF WORDS. 243 246. /3 ; for tpievfi, 251. 2. Deriv., , to carry, - (Qot'ieo, Ar. Vesp. 125), to let pass, -tiffet, -iQorivSw. Lat. fero. The Aorists #vsyxa and vviyxov are both common in the 1 st Pers. sing, of the Ind., and in the Opt. ; but in the 2d Pers. sing, of the Imp., in the Inf., and in the Part., the forms of yvzyxot are preferred ; and, elsewhere, those of jmyxa. 7. atr- 279J, to *ay, to ajfirm, F. ** (r. if-, fi- 262), Pf. tf^a (S 191. l), Pf. P. ri^ai, F. Pf. i/^V. uui, Cyr. vii. 1 . 9, A. P. IppMw or i^'^wv (Ion. s^'lnn or tigMvv, Hdt. iv. 77) ; 1 A. ti-ret (r. *V-, /V- <^ 268), 2 A. gT?rv. Non-Att., Pres. J^ /5. 162, i/'ass;, Hes. Th. 38 ; Ion. 1 A. M. a^r-s/sra^v, refused, Hdt. i. 205 ; Poet. 1 Aer. i'F/or) ? Pind. N. 9. 78, 2 A. IUVM K. 445 ; Ep. 2 A. (r. i*s sVr- 273, cf. m-6) . In tracing derivations, it is sometimes convenient to assume a theme, either as a primitive, or as a link of connection. We must, however, b cautious in pronouncing that to have been essential in the actual formation of the language, which we find convenient in explaining that formation. I. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 3O4. Simple Words are divided in respect to their formation into three classes. (I.) Those which consist of the mere radical, without change, except for euphony or emphasis. (II.) Those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of inflection. (III.) Those which receive farther modifications. The Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly to the third class. A. NOUNS. 3O5. I. FROM VERBS. Nouns formed from verbs (or from commoL radicals, 303. a) denote, 1.) The ACTION of the verb. These are formed by adding to the root of the verb, a. -iris (Gen. -rtus, fern.), or -, to nourish, *<>$*, nourishment; %ai to rejoice, x^-ai, joy; 'iu, to corrupt, <$6o(>a., corruption. Some verbs in -ivea have abstracts in -I/a ( 92. /3. a) ; as, #a.tbiva, to instruct, Tx^i'iA, instruction. C. -s (G. -aw, m.) ; as, Xiy-*, to speak, Aay-of, speech; **!/, to sow, ffvoat, towing. d. -ros (G. -rev, m.) ; as, xuxu-u, to wail, xuxv-rof, wailing. e. 'OS (G- -lot, n.) ; as, xj5-^<, to care, xjJ-0f, care. f. -pot (G. -ftov, m.), or -pn (G. -u*f, f.); as, S^-/a/, to lament, lamentation ; p.i-p.vn-fjt.a.i, to remember, f*.vr-f*.v, remembrance. REMARK. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals of Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as the effect or object of the action, and thus blend with Class 2 ; as, you. (*.(**, line. 3O6. 2.) The EFFECT, or OBJECT of the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the verb, jut (G. -fAxrof, n.) ; as, rott-v, to make, compose, -rein -pet, thing CH. 11.] NOUNS. 245 poem ; o-os, m.), or -T (G. -rooos, m.) ; as, ^fiufti (r. Sa-), to give, 2>*-ivs, corrupter ; xil^u, to shave, xovgivs, barber. d. -of (G. -aw, m. f.) ; rq>-u, to nourish, ro, beater, hammer, ^uirrrig, girdle, arirns, wind (blower), ip.aXsusi stopper. 3O7. 4.) The PLACE, INSTRUMENT, or other means of the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the verb, a. -rfyiov (G. -ou, n.), more frequently expressing place ; as, &oei-ofAai, to hear, *ga-rigv, place of hearing, auditory ; ^Kairr^iav (^ixa^u), court of justice; -xor^oi (vlvu), drinking-cup. Cf. 314. b, 315. a. b. -T^y (G. -ov, n.), or -r^a (G. -a?, f.), more frequently expressing means ; as, %uu, to curry, ^ixrr^ot and giW^a, currycomb, Xw-r^av (Xww), ran- som (means of releasing), o^^r^a (o^la^a/), orchestra. REMARK. Terminations of verbals are affixed, in general, with the same euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection ; i. e. those beginning with -ld, wisdom; iu$a,'tp,uv, -av-as, happy, 'v^xifAov-td,, happiness ; ocXr^n;, -i-o;, true, a.Xr,ftict, truth ; tvvo-os, COlitr. ivvov;, kind, ivvoi'2, kindness. See 92. /3, y, 315. a. XJ46 DERIVATION. [BOOK To b. -rns (G. -ruraj, f.), from adjectives in -as and -w$ ; as, *ro;, equal, horns equality ; ret%vs, swift, ra.%urr,s, swiftness. c. -trtvn (G. -ns, f.), from adjectives in -os and -uv ; as, lixcuos, just, IIX.KIO ffuvn, justice; cu$(>cav, discreet, (>o(rvvn, discretion. d. -as (G. -tos, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -us ; as, /WJ?, deep, fades, depth ; limits, broad, iv/>os, breadth. e. -a.s (G. -abos, f), from numerals ; as, Ivo, two, Ivtis, duad. Sen f 25. III. 3OO. III. FROM OTHER NOUNS. Nouns derived from other nouns are, 1.) PATRIALS (patria, native land), and similar words de- noting persons related to some object. These end in, a. -rns (G. -TOW) masc., and -ns ( 1 34. ; G. -rtlos ) fern, (with the preceding vowel long in patrials ; thus, -'irns, -f,rns, -T;, -tarns, -turns ; and also in other nouns in -ir;} ; as, 2v/j, Sybaris, 'SvZa.fnrns, o. man of Sybaris, a Sybarite, "SvSafiri;, a woman of Sybaris; Aiytvvrn;, Tlttrartj;, *2rirtis, ^ixiXiearns, a man of JEgina, &c. ; vokts, city, vroXtrris, citizen, ireX7ris, female citizen ; r'o^ov, bow, ro^orn;, arcfter, rowans, archeress. b. -ivs (G. -&?) masc., and -/? (G. -p,a.x.ivf , dealer in drugs, sorcerer, tpttgftetxis, sorceress; 'twos, horse, iv-rivs, horseman, knight. $ 31O. 2.) PATRONYMICS (so called from containing the father's or ancestor's name, TU*TQO<; ovoput). These end in, a. -f Ins (G. -ov) masc. (uniting with i or o preceding), and -f * (G. -f$o;) fern.; -ulns (G. -aw) masc., and -; (G. -$;) fern., from names of Dec. I.; and -ia$ns (G. -ov) masc., and -/* (G. -logos') fern., from names in -ios, and (especially in hexameter verse for the sake of the measure) from many which have the last syllable of the root long; as, Yl^ict^e;, Priam, of P., Ylgtetpif, daughter of P. ; Kix^o-v//, KxOT/2jf, Kixgacn; -tft/f, lln\ii$rjs 'H^axAJjif, -ious, 'HgetxXttins ' AJTA>, -eos, \nrot%ns ' Ba^iaf, Boreas, BU^i5jf, son of B., Ua^.a.;, -Ios, daughter of B. ; Qitrnes, Qurridlns, Qifnoif fyi^ns, -nr-os t ^i^nrttilns ' rijXs/f, Ep. G. -ni, Ep. II>)X>jxi>j,, A. 1. b. -v (G. -'twas, rarely -/aoy) masc., and -iuvn or -/> (G. -y) fern., only poetic ; as, Kgav^, Saturn, K^ow 7f, f.). Thus, srar?, Diminutives, w//a, /i^/e cAz'/rf, ?ra/^Vxaj, young boy, vradiirxn, young girl, wxiScioiov, v/zi'S'tpioiov, Ta<^a^t/XX;av, cr/^^'Vx9j, !r<^/irxa^/ay ft,ii^a.^ youth, {Aitd.x.iw, fjt,iif>a.x,i%iov, ^j/^axwXA^v, ftitooix.uXXi'biov, ftugoixiirxos, p,ii^a.x,t- ffx-v Ko^n, girl, xogiov, xo(>is\ wine-cellar ; %i7- Xaj, lip, %iiX&iv, a fish with a long snout ; yvoito;, jaw, yva,6uv, glutton; vXa- rag, breadth, H\a,ruv. As a designation of place, -uvla. is also used ; as, po- ), rose-bed. b. -| (G. -dxos, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and animals, but harsher in its expression ; as, irXouros, wealth, 5rXi/ra, a rich churl. So , Xaag, sea-wolf. REMARK. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives used substantively. *< DERIVATION. [BOOK I B. ADJECTIVES. 314. I. FROM VERBS. These end in, a. -ixag, -, -av, active; as, et%u, to rule, a^txos, able to rule; y^aQu, tt describe, y>j0jv, etigiros, aigirios TUVM, to stop, Pf. P. ri-ra.v/u.a.i, A. P. I g. -tog, -j, -ev, passive (compare the Part, in -ptvoi) ; as, , to revere, (ft-os) fftftvos, revered, et^os, flack; .-), Ion. wof (*i*>f, -o-o;), of the morning, (*t>%us), of a cubiff length ; avSoufitit ( a,v^us, Acluzan, 'A%Ktxo;, and less Att. 'A%aii'x6; voivrn;, poet, fowrix'os, poetic, pvj, - (proparoxytone), denoting material, -en ; as, s, yold, xfiffios (f 1 8), golden, gJx/va? ($wX), wooden. d. -ivos, seldom -iv'ot, expressing time or prevalence ; as, fiptgiro by day, vrt'btvo; (), level, oguvos (o'gos, -4-aj), mountainous. e. -TVoy, -?va;, -vaj, patrials, from names of cities and countries out of Greece ; as, Tct^uvr7vos (Ta^aj, -avroj ), Tarentine, Ky^xjjva'j (Kw^*o; ), C^zf- cene, 2a5/avoj 2a^s/s Sardian. f. -f, -s^oj, ->J^of, -Xs;, -jXoj, -uXos, -us (-jj (-f, G. -ij ; contr. from -o-si$vs, from iTbos, form], expressing fulness or quality ; as, alff^es (euffxot], shameful, os. a.^on^os (see ^[ 63, and compare the Lat. uter, neuter, alter, and the Eng. whether, either, neither, other) ; (b) the following implying a con- sideration of two objects or properties ; $s% t rtos (poet.), Lat. dexter, right (rather than left), a^ia-naos, sinister, left, ^tvrtoos, second, ytfAtrt^os, noster, our (rather than yours, or any one's else), i>/u.'ir, to be a friend, to love, luSaipoviu (ivba.lp,ui, -evof), to be prosperous, a-Tu^ica (art/^y), to be unfortunate, vroXiftiu (voXiftos), to wage war ; ^ovXiuu (Soo/Uy), to be a slave, to serve, fiariXiuu (ficttriXivf), to reign, %o(>ivvffou (j(,va'os), to make golden, to gild, i*u and A/a, to five, talk, sing, or dress like the Dorian *riu, to be of Philij^s parti/, aX (froXe^iw), to wish for war, Th. i. 33. Desideratives are also formed in -<*&/ (rarely -), chiefly from verbal nouns ; as, p,.v6tiviu, to learn, ffxfarr,;, dlsd/ile, fAa.fnna.u, to wish to become a diacijife, Ar. Nub. 183, frgarwyix* (ffroarwyo;], to desire military command, vii. 1. 33, Savaraw (Saxarof), to desire death, PL Phaedo, 64 b. 2.) Various prolonged forms in -*/, -iu, to intoxicate ; sometimes diminutive, as, \l.*otrj (-), - (-), -a/ of Dec. I., and in -/ of Dec. III., denoting way, place where, or time when ; as, raury, [sc. a^a/] in this way, thus, [sc. *] in this place, here, iravra%n, every way, everywhere, rsJ, on foot, i^'itf, privately, ^0.^x1, on the ground, xa.Xa.i, in olden time, Kxj, -&v), Ion. trotty'tag, evidently. b. -i$ov or -Sov ('perhaps kindred with iTSas, form), chiefly from nouns ; -$? or -a$v, chiefly from verbs (those in -a$w commonly conforming to other verbals) ; and -let ; as, -rXiv^ov (**.'nh s \ in the form of bricks, Hdt. ii. 96, froroul'ov (/JoT^wj), in clusters, B. 89, avarw\ secretly, f#oa$v* (ivi'i^u, tr-ro^s], scatteringly These appear to be Ace. forms (cf. 320. 3) ; thus, Sing. fern. -&u, neut, -Sax, PL neut. -S*. c. -i or -ti, especially from imitative verbs ( 318. c, -%< becoming -//), and in compounds of a- privative, KUTOS, and i up, confusedly, pellmell, -rct^XXa.^ .(;ra-aAXaVoj!os and -n-$i>(>es (Savrf , iou\ deat/i-hrimji/ii/, yEsrh. Ag. 1 1 76, Cho. 369, %i-ogos and -o-(pa^9f (%is, -aj, -<-yjj (-TtJ^, y'iy*9uu.i , fin-born, i^-ei-Topi; (obof, fogi}}, tcni/- farer, ftir-at-'roktof (pices, Xwj), half-gray, N. 361 ; K^ ;H. 11.] FIRST WORD. LAST WORD. 253 chorus-leading, rtg-r-t-xigavvos (TI^TU, xtoxuves), delighting in thunder, A. 419, Xtr-a-Tit^la. (Xe/Va/, reify; ), leaving one's post. 2.) In the insertion of otir(poo;, horned, QuffQofios, light-bringing ; Xu-ffi-TiXris (>.uu, os (vawj, -rogos) navigable, (/u,t>y-5a,(>of), mixed with barbarians; S-t-cff-i^^'iet (S-tos, i%- fyos), impiety, , fties), life-giving; TKfA-t, %?*>;), wounding, A. 5 1 1 . In some of these cases, the 41, 4-.', 192. 1. 'A^p/, like vrs^i, often retains its vowel. In the other prepositions, the elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., par- ticularly in the Ep. before some words which begin with the digamma. For elision before a consonant, see 48. 2. Hgo sometimes unites with a vowel following by crasis ; as, vgo-avrs thrown at with stones. b. ~ns (-tf, G. -Jay) ; as, lu-vgtx-vs, becoming, Kurugxvs, self-sufficing. c. -is or -as (G. -eu], and -* or -, denoting the agent ( 306. a, b) ; as, i9/jt.o-8irns^ legislator, fAugo-vi6o-6*i(>a.s, bird-catcher, pr.'l.o- OT*)(>, shepherd, 2. 529, wa/^-oXera^, child-murderer. REMARK. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with , t, or , followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to n or u ; as, ffr^artiyos (ff-r^eiro;, eiyu , general, lufffauros (W-, iXctuya), hard to drive over, dvavuftos (a-, cvo/xa, 44. 5), nameless. 337. 2. If the compound is a VERB, it is important to observe that verbs are compounded directly and without change with prepositions only ; and that, in other cases, compound verbs are derivatives from compound nouns or adjectives ex- isting or assumed. Thus, XetfAZavu, to take, unites directly with the prep, ava, up, to form avaXa^favw, to take up ; but it cannot so unite with the noun 'i^yov, work, and hence the idea to take work, to contract, is expressed by i^ya-XaSiu, derived from the compound verbal i^yo-XeiSos, contractor. So the verb compounded of 'jj$jVaj, and leaping forth, Bur. Hec. 1172. BOOK III. SYNTAX. fyetmiv. Homer. t^ 329. SYNTAX, as the DOCTRINE OF SENTEN CES, treats either of the offices and relations of words as arranged in sentences, or of the offices and relations of these sentences themselves. NOTE. For a general view of the OFFICES OF WORDS, as subject, predi- cate, copula, attribute, compellative (person addressed), appositive (substantive in apposition), adjunct (modifying or limiting substantive not in apposition), whether complement or circumstance (i. e. regarded as completing the Idea of the modified word, especially as a direct or indirect object, or as denoting some circumstance respecting it, as time, place, means, &c.), whether exponential or nude (i. e. attached with or without a preposition), exponent (sign of office or relation, as preposition, conjunction, &c.), &c. : of their RELATIONS, as agree- ment or concord, government or regimen, &c. : of the DISTINCTIONS OF SENTEN- CES, as simple or compound, distinct (hi which the predicate has a distinct form as a finite verb} or incorporated (in which the predicate is incorporated in another sentence as an infinitive or participle}, intellective or volitive (expressing an act of the understanding, or of the will], declarative or interrogative, actual or contingent (having respect to fact, or founded upon supposition), positive or negative, leading or dependent, substantive, adjective, or adverbud (performing the office of a substantive, adjective, or adverb in another sentence), protasis (introduction, condition) or apodosis (conclusion), &c. : of their MODES OF CONNEotvix,'Kri x.a.ra.'irnrrctft'ivot ol "riroi Ib. viii. 3. 12. 6. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an adjunct ; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other would seem more appropriate. Thus, Tovrev ro tu^et 3vo rXi0, of this the breadth is two plethra, i. 2. 5 ; but, Tw Ji ^ILa^ffvou TO tvgos 'urn* itxixn xa,} triyri waJwv, and the breadth of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet, Ib. 8. Horapos tvges ^uo vr&itguv Ib. 23 ; but, Tdtygnf . ., Ta f&iv tuoes of>> \er cmo^nros Pers. 348. 7 ANACOLUTHON. An appositive sometimes differs in case from its sub ject, through a change of construction : as, Mr/ gav a,v%avof&ivriv ?, out the greatest thing of all, you see your own territory increasing, Cyr. v. 5. 24. To X o i tr 6 1 o v $1, S-giyxos afaiuv KO.XUV, 2oJx7 ywn y^at/f 'EXXa2* iiffei(pi%of*oii Eur. Tro. 489. 'H^v i 'yiMMjAiveay, TO TOV x.u[& cu 2o TTOI at/, oiio' ol ye/ravEj ffa, TI eLttrtfctvovrui, ' as the comic poet says,' PI. Ale. 121 d. NOTE. This use of the Norn, and Ace. may be often explained by attraction (. 3J3) to the subject or object of the verb. 9. The whole and its ports, or a part, are often found in the same case, either by regular apposition (as when the whole is simply divided into its parts, or the parts united to form the whole), or by attraction ( 333), or from their sustaining similar relations to the same word. This construction has received the general name of o-^JJ^a xa,6' o'Xax xai p'toos, construction by the whole and the part. II. USE OF THE NUMBERS. ^ 330. I. The SINGULAR is sometimes used for the Plural in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the expression greater individuality or unity ; as, Tov "EM.yva, the Greek {=.ihe Greeks}, Hdt. i. 69. "fiynsi ddxyvov o^^aTwv M'TTO, the tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. El. 1231. ni^nlr\^ tvdvg da%QV(ov Ib 906. REMARK. A chorus, from its strict unity, commonly speaks of itself as an individual, and is often so addressed or spoken of by others. Not unfrequent- ly, the two numbers are mingled ; as, XOP. 'Eya /u.lv, u -T<, xa.} TO ii}>o/Aiff0' Upa. Soph. El. 251. r H ^tTvoi, (&h SJJT* u$ix.y6u tro) Id. CEd. C. 174. 'H^Tv p\v iftn vreiv TtTc^surui fitXos ftivu S ^Esch. Eum. 676. 'O^yaj |(/V o-o/ . . '!>?? ^ Ib. 848. 336. II. The use of the PLURAL for the Singular is particularly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns, in adjectives used substantively, in the names of things com- posed of distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons or things ; as, KJ ^w^j xai S-oiXrtii 288. Tuv A/OS T' t^ouv v-r^ cnvus, ' for the foes' (Prometheus), ^Esch. Pr. 67. XaXas Toxtutrn ilx'oTus Supoupivoif, ' parents' (a mother), Eur. Hec. 40:1. REMARKS. . An individual often speaks of himself in the Plur., as if others were associated with him ; and a woman so speaking of herself, uses the masculine, as the generic gender ( 330. 1 ) ; thus, A/2oj/,<*j0 y TO, A.S- Xi-vittva //, for I am ashamed of what I have said, Eur. Hipp. 244. Sow 260 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [BOOK Hi. evxir' av tint iv rot $' ttrpii xcet ? xAi ft* Id Ale. 277 'AAK. ' Agxovftiv riftsTf 01 fgoSvrxrxovris ffiftv Ib. 383. MHA. 'H^tJy xrtvou- fttv, o'trig itttpviraftiv Id. Med. 1241. 'HA. Ylt gauftivai Soph. El. 399. So a chorus of women (^ 33.5. RJ uses the masc. wng. (if the text is correct), Ksi5^vv XS/-TO^<, . . AiW Eur, Hipp. 1 105. /S. The Plur. may be used with a singular compellative, when the person ad- dressed is associated with others; as, IT', s'^j;, vpi~s, S> 'H^a-sriSa, xaJ S^ao-xs- n avTov /3at/A^jva/ T hptls. 0! ftlv $ri a,vt%ov $uo VIC^'HTKU, there ran up two young men, iv. 3. 1 0. Awva^s/f $1 a.(A^i>Tt^a,t ljv euv a.^u frXi-^Kvris t'n aXX>jXw PI. Euthyd. ii73 d. /3. In the old poetic language, a few examples occur in which the Dual is used of more than two ( 85, 172) ; as, 35v0s AiT, the Sea! the Sea! iv. 7. 24. 3.) In address. The appropriate case of address is the Voc. (S 85). But there is often no distinct form for this case, and even when there is, the Xom. is sometimes employed in its stead ( 81). (V/) The Nom. is particularly used, \vhen the address is excLunutory or descriptive, or when the compdlative is the same with the subject of the sentence ; as, r H p/Xaj, Z> q>i\es, my beloved ! my beloved ! AT. Nub. I 167. 'Icr-r/aj a xetXo; - *.r)0ius . . auras 'AraAA.o?, ov Ttgi/uiviTs ; The Ph'deriun there, Apollodorus, stop! wont you? Ib. 1 7'J a. (c) In forms of address which are both direct, and likewise exclamatory or descriptive, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated ; as, r n (p/Aos Z Q'tXi Bux%,t Eur. Cycl. 73. r li ooras, ATv Soph. Aj. 89. OSras eS, vo7 trov } j3a.vtpt p. a, % as na.'i hyi(t,uv, Cyrus gave out as the pass-word, JOVE OUR ALLY AND LEADER, Cyr. ill. 3. 58. B. THE GENITIVE. ^ 345. THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING PRO CEEDS ( 339) may be resolved into, i. That from which any thing proceeds, as its POINT OF DEPART URE ; and, n. That from which any thing pro- ceeds, as its CAUSE. Hence the Greek Genitive is either, (i.) the GENITIVE OF DEPARTURE, or, (n.) the GENITIVE OF CAUSE ; and we have the follow- ing general rule for subjective adjuncts (^ 329, 338) : The POINT OF DEPARTURE AND THE CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE. NOTE. The Gen. of departure is commonly expressed in English by the preposition from, and the Gen. of cause, by the preposition of. (i.) GENITIVE OF DEPARTURE. 346. Departure may be either in place or in character. Hence, RULE IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINC- TION govern the Genitive. There is no line of division between the two classes of word* which are mentioned in this rule. Many words which are commonly used to denote distinction of character referred originally to .separation of place (cf $ 339). And, on the other hand, words which usually denote separation of place, are often employed, by a metaphorical or transitive use, to express de- parture or difference in other respects. 1. Genitive of Separation. 347. Words of SEPARATION include those of removal and distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and fail- ure, of abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of protection and freedom, &c. ; as, Xft/e'ir0a/ aXXr'Xwv, to be separated from each other, PI. Conv. 192 c. X; ilyntrt H. Gr. vii. 1. 8. lev rtfi l^i -rolipov *a.vff*ff6ai, to CH. 1.] OF SEPARATION. OF DISTINCTION. 265 cease from ti~f war against me, i. 6. 6. Tourovt . . ov <* nutria i vyiv ct i, Ib. 1044. 'AXugsrov ftogav Id. Ant. 488. AiJo v^f sgn rov ftfi xaraBtJva/, will keep two men from sinking, iii. 5. 11. 'ULLivSioot frevtvv, iXtufs^oi . . Euguffti'sus Eur. Heracl. 87:5. "Aviv a.li*.i<3-Tea, to surrender to Philip the freedom of the Greeks, Dem. Cor. 1 247. 24. To<> ^urSvrt^on . . xa/ fl^wv xcti S-axwv xai Xoywy wwt/xj/v Cyr. viii. 7. 10. /S. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, common- ly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a preposition ; but hi poetry, often without a preposition (cf. 4^9. ) ; as, Aa^tuwv . . QigovtrKv, bringing from the house, Soph. El. iJtM. ToyV^i va^ctt yvs fXav, to drive these children from the land, Eur. Med. 7(). 'A vaxovty itra.i x fivfuv Soph. CEd. T. 23. 'Tp.<7{ pi* /3^ " r a. aa.vov *i- fnpa. Eur. Iph. T. 1384. For adverbs in -&, properly genitives, see 91, 320. y. In a few rare phrases, the Gen. denotes the time from which, without a preposition ; as, MET" oX/yav s TOVTUI, and [after a little from these things] a little after these things, H. Gr. i. 1 . 2. T^Va/ . . tni rouriuv, in the third year [from] before these things, Hdt. vi. 40. Ast/rgga* $1 ini rovriuv, ' [from] after/ Ib. 46. 2. Genitive of Distinction. 3 19. Words of DISTINCTION include those of difference and exception, of superiority and inferiority, &c. ; as, Aieagitrra.! M/- Xjrau, all excej)t Miletus, i. 1.6. A ajtrri, *J aXXoTav l-r/a-c^*!? PI. Meno, 87 C. OwSiv XXarj/a /> fciTt 5; tavrov fa.Tpi^os ovrt TOV f^ofov (cf. 405) Dem. Cor. 289. 14. OuTea nii. 2. 21 / REMARK. The verb Xs/Va^a/ governs the Gen. in a variety of senses, which are naturally connected with each other, but which might be referred, in syntax, to different heads. Thus, 2-rgaTflv . . rev AsXu/^svov Sagf, 'left 266 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE. [BOOK II? from [or by] the spear,' i. e. ' the relics of war' ( 347, 381), Msch. Ag 517. K/*a< urtltiv' eu {*.K*etv XtXsiftf^tvai, 'not left far behind,' L e ' closely pursuing,' Id. Pr. 8.57. Fyay**? S* aSfXpay MeXteey^ay XEX^- pivot, 'left behind by,' i. e. 'inferior to,' Eur. Suppl. 904. K< r/'j ft/as pot irou XiAiis Eur. Med. 19. Bao-vXE^wy ayr&Iy V. 6. 37. Ao-*'*/v So^wir Eur. Ion, 1036. See also 389. Qiix ctiirof HzifXiufflv, us ettiTav xgetrur ; Hew ffu ff T^O, T >j yt7r' otxofav \ ^ rifAuv x,(>(t REMARK. The primitive sense of the verb ei^u appears to have been to take the lead. But, in early warfare, the same individual led the march, ruled the host, and began the onset. Hence this verb came to signify to rule, and to begin ; and, in both these senses, it retained the Gen. which belonged to it as a. verb of precedence. Thus, 'Av^ry ^/y, to rule men, Cyr. i. 1.3. f &g%itv, to begin flight, iii. 2. 17. Tw Xcyaw Si fyxtrt uSt iii. 2.7 KaJJ vr^uTrif TiTa^T^v Js, tj . . av^ja/v Soph. El. 895. Aiftvtjv . . ^ieuretv Scares KO.} wi) >., ' boiling with water,' PI. Phaedo, 113 a. "NLsfoffttis rou vixTugos PI Conv. 203 b. T6. That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of discourse, a matter of complaint, the subject-matter of a composition, &c. Hence, not unfrequently both in immediate dependence upon another word, and even in the introduction of a sentence, RULE VII. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. Thus, Teu ro^orov ou xoiXus ?%tt kiytiv, on, x,. .., it is not well to say of tht bowman, that t 8fc., PL Rep. 439 b. A/a^i^svaf ulrtLv, OITW fjt.lv ^^f t*l o'ixv 'i%efiv, observing in respect to them, how great and wfuit a country they have, iii. 1. 19. Ttjs $t yuvetutott*' 1 '' wovrottT, but in respect to the wife, if she manages ill, CEc. 3. I * . Tow Ko-viy v virou T'I ns ; S/)ph. El. 317. K^uou- ffat x-etilof , having he nrl respecting her son, Id. Ant. 1182. MavT?a, . . a, TOU$' ff u p. a. r o f Id. Gid C. 354. Ketrxftu^tTv 31 rou Kw^ot/ 3oxav/u,iv, uf i Cyr. viii. 1. 40. To? 3i olxaSi v(rii a,i>- ruv TO *6oi PL Rep. 375 C. T Miya^twv ^^KTfjia. x.a.6atii7v Id. i. 140 (cf. T0 !< bhyxpiav -(^rilpio-fjtet x.tt6t>.evfft 139). T< "Si ruv .*<&/> fftccuTov ff TI r, ffotifx, t , of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5. 10. 'Av- (toufuv a, Tog cuv i. 7. 3. 'H -^v^ri yuf&vy TOU ot;, to make an in" cursion somewhere upon their territory, or upon some part of, Sfc., Cyr. vi. 1 . 42. r Hv ft'irov v/jii^a.;, it was mitt-day, i. 8. 8. TJ? rift'sox; o^/t viv, it was late in the day [at a late hour of the day], H. Gr. ii. 1. 23. E/j roV f>u.i^s, to thi* day, Eur. AJc. 9, Phosn. 425. /5.) To express the whole as the sum of all the parts. Thus, *E ra.evffiv ol $1, . . ei /tt . . i, el "Si . ., titri $' ol Th. vii. l.>. 3. It is often at the option of the writer whether he will employ the Gen. partitive or a simpler form of construction. The two forms are sometimes combined; as, EJV' elv Staj, t"n &oru v o rctvree, iro* ft i(> ot rou . . Ivr^fucou, the third part of the cavalry, Cyr. ii. 1. 6. TUv *i\Ta,ia,- Sf ffrgct.9^rovvnirteav rgoiuv a$!xira rris 'Arnxvf If 0/v'? *(>UTOV, 'came upon Attica first at CEnoe,' II. ii. 18. #. The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, may be regarded as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part ; and therefore tin- use of this (Jen. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and adverbs may be referred to ellipsis. Thus, To%os rut v Symp. 7. 2. OH. l.J PARTITIVE. 27 1 <$ 369. B. ADJECTIVES. NOTE. The ad -calves which axe most frequently used to denote a part are termed partitives. a. THE ARTICLE, fovf ftlv KVTUV a-rixruvt, revs $' l.ict(ri*.ia. uniStvirxov \. 8. 27. ELoXXa ra wirflz//wy i. 5. 5. 'Ox/a/ ev avruv iii. 1. 3. S. SUPERLATIVES, and words derived from them (by virtue of the included adjective, cf. 351). 'Ev T<> ugio-rots lltgir&iv, among the best of the Persians, i. 6. 1. Tov vnrrareirov uavru* K gt ir rtvff o,vuv, r, rut $aut xetTUxixgnfAtio-ftivo. Cyr. vili. 3. 41. . OTHER ADJECm^S. "E^wv ra> lit nr6 ojv Th. ii. 56. T H

5; PI. Phaedo, 1 1 1 a. Ilaw frar' tT iff()a.i Mem. iv. 3. 8. 'Erat/^a i$n ii rri; riXix/cts, you are now at that point of life, PL Rep. 328 C. Aiw^o rov Xeyov PL Conv. 217 e. Ovx o^S-s 'it 1 tixaxov; Soph. Aj. 386. O7 <7C^l\^v6it ao-sXys/aj uvf^ta-rof Dem. 42. tM. Oar ns tpeavrtios l\6n ; Soph. CEd. C. 170. 'E^wXTT aXXflf aXXo- ^ ray "Ovti H. Gr. vii. 1. 15. Mj ve^ofu %l rov irorxfAoti f^oZaittit, but not to advance far into the river, iv. 3. 28. 'Exa^v^ov fii%gi vrofpa jf r,/u.i(>tts ; Ar. Av. '1498. II ga'iai'r a ra . . S ya-o uV i;, /or / am ^MS m [have myself in this stat of] fortune, Eur. Hel. 857. 'Ava^vnVa?, us tJ%t

Soph. CEd. T. 345. Hut ayutos fatftt* how do we come on in the strife? Eur. El. 751. OS Tea rgovou . . t%it; Cyr. vii. 5. 56. Yivavs fii %xus u^t ro7a$i, thus are you related to these, Eur Heracl. 213. "E%ovrus i5 QpvSv, of good judgment, Eur. Hipp. 462. 'Av- fyeiffi p,t*.Xouiriv tu ff&>fjt,a.rog i^nv PI. Rep. 404 d. "Orav . . uyitituf , KUI p,ei%tis el fttrtjr *lry, of war and battle, there fell to her no share, Cyr. vii. 2. 28. Ot-S' <3$ ^fitt tut vrgofrx,u ovrt xKrKrfj.otrts *u ourt f*.i6ni Cyr. iv. 2. 20. (2.) Of an Infinitive. K) \-rtfjt.iytt>vi irfyut TI -r^os Ixt/vovs, xeti ixii tut f^at etvrovsi that there even mingled some of themselves with those, and some of those with them, iii. 5. 16. Ow* uiro -rooffrixuv ovtivi *{%?,!, he thought that no authority belonged to tiny one, Cyr. viii. 1. 37. AaxE? }IJMUM sTva*. TvTtt ti/xt t f nm not one of these, Cyr. viii. 3. 45. Tv c*ut, thnu shall be numbered as one of my dearest .children, Kur. Bacch. 1318. 'Erwy^-zyj ya.^ *< /Sac/Xnf ut Th. iii. 7O. K< i^i Teitut .. 9-if T*t QtvyetTut etop.*& I partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303. Tav luQgoirvvav /*tr)i- ^avref, imparting our joys, (Ec. 9. 12. Kajyavai*; acravrwv, vii. 2. 38. "AvSas; a/ ilM4f ^Mf trj ratiSs Toy xiv&vvov Th. iv. lO. SuXX.ri'^o/u.a.i ^i TotJ^'i A/aw rXavtxToJJvTa, 'bearing more of,' CAT. i. 6. 25. HZnt a.$6ovtus i-rrt^nn ruv txurov Mem. i. 2. 60. Taw *.aytv *otr$ovs Eur. Suppl. 350. Hu p,G XX T a < . . ra^s Js/^aTaj Eur. Med. 284. 'Aya^j ^t g-vX^v-rrgtet ruv iv tigyvy Tavwy, piZetia $i rut v *a- ff v p. p. a. % o s t^yuv, agiVr 5s ^/X/aj xoivwvog Mem. ii. 1.32. JIG 8. 2. TOUCH may be regarded as a species of par- tial action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head belong, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy, verbs of laying hold of, hitting, meeting with, &c. Thus, "Airrtff^tti v ra.ibos ii-r otvrrnr a,s , having met with the son of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. "Orav Ss rovruv r/vej Siyys Cyr. i. 3. 5. Taw? rt yixns af A*ns TOV 'Ofovrtiv, they took Orontes by the girdle, i. 6. 10. Ti iett.tba.(>t' wHvf ec.viX.xti . . a,v%ivos Soph. Ant. 1221. /3. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like the following : TJ? KtQaXvs x.a.'rt.&yi, he broke [was fractured in] his head, Ar. Ach. 1180. SuviT^iSn tint xupuXvs Ar. Pax, 71. 'ILriZvro rov K^ar/Vs* ffuvr^t-^/a.t Ttis xi.))s Kurtj;, they charged Cratlnus with having broken her head. Isocr. 381 a. E7JJ xiQa.X.ris Ar. Ach. 1166 Cf. 437. 3 TO. 3. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and receiving, govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily either to distribution or to touch. Thus, "! ouou O.VT t a. ff a. ; , ovrt you* xu.fS rtpuv Soph. EL 868. O'ltcf &u,oiS! \ 'laiffovos *t/i7Eur. Med. 23. NOTE. The student can hardly fail to have remarked the great variety of metaphorical and transitive meanings in which words of sharing and of touch are employed, not only in Greek, but likewise in our own and hi other languages. 371. II. That which exerts an influence as an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, OF CONDITION. To this division belong the following rules, respecting, 1. the motive, reason, and end in mew ; 2. price, value, merit, and crime ; 3. the sensible and men- tal object ; and 4. time and place. 1. Genitive of Motive, fyc. 372. RULE XL The MOTIVE, REASON, and END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive. To this rule may be referred the use of the Gen., both in regular construction and in exclamation, to express the person or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing is felt, said, or done. Thus, a. WITH VERBS. Teurev ft . . X T M * xatTafii;, paying nntliiiirj for them, Ib. iii. 1. '$7. Tw ftiv vra-Sous Kiv U.VTOI Ib. V. 4. 32. -Zr,)(.u ./j . . .vroZ Id. (Ed. T. 234. Tay'rijj lx*a- CH. 1.] OF MOTIVE, REASON, AND END IN VIEW. 275 fttti ft, I beseech you for *^r sake, Eur. Or. 671. 'Ixtnvtu rt ruvbi So^itovfl;, ' in honor of,' Ar. Eq. 106. T ov ^aStxat ftvcc; Yletfictt For what do I [owe~\ Pasias tivelve mince? Ar. Nub. 23. Ylgoirivrorui To7s, ' so that it may not profit,' Cyr. i. 3. 9. /3. WITH ADJECTIVES. Evtetifta* . . rov r^ox-ov PL Phaedo, 58 e. r H / 7-JJy T*%*nf) Ulessefl in thy trade ! Ar. Av. 1423. T H raXa/v' \yu rittv Soph. El. 1209. *ft WraXa/va TJ? ifjt.ni a.l6ttlia.{ Eur. Med. 1028. y. WITH ADVERBS. TatJr!j mxa r>jf flra^a^ow, on account of this pass, i. 4. 5. Ty^ ^iwy/v tvtxx, lest they should escape, iii. 4. :J5. (&' ixi'ivn w rat/ av^of, ^4/as /or ^Ae noWe man! Cyr. iii. 1. 39. A/a? xctxu* Eur. Here. 899. 05^a< $ci/u.etros xa.} rixvuv, Ipoi V lft.au Ib. 1374. 'Oa Hiffixov a-T^ct-rtv pares rou^i ^Esch. Pers 116. 'larTara/al ralv xuxeav Ar. Eq. 1 . 5- IN SIMPLE EXCLAMATION. Tj TW^WJ, Jfy ill-luck ! Cyr. ii. 2. 3. T?i pt*>ias, Wliat folly I Ar. Nub. 818. Tl ZftJ /3a[&ivou{ laying claim to the kingly art, PL Pol. 289 e. lay %i $ ovt7v tv . . rStira Isocr. 98 c. 2. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of motion pass into those of simple effort and desire. Thus, 'Upon, and, more commonly, i

* petrous u^xtvprw Ib. 16. T/^jjf o^iytffSni Hier. 7.3. 276 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE OF PRICE, &C. [BC >X Hi 2. Genitive of Price, fyc. ^374. RULE XII. PRICE, VALUE, MERII, and CRIME are put in the Genitive. . PRICE. "Ii*ray, Sv . . KtrtSoro rsvTjxavras % a. g 1 1 x, & v , the horse, which h-t hud sold for fifty darics, vii. 8. 6. 'QvCmSau . . f*ix(>a, fiirga roX\otJ ugyv- fiev iii. 2. '21. IlaXXa? 7-0?? ctXXoi; iweuXouv Mem. i. 2. 60. Tv) f&ti r tu v oux uvtjrn IsOCT. 21 b. 'A^tc^/Xa^ay . . asrEA.VT^aiT'i ra- Xavr^v fyyea Dem. 159. 13. /3. VALUE AND MERIT. IlaXXau a/a; rjf o-r^ar/a, uwrtA TOMcA to a; roufteu evov Dem. 55 ii. 1. Ollus 'ivox'os ia-rt Xitv or tt^'tou oltl tiiXias Lys. 140. 1. T etlrris iyvaiets v8uvot il rots aXXa/j Dem. 293. 28. NOTE. The Gen. is sometimes used to express the punishment ; as, y- r o v Jt aJVo* K^'ivoufft, and these pronounce sentence of death, Cyr. i. '2. 14. 2wX- Xa^tysT5 wirJj'yay 3- at y -raw H. Gr. ii. 3. 12. 'AvtigaiTuv XKret'^ritynrQ'ivrui QoLtdrov % tyf/vs PL Rep. 558 a. Tla'T* J'ya^a/ )tr^t<0 ytyvir/ Dem. 1229. 11. In this construction (which is rare except with 9^ayra^), the punishment api>ears to be regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the end in view ( 372) in judicial preceding. 3. Genitive of Sensible and Mental Object. $ 37*5. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may be regarded as its exciting cause, and, in this view, may be put in the Genitive. Hence, RULE XIII. Words of SENSATION, and of MEN- TAL STATE or ACTION govern the Genitive ; as, . OF SENSATION. 2/rat; lytva-ttvra, tasted of food, iii. 1. 3. 7 Jiffctv Ttis TletQXetyovicts V. 6. 1. "Avriigot evTit ctiirav iii. 2. 16. Twy t/*t/f etvrov I^OVTUV ii. 6. 1. 3'tvug t%&> Ttjs iv6a$t li?ij(r5s (AvSuv Soph. El. 372. 'Ay0tis TOV XKTCIXOVUV Dem. 15. i!7. 37G. y. OF MEMORY. Tovreav evtsts pi (At n rot, i, these things no one remembers, v. 8. 25. - Ov^ivos 'in ravruv iftiftvnro, 'made mention of,' vii. P. 8. TJJS et%tis f4VHf*o*ivo/Atv Isocr. 12 C. Toureu Jk aitroijf VTO ftipviiffitirt Cyr. iii. 3. 37. Mij (*' ia/*vv -roigoifa plv ^'oyu* *. a. u p 1 0' ei/tlpu, 'forget,' Eur. Hipp. 288. "T-rvav r, X^>jv ruv x.a.6* iia.v xaxuv Eur. Bacch. 282. 3. OF CARE. K)*r4j SsJ^aw, to care for Seuthes, vii. 5. 5. Totirow r< Js7 u'tXitv, of this there must be to you a care, i. e. you muxf tae care <>/* A, Cyr. i. 6. 16. TgovuXcto-?y, ea^r /or ///e, or clinging to life ( 370. N.), PI. Phaedo, 117 a. TLitvjirets xgnfe.etTuv, having hungered for wealth, Cyr. viii. 3. 39. llcXis iXiv0tieti tt^Ytffetffet PI. Rep. .562 c. KirTutris *vit tiw*is Ar. Pax, 497. . OF VARIOUS EMOTION. "Ayetfteti Xvitetros, I admire the spirit, Eur. Rhes. 244. OS; oux etv av0 ovrivnvfe,etros Ib. 626. 37 7. REMARKS. 1. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy tran- sition, into that of obedience (obedio, to give ear to, to listen to, to obey, from ob and audio, to hear}. Hence, words of obedience govern the Gen. (cf. 405. w) ; as, TOVTOVS . . fieta-fXius ovx ctxoviiv, that these did not obey [or were not subject to] the king, iii. 5. 1 6. 01 "Si K^oD; ov<^^ xetXouvrtvv vTr,ot>oi, ' regarded their invitations [listened to them calling],' iv. 1. 9. 'TC-rtxaoi ru* Maixovovov . . \ ' now for a long time,' i. 9. 2.-). 'E%iovovou ffu%vou PL PhflBdo, 57 a. MTKV . . el (jt,a.x,(>av %(>ovi>v Soph. El. 477. Ouxin rev Xa/ratJ [sc. %ovoii] ireif%aifiit9 y xax^,- Dem. 44. 12. y t7f 2. PLACE. Avrou [sc. re-raw] fttivxvrtf, remaining in that place, i. 10. 17. TevS' tijf 5* trt/^o:; J^J} /Saa-r^w^av Soph. El. 900. 'Ea-r/atf /t*ia-^ip. Xew -T>7X!v ^>j ^JJXoj ^Esch. Ag. 1056. Aa/af Si "^0* ' ^/5j^aT{*Tavif a/xaSr* X*Xwi; Id. Pr. 714. KTKA. Ilariga; rHy ^t^f ; XOP. 'Ex IfyS. rev Kur. Cycl. 681. l.'i MARKS, a,. This use of the Gen., to denote the place, where, occurs very rarely in prose, except, in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives 1 >. 1 ) ; as, aw [sc. raaraw], in which place, where, etvrov, there, oftiv, in the tame i^nce, ellci^tv, nowhere, &c. Cf. " 421. /3. /3. In Epic poetry, this Gen. is sometimes employed to denote the place vp^n or over which any thing moves ; as, "E^avra/ -ri^ieia, tliey advance upon thf plain, B. 801. "Exa^ay war, xeti raSi Cyr. i. 6. 44. Asavra/ ^i aou xa,} TOVTO vi. 6. 33. 'Eftot xagtffeti Jv av ffov lir>dZ ( 357. N.) Cyr. V. 5. 35. 25 y r;y' uir<.7 ftu0ov Soph. CEd. C. 1161. 381. /3. With Passive Verbs and Verbals. Hz.wyt %; if**;, smitten by my daughter, Eur. Or. 497. <&uros ri-ret'r^fAt.vt) Soph. Aj. 807. To/y

; aXDvet, Ib. 1519. Keexut ya.o '%u>i ra,7i TUV viuv TIU.OI.~S ayaXXaxra/, the young rejoice in the praises of their elders, and the old delight in the honors paid them by the young, Mem. ii. 1. 33. "H^aj Xa "A^ Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. En. "AiJ ^o< f 1241). 'Ev *A-XM -veei, yolden words, AT. Pint. '268. r H ftnr^o; iftnt it'tx.evt /3/ Eur. Ph. 56. 38G. An adjunct defining a THING either expresses a property of that thing, or points out another thing related^ tc it. An adjunct defining a PROPERTY points out a thing related to that property. Hence the CONSTITUENT GENITIVE is either, 1. the Genitive of Property, or 2. the Genitive of Relation. CH. 1.] OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 281 1. Genitive of Property. 3 8 7. The Genitive of property expresses quality, di- mension, age, &c. Thus, *Hv Iruv us r^ieixavrei, he was about thirty years old [of about thirty years], ii. 6. 2O. HoTetpov evra TO iv^of >rXi6^ou i. 4. 9, a river being [o; ilxofft (ivriv Ivrtivtrs i. 1.2. B(r/XW4iv [= Bo-/Xyj &Jv vj 383. a] a, I rut V. G. 37. T fftt-T^K-rtvovn [= 0-aT^a^-r; W<] -rjjf ^(w^ay iii. 4. 31. (See also 350.) Ft/raw . . T^J 'EXXaSaj (cf. 399) iii. 2. 4. TJjj rXi\ovs iii. 2. 5. A/a r>5j taw TO;* -raXs^/a? ^gJ, through the country of their enemies, iv. 7. 19. RE^IAKK. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for he Dat., with some adjectives implying intimate connection; as, C O 3t Qvtra; vrvri trvyytivs TOU KJooy tJveii, and he who once said that he was related to Cyrus, or a relative of Cyrus, Cvr. V. 1. 24. (DiS* %i>voixof ruv X.OLTU hav A(*j Soph. Ant. 451. Aa^sJa/'^avaf 5t y7 T/J ^wv^vw^as ; Eur. Hel. 495. Ba*^ov wov, MivaS aftotrroXov Soph. Oid. T. 212. Tav S^xjaraz/y ; Ofjt.uvufjt.av PI. Soph. 2 1 8 b. Hi? Iff'ofLOif' r^ Soph. El. 87. 'A*Xa/<> Tyr ravrat XXrX&y ffic. 11. 12. T fl ^tyyas iVvaw 3/Ja^;a Soph. PU. B67. 'O xfSsov>!T)j TO r>5; viuf *< mvruv o.ti $.Uf$iov Taca tlva/ yos "ova trXs^a i. 2. 5* Tuv ya,(> vixtuvrwr ttrrt KO.\ TO. letvruv ffeafyiv, x.a.} ret. reav ri .- * QoGovs liyri, 'at the mercy of the speaker,' Ib 91 7. Mj$' a fj-n ffiaurvs, ' make yours,' Id. Ant. .546. 3 O 1 REMARKS. . The idea of possession is sometimes modified or strengthened by an adjective or adverb ; as, 'It^os e %uo{ rris 'Agrtfii'&of the spot is sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana's], v. 3. 13. 'IS/wv ictv- TOV x.rn(jt.a.tffTn>c *$toi Dem. 26. 1 1. Ta otxiTo* ixctTtgoti trnpitov PI. Theaet 1 93 C. Tev t^uToe, TOVTOV vrort^a, xoivov otii iUvcn fu-vruiv oLvfyuwuv ; PI. CoilV. 205 a. Tjf tifAirigctf Mat/Vj; ivr i %& (>t ov Ib. 189 b. B. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in connec- Uoa with verbs of praise, blame, and wonder ; as, Taw-re i 'Ayruri^eiov, 1 fitmmend this in Ayesiltus [this cliaracteristic of Agesilaus], Ages. 8. 4. *0 ftipttyovrai f&aLXiffra. rjfituv Th. i. 84. "AxXa ri ffou froXXa ei'yec/u.a.i Symp. 8. 12. 'VJa.upa.ffa. et'vrou v^urav pi* reurt PI. Phaedo, 89 a. Tovro . . tv rolt xvfft xetro^ti, o Kttt &%ie* Sctvpeiffati rev Sv/iiov PI. Rep. 376 a. y. ELLIPSIS. The Assessor is sometimes put in the case belonging to the thing possetaed, with an ellipsis of the latter, particularly in comparison ; as, "A^fAara, . . open* \xiiiiu [= ) ifftvret Cyr. V. 1. 4. ' ^IfXifffjtivei . . nit ctlroif KV^M o-rXou Cyr. vii. 1. '_'. "E^a^iy a-^ara \Ko.vun^ rovruv, we have bodies better able than theirs, iii. 1. 23. M$' |r^i; reiff^i [= rot, rcuvb^ x.* rrif eturov J. The verbs a2>, to smell, pot rgwivHiKri xeiilui *iu* Ar. Ran. 338. IIa^t frvtrou CX i Ar. Pax, 1 80. JH. 1.] OBJECTIVE. 283 t. It mil be observed, that the Genitive possessive is the exact converse of the Genitive of property ( 387), the one denoting that which possesses, and the other, that which is possessed. c. GENITIVE OBJECTIVE. 3O3. The object of an action, regarded as such, is put in the Accusative or Dative ( 339). But if the action, instead of being predicated by a verb, is merely represented as a thing or property (or as implied in a thing or property ) , by a noun, adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually regarded simply as something defining that thing or property, and is conse- quently put in the Genitive. Thus, 1 . GENITIVE OF THE DIRECT OBJECT. 'O

a(>%as tJj . 5 (cf. 2vot.!uv Th. i. 101. 'Atra^jj xaxuv vii. 7. 33. C}T. iii. 3. 55. 2. GENITIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT. Ew^%eis, prayers to the gods, PL Pfoedr. 244 e. Ta -rns &tot Svpara, Eur. Iph. T. 329 (cf. Qvnv 3 1035). T TWK *^g/o-o-&;v SonAE/ay Th. i. 8 (cf. TaJ? j|)lt?f Jot/XlUiwy Mem. i. 5. 5). 'E 3O3. REMARKS, a. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with nouns, to denote relations, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted by the Dat. ; as, TJjf -r&ly 'Exxyv tlvota-s, from good-will to the Greeks, lv. 7. 20 (cf. Evvovs St oTnXtt.x.iffiis TOO yvgus PL Rep. 329 b. T txsivuv ft'tX^wtriv rut Is fiftus ^uvuv Th. iii. 12. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. are, in like manner, used both subjectively and objectively. See 503. d. GENITIVE OP LOCAL AND TEMPORAL RELATION. $ 304. The Genitive is extensively employed in defining local and temporal relation, particularly with adverbs of place and time, and with words derived from them. Thus, >y>js, near the land, Soph. (Ed. C. 3S9. 'Av-r/av r)jf H. Gr. ii. 1. 21. Tourov ivKvr'iov vii.' 6. 23. 'Avnvriga.! ruv vZ.ctyiut Cyr. vii. 1. 7. *Av rs/yj;v Symp. 4 37. 'Ei>yyus T/xgetStio-au ii. 4. 14. 'Eyyus ftu^iuv, nearly ten thousand, V. 7. 9. EJVa ruv ogiuv i. 2. 21. "Exrof rou uv iv. 3. 28. Ylora.ft,6Jv ivros ii. ! 11. Taw YlXevruvos '*%%! Ar. Ran. 765. "E^w Tn yw Soph. (Ed. T. 968. KuxA* TO? O-T^- roTibav Cyr. iv. 5. 5. Tc ftitrov ruv nt%uv, the distance between the walls, i. 4. 4. 'Ev piffu r,puv x.a,} /3.ja-<0 . . ruv cixguv Cyr. iii. 2. 8. Tli^ay row ?rTa. ftou ii. 4. 28. n^oo-^ey rK^itav X'.vxav Id. Ph. 324. YL\nyuv Ar. Nub. 1413. X^^arwv . . 5&;8raTaj Th. ii. 65. "A-rxsvov . Soph. El. 36. 'Aveii0ftoi &3t fyvvuv Ib. 232. "A6.X(*.uv, ' for all the good our eyes would do us,' Mem. iv. 3. 3. KXw; was^ftfrXaw xs/Va/, it is well situated in regard to the voyage, Th. i. 36. Taw vfgos 'AfavKious waXs^aw xx^u; uvToTi tioxu f> sraX/f x,a.6'iffTU.(r6a.i Id. iii. 92. TJjy TJ IT) 0^axjf *^a5aw %HfifU*t t%nv Ib. (See also 363. /3.) 'Ypaf otovrcti Sft-rcdav yivtffdttt rou eig%a,i uurouf ruv 'EXXsiv^v H. Gr. vi. 5. 38. S. With VERBS. T?fs \#utX'uts x/v^uvyavra [= sv Ktvbvvu ovret], being in danger of the fine for false accusation, Dem. 835. 14. Taipau . . ov defining Tr/*v implied in vgoriffets and inpiiffots, 383. ), Soph. Ant. 21. ^396. GENERAL REMARK. Great care is requisite in distinguishing the various uses of the Genitive, inasmuch as, 1 .) The Gen. may have different uses in connection with the same word ; as, with , 380), with Kop.^ (^ 357. N., 380), with ft~>, they will follow you, iii. 1. ^6. \\'ip.-xca* ai-nj ayyiXot, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8. *K rty irKtiffiettrnref $/'

f lxi/yt PI. Phsedo, 100 C. (Cf. 394.) FI/TWV t'mu r$ ii. 3. 18 (Cf. 389). 'Eire ? iWTa . . fta, Ttfftra(f>i^ti U. 4. 9. "A*t y(r) i^ipa #*oTif, 'at daybreak,' i. 7. 2. 'O^ew . . Ta?f "Exxr II. (Jr. Hi. 2. 5. 'A.9MfttfH^/^9t9 roif "EXXn^ IV. 8. 8. E< oftiXv7Xf PI. Leg. 844 c. *E;i< *ij AgiffTOf Cyr. vi. 3. 15. T H*i pot yini, it belonged [came] to me by birth, Soph. (Ed. C. 738. Ta ipai v^ff-hwra. Cyr. v. 1. 15 (see 364). lii'rrovros *i^ff6i* uluxrj Cyr. L 4. 17. A*/ ayovrff airy vii. 3. 16. Avny TO xtgaj agigau Ib. 29. REMARKS, a. Traffic is a species of intercourse; hence, Hoo-ev *iv?.ai fai ra %otgi$iet ; How can I trade with you for your pigs ? Ar. Ach. 812 ( 374). 'ilv no- op, a i vot, I will buy of you, Ib. 815. 'Eyu #iu(*,cx.t r7 a-rs/xa^wn ra aT PL Crat. 402 a. Hfffk^tU tis rauro [== ro avro, $ :39] ^7 uv- rtif iii. 1. 3O. *E ru avru *f iVaj rXiyaj t,4to/ ; Ar. Ran. 636. TV* I* -rat; JVt; fift7 ovri, ' on an equity with us,' Hier. 8. 5. '0 fi^os uvurol row a.fffavi7s rets li6[Aovs rols etffrgais PL Tim. 41 d. 'J^jX/*a* i So?f Symp. 8. 1. (ii.) DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. ^ 4O1. The Dative of influence expresses a person or thing which is affected by an action, property, &c., without being directly acted upon. Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand, it may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished from direct action, and the Dat. expressing it is used inter- changeably with the Ace. ; and, on the other hand, it may be so remote, that it can scarcely be appreciated, and the Dat. expressing it might have been omitteci without impairing' the sense. 288 SYNTAX. -- DATIVE. [BOOK III RULE XVIII. The OBJECT OF INFLUENCE is put in the Dative. 4 O2. The Dative is governed, according to this rule by, . Words of ADDRESS, including those of call and command, of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex- hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and threatening, &c. Thus, Ouros Kt^w tJVtv, ri yawxX^a/f nvilfi /u.t} ^niyttv vii. 2. 1 2. A.$y^< Tfly fjt,a.vTila.v ru ^ux.oa.rii iii. 1. 7. Ta/ 'Evt/aX/'o/ iXiXil^oufft i. 8. 1 8. To7t yy t v & p r, v \\\. 2. 2G. 'Ayyi^Xovfi vo7f ffT^etrturetn i. 3. 21* Het^nyyti^t Ar. Nub. 1008. 'AvsTXt* awrw o 'ATXX^v iii. 1. 6. "(V-r-s^ ayrw ftetfriuros wv vi. 1.22. '0 >!) pdirif, the prophet to the Thraciaiis t i. e. Ay a. 6 a. u.^ari^oit Cyr. viii. 5. 22. K^I/TTM tat/rf iii. 1.4. Xi/^at itf-r/y ira vii. 6. 4. A-Vftetivofttvov ro7< ftiigaxioif Ar. Nub. 928. OSruf \ttfi6ovi aXXw'Xflif iv. 2. 26. TWra/f l-rtev^t7rt V. 8.21. 0" i X 1 7 JEsch. Pers. 842. 'A^-rnftt *iptx >- Id. Pr. 501. Ta^ jy i/v Cyr. i. />. 13. "Of ^iXu riftui7v vretrgi Eur. Or. 924. 'Eav yra/ TWT ^;- (iffura.i ii. 1. 10. Ilifl-ra/ avri; Kv^w ii. 4. 16. AiT ifrra|a< rot tvToi lli^ffrt av^,' iii. 4. 35. ELaXXw* ^*iv / lififfii ( 357) Cyr. i. 6. 9. 'Ejtta} (tttv aoxtT ftvgiaif inS^u-rets >l)tinff'i vi. 4. 3. 'E^XotrT ati rjj vfttrigx tv^ctiftov'tx ii. 5. 13. 'Ey r/y/ i ^ cr a J ci //t j V. 7. 10. "E^To^af y a"a< Zswj vii. 8. 4. TJ >.// l*-i a v /; f al ayre; txtivaig Cyr. i. 6. 85. 5. Words of GIVING, including those of offering, paying distributing, supplying, &c. Thus, A/$68. Bar/Xe7 la-ffpet iv. 5. :H. OWTE ix$r>flf ?T/ V^ v p i t7vett, ' unworthy of the Mug,' or ' disgraceful to the king,' ii. 3. 25. 'T^y t"i* i. 4. 15. 4O5. f. Words of OPPOSITION, including those of con- tention, dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, &c. Thus, At/to* vfjuv a y Tirana/, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5. 19. 'E^/^ayra ol /ey yag MuoK0uv! TI uovei ffgaxiv^uitvffcti 7- Xejff-. Ar. Ach. 24. 'Hj ivtou*.ivai O.UTU i. 1. 3. 'E vfo^a, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. 'E^aaJ ci SsXsri riiSiffdix.t, you are not willing to obey me, i. 3. 6. *Ey ftai fxi/y ii. 6. 19. "E0vt ffrga.rn'yeT; , were angry with the generals, i. 4. 12. 'E^r/Wsvav for they trusted him, i. 2. 2. Eyva/'x&J? 'i^oi'v avrcy i. 1.5. Kaxovawf ra~f "EXX*ja-< ii. 5. t-7. Tayra;? %tr0V) Kw^a; i. f). 26. Msvi 0,^6 o fttvov vi. 1. 29. '^l^y'i^ovrt tuf reu KXtaj^w i. 5. 11. XaATaf (p'tgu LitffH ftou ruv ^sy uroXXo/V . . n^tfx9 U. 4. 2. 'H$y evpftotSoiiri re ire/u.et y iv. 5. 27. '~fft.7v Mvirols Xwwwjauf yrf ii. 5, 13. o f i Curare* re7{ *oXtpiois Hi. 4. 5. x. VERBAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS, having a passive signification. The property expressed by these verbals nas relation to an agent ; which, as if affected by the property, is put in the Dat. Adjectives of this kind usually end in -i6<; or -rt'oc ( 314). Thus, vreifi, wonderful to all [to be wondered at by all], iv. 2. 15. 'H(t7v . . oifAi vravree. Towriet, I think that every thing should be done by us, iii. 1. 35. Toy ftii o*Kttbi QovXo/Aivov cc%ii ya,(> vuv ri/u.~v ovbiv ii. 2. 11. 'llj va^aj ex,lro7s tl; ft&xnv [sc* tffvf] i. 2. 1,5. 'Avayxj ^jj /*/ [sc. sW/], / am now compelled, i. 3. 5. T Hv aira.vx.u $/, ' awaits me [is wait- ing for me],' Id. Ag. 1 1'49. Na^/^a* 0.^0. v^T* IO-TIV iv. 6. 15. Flaov xa/va iTv< xa/ dvcfyxotTov divS (>&<* ots ui. 1. 43. Aaiway ^a* uVs?* iii. 2. 29. 'Aya- ^aw . . *r/aj T>J ffToeiTiS vi. i. 20. 'H . . ira,T^cuot. Ifjuv otxiot PI. Charm. 157 e Sflj wv trvy^ctviv O.VTU \. 1. 10. 'T^aj t^a) slva/ xa) yra^r^oc, XKI QiXovs i. 3. 6. 'Iftciriet TV yuvetixi vii. 3. 27. TeiriH . . irXat;; vi. 4. 2. AJ ^i t*reti iv. 5. 25. 'H ^j [sc. e$a? r$. Thus, *H 0gx u,urv) iirriv . . i-rt ^i^ioc, its rov TLovrov tifrkiovn [sc. nv'i or ro'i], this Thrace is upon the right to one tailing into the Pontus, or as you sau into the Pontus, vi. 4. 1 (cf. Th. i. 24). T Hv $' vp^ fan livrt^n -r \ioyri uoi, and it was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing]. Soph. Ph- 354. Quopivu a / . . a tj'X/aj cifjue,ueu8n, while he was sacrificing the sun was eclipsed, Hdt. ix. 10 (this mode of defining time by a Dat. with a participle is especially Ion.). Kasi i^ebiv a.-rropiv V ffupa, ovx &ya.v io- ftoy %v, 'to the external touch,' Th. ii. 49. E7 yiwauos, u; llovri [sc. > *>s yigovn, vr^ovtrroiXfis o$ov, 'for an old man [as journeys are to an old man],' Id. CEd. C. 20. TS Si fta.\nrra. -reiyray pi- ftvnffo poi, ftribiirori dyctftiytiv, but this most of all remember [for me], I pray you, never to defer, Cyr. i. 6. 1O. *Ej ri pat &Xi^u Ib. 17. NOTE. The use of the Dat. to express remote relation is particularly fre- quent in the pronouns of the first and second person. In the Greek, as in our own and in other languages, the Dat. of these pronouns is often inserted, simply to render the discourse more emphatic or subjective. Observe the examples just above. 411. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take a Dat. in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence ; as, * $' ut/raTe o Kvftd^ns, and the bailiff led the way for them, i. e. guided them, iv. 6. 2. CM yet frxi-rtvrit ro?s rvtf>Xo7f ^yovpida. Ar. Plut. 15. 'HjaJV rant l%nyovfttiot Soph. (Ed. C. 1589. 'Ayeirrn fietfii(>otri fioig- (*(,,{ Qoas Eur. Iph. T. 31. T il Q^MI, li/Wa/j Id. Ph. 17. ya.^ oux. a^gi* Si07; ^sch. Prom. 940. M^j Si eoi xcii vroXiftot/; Cyr. vii. 2. 26. T H /3i?ni f,fn7y i <* Soph. Cfetl. C. 81. *.}( ruy^l pot nuTtifietf Eur. HeracL 452. Ta * itftTr . . i Ix, rSjf ;* aVJjX^ov Th. I. 89. Ovxirt rot Tixva *.iv fyftwuv, to pun' ish with death. Cyr. vi. 3. 27. 2^s^/a/f S;aa/vavr? i. 5. 10. "I?nri ry /! Ib. 12. Aitiois /A/ ^tv x} tvvo'iu, l-rof^ivavt 11. 6. 13. O7 oe ftvi wetgtTiv, Tovravg v\y{tro % axgetTliez vivi *J ti^ixia. f apiXiiq. iviivKt Cyr. viii. 1. 16. YlgovitTv pi* yi 'l%u ruvret ^oju.ai $1 roa "vr-rea, rov $' Ivuvriot avetr^i-^u T-/J p.* 1uca.lcu xrjp.a.r ov%i ru^i-Tou Soph. ffid. C. 10'26. The Dat. of the missile with verbs of throwing will be specially observed. ^417. REMARK. DATIVE OF THE AGENT. The Dat. sometimes expresses that through whose agency any thing takes place ; as, all things have been done by us, i. e. our work is done, i. 8. 12. E/ t TI xaAflv . . l-riu\a.' il^ya.yra.1 xaxu. Ear. Hec. 1085. T/v< ya.(> for a . . rgo(>yy ixiXiucri i. 5. 8. '\'J).KVVUV ava nodrof / 5 ^ o v v s . I . T*4 X7f raTj xnpaXaTy iv TM iroXifttv J./.. TJ[ '$ Ib. 30. Taj /3/a r^a|/,- PI. Pol. 28O d. I;IMAI:K. Tlie pronoun auras is sometimes joined to the Dat. of an asso- object to give emphasis ; as, My) fipeis uvru7( ra7s rgwoift xa.ra$u'.&>/tivous IKVTM, ' asso- ciating with,' Mem. iv. 8. 11. T H< Kv^os voXtfita. i^tjTo, which was hostile to Cyrus, ii. 5. 11. 2s t but the next day there came a messenger, i. 2. 21. "H/era ya^ TWT>! T y pi git pct^t.7a-Sa,t )3- ffvXsa i, 7- 14. T>j iurngetiet ovx. 'Kfetvyitrctv ol h.t[x,iai, ovSi 7% ivi av>j^;^>j ecr" "Av^ov Ib. i. 4. 21. Teu $' ivtovn tnt, ea v 'OXvpyna.f, n TO ffretbiov Ivixa, K.OOKIVX; Ib. ii. 3. 1. Ta/ S* O,VOVM, and at the same time, tb. i. 2. 1 8. 1 Ss 'AynrtXMf ^fo r0Ti (rtrEc, ' at length,' Ib. iv. 1. 34. '11; ^ixayx'oou ^^avv xat ruv tv SaXa^; va.Vfjt.a.x.nira.vituv Ib. 241 b. Ty vra.Xa.ia.1 evy s i%0govs PI. Rep. 33.4 *b (cf. 4O3). n^ai-^ova-iv at i-r-riTf vpas iii. 2. 19 (cf. 350). *Av^ KKTria^i \oy6v PI. Euthyd. 283 b (cf. 350. R.). Ayyas^a* ovri fft ulfffifffui ii. 5. 4 (cf. $ 375. 0). MtraSaTty etvro?s -rugoui iv. 5. 5 (cf. Tb. 6, and 367). Asyj/y r txfaivtv etv-rou; vii. 5. D (cf. 402). \j> 425 3. ATTRACTION. A word which is properly construed other- wise sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction ( 329. N.), especially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypalluge, or an interchange of construction (wrXXay7, exchange). Thus, E< 2s /u.' uV .ii Xoy<; 'i'Jf^tf [:= pot Noyaus or Xay/wy], if you had always begun your addresses to me thus, Soph. El. 556. Ata-rarav y'oon . . xetrdgtu, I will begin lamentations for my master, Eur. Andr. 1199. Cf. 427. 9, 431, 433. l. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, often takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in the Ace., by attraction ; as, "H<$/ airay, an ft'tffo* t%oi, he knew [him] that he occu- pied the centre, i. 8. 21. Triy y wTi^CaXjy vui o^'icav iSsoVxso-ay, ft* <*(>a- *TaX(>ueuy pivot iv. 5. 29. Tl; ooa. rot , isro'm iv. 7. 11. 29S SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK II 5. PERIPHRASIS. The place of a verb is often supplied by an Ace. of iht kindred noun joined with such verbs as voitu (or more frequently -raiio/u.xi\ &yu, f%u, ri^n/u.i t &C. ; thus, Kvgo; i^'ircttfiv X.KI oL^dpov ruv 'ExXjjvo/v ivoiyiriv [= U-jjraa-e xai vi6pr)]* vii p.vi ^I^^KK'IWH rciSi ; Soph. Aut. 441. /3.) In ENTREATY ', ES, M, -r^'of ert ^eis may be explained the use of the Ace. with the particles {, /, and pa. (of which the two first are affirmative, and the last, unless pre- coded by y/, commonly negative), according to the following RULE. ADVERBS OF SWKARING are followed by the Accusative ; as, N A/', Yes, by Jupiter I i. 7. 9. N*i TA> 2/ vi. 6. 34. 'AxXa, ^i rt? Siovt, oix. "lyuyi otvrovs ^iu^u, but, by the gods, I will not pursue them, i. 4. 8. N< (Ao, A/', Yes, indeed I v. 8. 6. 427'. 8. The ^cc. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omit- ted; as, f O(Tri V0f foa QovKoiTo lntri\'i 7v& 0.^0.1 Id. Tr. 849. T^ etvrov; i-riu^x^xdiriv, for these have been guilty of perjury against them, iii. 1 . 22. 'Hftci; . . tu j ii. 2. 1 3. Ma^asj 3-appt7pa;, guarding against MS, ii. 5. 3. *Arfl$Sg K'OTIS varigetf, having run away from their fathers, vi. 4. 8. 'O xaXa/aj /' J'^jra/, the jackdaw has departed from me, i. e. Acts /e/V me, AT. Av. 86. *H/- r%ui$)ifAiv xetl Stovs xaci uvfyairovs vgo^ouvcti UUTOV, we were ashamed before both gods and men to desert him, ii. 3. 22. Atffi, for the gods do not rejoice in the death of the pious, Id. Hipp. 1 340. A7 XO^IVOUITI, rov rafttctv "Iux%ov, 'dance in honor of/ Soph. Ant. 1153. nr . . "Agrtpiv Eur. Iph. A. 1480. 429. II. To this head may be referred the use of the Ace. with VERBS OF MOTION, to denote the place or person to which ( 339, 422) ; as, T'O-JTOV vX, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6. *Av ov Id. El. 893. t'T^.iuff 'luXxius Eur. Med. 7. 'Alpixira %6'ova. Ib. 12. vau7j TiXoy (jt-oXovra.; Ib. 92O. Xo/a T/J o ffa.Xuv ^6'ava. yiftj 5* at^avov 7xs A. 317. via; y. 162. NOTES, a. This use of the Ace. is chiefly poetic, and especially Epic, Instead of the common construction with a preposition. /3. The poets sometimes even join an Ace. of the place with verbs of stand ing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation) ; thus, 2r$j^' etl p\v vpu* ravS* &pa%VV rgiGov, al V \v8$' aXXav aT^ov Eur. Or. 1251. Qtiffffovr ax^av Ib. 871. Tfiro^et xa-f'^uv fta,s xett rout . . xiv^vvav; iii. 2. 1 1 (5 424. 2). Bat/Xf/ ft yiuirta fgurov a.x.ou.rov ptitfu 5 Eur. Cvcl. 149. Touf -r7^tts . . yit/ a^ara; PL Rep. 537 a ( 375. a). TIXXa XKI r^'ta, xai xa.vrola.xu. ii, denying that this use of %-/i is Attic;. 2t %/>?> . . a<5a:Ji y. 14. 300 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK in 2. Accusative of the Effect. 431. The EFFECT of a verb includes whatever the agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Ace. expressing or defining its action. The Ace. thus employed is either, . a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the verb, or /?. a neuter adjective used substantively, or /. a noun simply dejining or characterizing the action. a. KINDRED NOUN. 01 Jt Qgoixis i-rtt iurv%Dtra,v rovro o; v TV ixtivuv ra^ia,*, p,nrt &/*<*- 6ns rnv a^a^/av, being neither wise with their wisdom, nor foolish with their fol- ly, PI. Apol. 22 e. Kctxous 'Jfa.ira.t xax'iav PL Rep. 490 d. AavXoj -raj ^i- B-utri'ietf xa.} ^ouXiias Ib. 579 d. 2. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Ace. of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for an adverb. Thus, *ilf uxiv^uvev (iiov &'/u.'v = 'flj uxiv^uvwf %&>p,iv. This ad- jective not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun ; as, To ll^a-ixot t%itro [sc. o%v/tet] vi. 1. 10. Hence appears to have arisen the construc- tion in $ 43 2. 433. /3. NEUTER ADJECTIVE. 1o i aura, pit vTfroinxt, reiuvra, 2 Xt'yu, [he has done such things, and says such tWngs] such has been his conduct, and such is his language, i. 6. 9. \iytis olx a.-^a.^nrra. ii. 1. 13. Tuvret ^et^tffotvrui Ib. 1O. Ta Avxaiet lion i. 2. 10. Mj$i <4,ittii^jv Id. (Ed. T. 1005. 'AXX' *l r a. rnZra. *) vy r?* PI. Prot. 310 6. Ni*a'a /3Xira/v, looking terror, .-Esch. Sept. 498. 'H /3awXj . . KXi^i tit TV, the senate looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 629. "A^jj Siliogxorav ^Esch. Sept. 53. 'AX Ar. Av. 1121. "Aitiuv TOV 2jv ^ xou fay [&** xui yrttyx^etTiov trtgot iv. 8. 27. IloXXai Isocr. 71 6. Xa^aJJyra -reiitri A/ovw ; Id. Ion, 259. Qlftt- ff7, Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts, Cyr. vii. 5. 13. NOTE. The infinitive ttvai is often used with these verbs ; as, Na^/^o; y* w^a; IfAil iUvxt x.cti fctro'i^a. x.etl QiXevf i. 3. 6. ^oQitrTr,* Sfl TOI ovoftoi^ovri . . rev cia Jva, PL Prot. 311 6. 5} 435. II.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT, not in apposition ; as with verbs of doing, saying, &c. Thus, E7 rig n ay 0.601 n X.O.KOV vrairiftiii KUTOV, if any one had done him any good or evil, i. 9. 11. Ta p'tyta-ret X.O.KOC, igyet^e pit 01 rots iff' aUTev Id. Bac. 616. "0, r to-yetret Xiycatriv, 'say the worst things to each other,' Mem. ii. 2. 9. IlaXXa To; WflXXavj /cts Sj lgi/Vs Soph. El. 5 2O. Ta ^TE^V' i'sr*} xo- X" Ixilvovs Id. Aj. 1107. "Etrjj xXvoJV, a vuv 0"i> T^VO v/jttA^Sif ?r0X K u ff K v ravov yei/aav Eur. Tro. 357. Krworwa-i xgtira, f&iXiov -rXasyax Id. Or. 1467. 'AXX* ayvov o^xav ffov xaga, xctrea- ftoffet Id. Hel. 835. 'Ava^o-a/ (ZofaeftKi iwayysX/a jf o T>JV i Maga^am f&a%n rovs fiapScieous vixv rXars, to asA vessels of Cyrus, or to asA Cyrus for vessel* i. 3. 14. M;Ta/ jtj x^v-^ys rovro, do not hide this from me, JEsch. Pr. 625. 'l\(Aa,s 2i etfofrtgiT rov ftitr^ov, but us he robs of our pay, vii. 6 9. 2} ^i^atrxitv rjy ffrgarwy/cc.*, to teach you the military art, Mem. iii. I. 5. ttgof ri fit ravree, igurqis; Mem. iii. 7. '2. 'A.vri(>i6' wfta,; -rov; T' iv "Ix/w ro- vovg, . uvngura. a..tvs TO. VX a-ra/r* ii. 5. 38. 'Ea !II 'A^a/a^ cv ya^av /3. 20-1. See also ^ 430. (n.) ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. . RULE XXII. An adjunct applying a word or expression to a PARTICULAR PART, PROP- ERTY, THING, or PERSON, is put in the Accusative; ^i Ji^ivav, [bound as to the hands] with h!s fiof ^vo -rXifyuv, a river, Cydnus by name, two plethra in breadth, i. 2. 23. Ilavra xottriffraf, best in every thing, i. 9. 2 (cf. 359. jS). 'A-roT^ivn; -rat xt\eif, beheaded, ii 6. 1, 29. T ur* iii. 1.31. Qa.upai.irut.tro **XXf *< TO piyitios ii. 3. 15. CH. l.J OF SPECIFICATION. OF EXTENT. 303 us 3io; ( > 334. 9) ; as, IT 070 y ft 'ivro; tyvyiv tgxos 00y- ruv, What language has escaped [you, the hedge of the teeth] the hedge of your teeth! a. 64. Tovyt . . Xz,ovvreus $i%r,>.uZ.ti{,ov, (tv yivYiru.! T iraXtJS Th. ii. 6'2. Tovs u,y^ovofjt,ou? rovrovs . vs/S xvvo,; rov; %a.Xfx-ov; ra,; ftlv fifAt^et; $i$iaiZtri rourov 31, v av a,q>r, yiyovoris, ' thirty years old,' ii. 3. 1 2. Tjy S-wyra rou XU^KO^OU ivdrvtv r : i/Aoa.v 'yi'yxf/.^ftiy^v iv. .5. 24. Tg'irtiv r,fj,iooe,v KUTOV %XOVTOS Th. viii. 23. \ix.a.rov &I%fi4ut 'iros Eur. Rhes. 44-1. n O{ rifawxi ravra. rpja. irti, ' these three years,' Lys. 109. 12. ft, SPACE. 'El-sXayvs* S/a ^avyiets ffret0/u.ov Vva, yraooe.irci'y'ycts oxru, he ad" ranees through I'hrygia one day's-march, eight parasangs* i. 2. 6". 'Af's^ouir* vou id>ra.fjt.ov ffroiSiou; vrivrixetioixec. ii. 4. 1 3. Mf/a; \(Ai yi xa.ro. yri$ o^yviuf ytvia-ffon vii. 1. 30. Ta /SsXa; etvruv xcti J/crXafftxuv 37S) ; the DATIVE, at which ( 4'JO) ; and the ACCUSATIVE, through which. To a certain extent, however, the offices of the several cases blend with each other. 304 SYNTAX. VOCATIVE. [BOOK III (iv.) ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE. 4 4 O. RULE XXIV. The Accusative is often used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, manner, or- der, &,c. ; as, Tav T a *a, m this way, or thus, i. 1. 9. Tav nlrlt iv /KJ ir\ovr7i), xa< ifi^i woXifAOU trv/u.*ovXiuitv TJJV ys if a urn* ' for the present,' Mem. iii. 6. 10. See 3'JO. 3. 4 4 1 . REMARKS. . This rule applies especially to the Ace. neut. cf adjectives, both sing, and plur. ; as, Ta a^aTav, formerly, i. 1.6. T pi* . ., T 5s, partly . ., partly, iv. I. 1 4, v. 6. 24. M / * ^ a y i&Qvyt re ft* xr9nrgu0>ivui i. :5. 2. Tw^, perhaps, vi. 1. 20. To Xaci PI. Gorg. 524 b. Taa-at/rav ya^ wXjj^n ?T^/?V /Say/Xsw; i. 8. 13. &tifc.oitbia'jg/ f X vi vt s , a large park full of wild beasts, i. 2. 7. Tea -ruT^i u-ptyori^u, both the children, i. 1. 1. At '\UVIKK} voXsif . . Ii$op4vai Ib. 6. TovSi rov T^oVov Ib. 9. "E^av oVX/Tj %iXious KUI riXTao-Taj &^KKKS OKraxotri ous i. 2. 9. saw? -ravraf x) jv vrtg) vrXtlrrou fotrt- viov, XX TO tv ^v PI. CritO, 48 b. 'T^/j, S> av^if 'A0*vct7ai TO %' 'TMEI2 OT il-ru, TV raX/y X'fyu, You, men of Athens ; and when I say you, I mean the state, Dem. C 255. 4. To MH */ TO OT r^ortSipi va, the NOT find the NO prefixed, PL Soph. 257 b. "X^rOeu . . T *a^' a WTO, to use the phrase xatf' WTO Ib. 252 c. NOTE. Grammarians often speak of a word, with an ellipsis of the part of speech to which it belongs ; as, "Ef,ffifjt.(i ivriv Mem. 111. 2. 7. (/?.) In zeugma, the adjective sometimes agrees with the most prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest ; as, f E;rTa oaXewf xa.} fiftioo\iov 'Arnxovs, seven Attic oboli and a half, i. 5. 6 ^\.u6ft,iyos . . Toy Sr^a/A&^/^jjy xotl raj yawj asrsXjjXw^era Th. viii. 63. Yieti* Jj vi yuvaTxa.s /u,eavovos, time ; as, 2w vTa|/ $1 'txa.- froi TOV; ia.tiT9v []sc. av^a&f], and that each one should arrange, his own fmen], i. 'J. 15. TDv irct^u. (2>ix.(ri}.ius i. 1.5. Tois Qiuyovra.;, the exiles, Ib. 7. Toug xecxaiio'yovs xi uStxous [sc. av^^^roi/f J i. 9. I 3. 'ETatVas s/Aitvav *i/u.ipa; '. *Ev TOWTW xa) -&txa, land, o$6;, way, rip, t hand, yvupv, opinion, ftaTga., portion, u^a,, season ; as, 'H K/Xr. 32). E/j rr J^.X>j. /xa, Xenophotis Affairs of Greece, or Greek History. 'E%ixuf/.otivi rt [sc. p.i0f~\ rni ipetXctyyas i. 8. 18. Ta ^$/a raw *^a"To; Ib. -1. Taw . . fyvixtv Jsc. ?rXj^wj or o-T^aTiw^aTa,-], a.; i. 8. 4). 'Ev TU iftctXS [sc. X. U VV\ * v - ^* ^* *Acr raw w-v/>Xaw i/f re r^ayij JaXXay iii. 4. '25.' See also 379. a. NOTES, (a.) In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said io be used sulmtantiveli/. The substantive use becomes cs| ..... i.-illy firominent in uch expressions as, IV; ^tv lutr't^is oW^svfe-/, 'your foi-s,' H. (ir. v. 2. S3; *O T' ixt'ivov TIXUV, 'his father,' Kur. El. X".r>. (b.) The substantive omitted U sometimes contained or implied in another word ; as, 'A^t/y3aX;vay i* r H. 2.] SE OF NEUTER. 307 vfixguv [sc. a^uySaXwy] IV. 4. 13. Fia^ym TOV p\v jv oiJ; Tij; vixq; Id. vii. 7'5. To y ip.ov Tosiiufjt.o'ii Eur. Med. 1 78. T ^izXXao-o-ayT/ T>?J ytupvi;, the [differing] difference of opinion, Th. iii. 1 (Thuc. is especially fond of this use of the Partic.). Ta ftlv o^/oj U.VTOU . ., TO 5i 3-a.oa-ovv, his [being afraid] fear . ., but his confidence, Id. i. 36. 'Ev ru p.* fttXiTuvri Ib. 142. /S.) Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with prepositions to form many adverbial phr-.ises ; as, *A?ro TOW etiirnftarou, of their own accord, i. 2. 1 7. *Ey yi Tea QoLtioca, openly, i. 3. 21. A/a Ta^ft>, rapid- ly, \. 5. 9. 'E Iota- TMTOV 5' l^fAiK, and solitude is the most terrible thing of all, ii. 5. 9 (cf. Svft- SovXfl i^ov x&ua, PI. Theag. 122 b). Ti evv rauTa, la-T/'v ; ii. 1. 22. Tow* & waTa/ttat/f awa^av voft'^iri iJvsti iii. 2. 22. MvxJJyas/ ftutgov y, Mycence was a small affair, Th. i. 1O. Et/'oa;a yaj ecvraT; . . ravTa v, ^/br Eubcea was every thing to them, Ib. viii. 95. 'Ao-^y>i -rXava-iot iliriv elVtv Ib. 556 d. "ExTaoa TO f*n'<)lv ttvcti Eur. Rhes. 818. Il^aj Ty o&iv [sc. o'yTa] Ib. Ph. 598. Ty ftrdlv ti; TO ftrf&iv Soph. EL 1166. Tai/Ta ^t aSJyaTav l^vj, 'an impossibility,' PI. Parm. 160 a. 308 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVEr [BOOK III Avget xaXri ev xaXev ; Id. Hipp. Maj. 288 C. "E^a/yi (pikretrov vroXis Eur Med. 529. OJfteti ya.(> upas rw- T)jf iruv x\'iot rt rirroi^oixovrK H. Gr. iii. 1. 14. "AXw*, ou fti~av $ve7v o~ret- S/a/v, the Halys, not less than two stadia in breadth, v. 6. 9. ^ai'vi^i 3-ip.tXiu- fag el fttTov % *\ttfUHUt Cyr. vii. 5. 11. 'A.foxrilvovtfi ruv av^aJy ou p-iloi nvraxoriavs vi. 4. 24. Qgovgous <*.(> tturZ oux tXetrrov Ttr^axur^iXicav H. Gr. iv. 2. 5 (cf. S^jy^ov^Ta/ . . olx ixdrrovs s ii. 1. 16). Aiffuv . . oVa fLvoc.tx.iuv Eq. 4. 4. A'dav; . . o Mag. Eq. 1.16 (cf. '0^otrgo%ovs a/Jtec^iKtou; xa.} fti'i^ous xa.} iXurrout IV. 2. 3). "Or* ovblv av rou ftn'Siv uvriffrrif vvri(> Soph. Aj. 1231. Ttgovros . . TO ftrjSlv evros Eur. Heracl. 166. K^t/Va-w ruv ro ftn^iv Id. Tro. 412. Aaxayvrw* iiveti ri, appear- ing to be something, i. e. of some consequence, PI. Gorg. 472 a. (If ftvbiv and ri did not here remain without change, they would be confounded with the masc., and the expressions would lose their peculiar force.) NOTES, (a) So, with the^)lur. form instead of the sing., Tlee^a^vst ripi. (us vrXiiv Ts/V PI. Menex. 335 b. (6) In some of these cases, the neut. adjective appears to be used like an adverb. See 529. /S. 4 5 1 i.) A neuter adjective used substantively, or as an attribute of an infinitive or clause of a sentence, is often plur. instead of sing. ( 336) ; as, E/ rovre ro o$u%.oftivov auroSotft'iri, j 11 ruvra, rt oQttXoivro, if this which it due should be paid, or if both this should be due, vii. 7. 34. Oi ravra Aiv Jf^a^< . . i/ yaj return kiyaifti Ages. ^. 7. "Oratv pit ri at.ya.6ot t%vri) retga.xkovffi pi l-rt retvra Synip. 1. 50. 2t /wtx roffetura, %gh wou7v, X.\O.'HH iXtivZf Ar. Thesm. 1O62. *A^' olx, '^^i rd$i ; Soph. (FA. 0. 883. 'A; la/xi, rr,v&i xu.rfa.tilv Soph. Ant. 576. ()u; ov vret^et^oria ro7f 'Aftjvctiois ifriv Th. i. 86. NOTE. This use of the Plur. for the Sing, appears to have arisen from the want of a noun, or definite object of sense, to give strict unity to the con- ception. It is very frequent in demonstrative pronouns, and in verbals in -rot and -Tif. 4 53. 6. An adjective often takes a substantive in the Genitive partitive, instead of agreeing with it. In this con- struction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the substantive, or in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.}. Thus, ret. o-teovoa.~iok ruv KgefyfAairu* [for fgei'yftecrci], yt*)Ji rout lu tfl^ovouvrett [for avSe^u-rouf}, neither virtuous actions [the virtuous of actions], nor wise men [the wise of men] Isocr. 24 d. AafAvrfortiros ri [for SYNESIS. til 30D rns $, AY;/* c/ieeA [softnesses of cheek], Eur. Ph. 1486. . oni Soph. Ant. 1209. NOTE. In this way, greater prominence and distinctness of expression, and sometimes a species of independence or abstractness ( 449. a), are given to the adjective. Upon the whole subject, see 358 - 362. 453. 7. SYNESIS. The adjective often agrees in gen- der and number with the idea of the speaker, instead of the" subject expressed ; particularly with, . COLLECTIVE NOUNS, and words used collectively ; as, 'H & fiovXv . ., lit* uyvoovvrss, and the senate, not ignorant, H. Gr. ii. 3. .55. K.get.u'yv) y rou 'EXX:y/xai ffrou.rivfjt,ee.r9s [= ffr^a.Ticaru't] HietxtXiuapivuv iii. 4. 45. Tv rX/ [flraXrraj] . . aWi Th. Hi. 79. Asa-a? . . KTiffrw a, Id. vi. .53. Ow3" opvis i'Jfr,fjt,ovs KVopfoitSii /Soaj, uv^^o fttS^urtf a.\'u.a.ro; A/iraf Soph. Ant. 1021. /3. Words in the plural used for the singular (chiefly ^s/s for lyw) ; as, 'Ixsrsysjttsv . . T^flff-T/Tvwv, we [= /] beseech you, falling down, Eur. Here. 1206. "HPuov (jt,a.oTVop.iff$a. Sguir a. S^av ow /SayXa^tta/ Ib. 858. uux.t>[*,ia8at . . x,.TYi6t7gt;y . . Jtfttf Eur, Tro. 531. i. Words governing a r Genitive, to which, as the more important word, the adjective conforms in gender and number ; as, /Xra*ft, the gift of you alone, Soph. Tr. 775. Ta/"> rifttr igon [= vftav] a,v>7-vv (p/Xa/f, our own friends ( 505. 3), vii. 1. 29. T jya . . l/etey ray UUTYIS ^sch. Ag. 132-J. Tay i^ay ^b airot; raw rXa') 6. Yloivra, a, $h us i$ia; aura; otltret; [for etlrat oTj t"ToXa J ttoavfl ( av PL Parm. 153 a. "Hx/a; . . TavTa>y XtzftfooTeiTo;, the sun, the most splendid [sc. thing] of all things, Mem. iv. 7. 8 (this is the common construction when the superlative is followed by a Gen. partitive of different gender from the subject of the sentence). NOTE. An adjective is sometimes, in the poets, attracted by a Voc. ; as, "Ox&s xwji yivoio [for faGios, **>&, js Tot-tus, and through the midst of the city, i. 2. 23. Te XXa jai//*iy wra oi%vi~v Id. El. 313. MiraxJ^/af aretf, amid the waves of woe, Eur. Ale. 91 ( 383. a). HoXXa 5' '^ rat/Ta [=i rxvrri or TjfJi, 421. /3] rrg^ara, anrf 7 see here many sheep, iii. 5. 9. 'H^fljMTiv cVflw iTflf i'j. Our of, l$ri, ovriefav vrgofi%irett, 'here he comes,' PL Rep. 327 b. 'Hf av^ o'Ji, OS the man is here, Soph. CEd. C. 32. Ila- ftvovrai ya. t'ftt $v ntts Ib. 111. 'AXX* 3' oiratiuv i* $o/u,ut m Eur. Ale. 137. "OS* ifc' 'O^iirrtif Id, Or. 380. T I^j li? . ' sits there,' xp>7av [^ &/< lutyriftav iUvxi] . . xoiftriffov ffroftx, hush your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent 1 , ^Esch. Ag. 1 247. T*/v trut u^igxruv o/uftxreav mruptvos, [deprived of your sightless eyes] rendered sightless by the loss of your eyes, Soph. CEd. C. 1200. 2w xai ^ixet'tuv /- xau; Qozvxs -rx^xtr-rSi Id. Ant. 791. Me/^av' ixrsvu Xoyav Id. Tr. 679. ol't) . . aVX/Vaj Eur. Ale. 35. 1. VARIOUS RELATIONS AND CIRCUMSTANCES; as, "Axx/ 2t s ov$l a X X a ay^sv ^s. S^a i. 5. 5. SwX/va/ rW/^vas/, mar/e o/ wood, v. 2. 5. *A$g^Sg** [= av^o; uv~\ ffvv xruftu ^Esch. Cho. 2.'{. Ila/*^ sjra^ [= rvr*>v /AJJTS^] TS y? Id. Pr. 90> Tat/^ * tt p ft vi r u (> [= -rcivra; or xa:Ta -ravra f*.r t 7Vg\ vixgou Soph. Ant. 1282. "EXsva; arTa>vThe Infinitive and Participle. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK IIL NOTE. The use of other cases with the Genitive partitive (as in 364 366) may be referred to simple ellipsis. II. USE OF THE DEGREES. [The following observations apply both to ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS.] $ 4 GO. I. Words are compared not only by inflection ( 155- 163), but also by the use of adverbs denoting more and most ; as, MaXXav 0/Xov, more agreeable, Soph. Ph. 886. Tr,us ftdXurret, QiXavs, the most friendly, vii. 8. 1 1. r il % iv. 6. 11 (cf. Ib. 12). MA//XiJurioi PI. Gorg. 487 d. *Er(>'ori9v i-ret.vfa.vTo, 'iuf . . x.u.riffrntH Soph. Ant. 1090. OS rcc,ri, Huf $tug etvtjXhs,.a p. to. guv ftiagur art ; T/ re! for ttrr ovop,' ; olx. l^ii; ; TP. M/a7; ftt'y!- rois] *-uroi, first [among the first] of all, Th. i. 6. 'Ev -r^uryi Id. Hi. 81. 'Ev ro7s ), IXa/^Sctvi, he received the most presents, [at least being one man] for a single individual, i. e. more than any one man beside, i. 9. 22. IlA.s/V% %xurr [= ^aX/o-ra], not the least, especially, Mem. i. 2. 23. 'Av^syv ou TUV ubuva.- v Th. i. 5. ^iLiiffTov "$t xt ou Jixtyrec, Id. vii. 44. IV. Certain special forms of comparison deserve notice ; e. g. 1.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, &c. ; OS, Mj^sv lx fov Xoyav, beyond description, Th. ii. 50. 2.) The Comp. followed by % Ka.ro., or sometimes *go; as, Me/*, $ jta.ro. ^uxoua. [sc. Irriv], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great fot tears, Th. vii. 75. B=Xr/ov9j w xur Hvfyuffov Mem. iv. 4. 24. Ms<'2> . . H xatr \fjCi x.at} a\ IZiuo'Jv, too great for me and you to discover, PI. Crat. 392 b. 'Ev^-sirr^w? . . >J TOO; rriv iZtvffiu.v Th. iv. 39. Cf. Prcelium atrocius, quant pro numei-o pugnuntium Liv. 21. 29. 314 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. f BOOK III. \ L 3.) The Comp. followed by S>{/ 1via.a6a.i xa.x.cv Mem. iii. 5. 1 7. We likewise find the Infin. without ua-rt or us, and also the Pos. for the Comp. ; as, Ta ya,o yeV^a f*&7%ov % ip^s/v, for the malady is too great to bear, Soph. (Ed. T. 1 293. T5rs;yj vpuv ft ^va/ lyxctg* r?y, your mind is too weak to persevere, Th. ii. 61. ~Yv%gov, iQw, ajyo} vXtiovts % /SiA-nW;, general* more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078. 'lij Xoyoy^ot %uvi0to-Kv i-rt T V ax.poix.trii, n a.*.n8iffriov Th. i. 21. Hgo0uftos /ttaXXa* Eur. Med. 485. 4G5. V. The comparative and superlative are often used without an express object of comparison. In this case, the SUPERLATIVE increases the force of the positive, while the COMPARATIVE may either increase or diminish it, according to the object of comparison which is implied. Thus, *fl B'dv/Atttrituretrt avfyu-ri, O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. T fl pMffi'oivetocai, one of the more inexperienced, v. i. 8. NOTE. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are said to be used absolutely. When thus employed, the Comp. is often trans- lated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too or rather ; and the Sap. by the Pos. with very. In addition to the examples above, see 466. $46(5. VI. The degrees are more freely interchanged CH. 3.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. EPIC USE. 315 and mixed, than in English. It may be however remarked in general, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders the discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus, Ttnvrnt ftct^nrrot [for ?T0Xi jttaXXay] rs to^ns acrvrci&rai, this she chooses far rather than the virgin, Eur. Iph. A. 1 594. 2s7a . . ^axa^a-arsj, more completely happy than you, X. 482. 'A^iaXayuretror ruv f^yiyivrifjt.ivuv, [the most re- markable of those which had preceded it] more remarkable than any which had preceded it, Th. i. 1. T H ftiXntrn rut trnwrou $i\uv Ar. Plut. 631. To xaX- Xrray . . citv ivretivois %eti(ouffiv Mem. ii. 1. 33. "Icrgrov . . sraXa/Tigev iv. 5. 35. T< yjT^av, ;, TO) appears, in the Epic lan- guage, as a GENERAL DEFINITIVE, performing the office not only of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (see ^ 147, 148) ; as, ^ '0 ys^iwy, the old man, A. 33. Ta T* lyr, iva. "S'ixifffcu, and accept this ransom, A. 20. '0 y, /or Ae, A. 9. "Ef ^tttvt A. I 93. T*y, tt'AoTn, A. 36. Ta plv ToXiuv l| i et.v 'Afavuiu 47fi, 479, 48G. l). With a participle following, it is most frequently tran^'ated by a relative and verb, preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a personal or demonstrative pro- noqn, ( 476). It is often omitted in translation, especially with proper names, abstract nouns, nouns used generically, and pronouns ( 470, 471, 473); and must be often supplied in translation when not expressed ( 485, 486). 2. A substantive used indefinitely wants the article ; as, KaXo? yj 9i- r*vot, vrctg uvtoi ff-rovbtiitf %*!! (ps/Xa^iv, a favor due from a good man u an excellent treasure, Isocr. 8 b. See 51H. . UH. 3.] WITH GENERIC, ABSTRACT NOUNS, &C. ^ 47O. A substantive used DEFINITELY is either employed in its full extent, to denote that which is known, or, if not employed in its full ex- tent, denotes a definite part. A.) A substantive employed in its fall extent, to denote that which is known, may be, 1.) A substantive used generically, i. e. denoting a whole class ; as, } avfytt was, man (referring to the whole race), yv vfi, woman, el civfya-roi, men, el 'A^va/a/, the Atltenians (the whole nation). Thus, '0 avfyuvos " civfyufos " uva/u.a,er^ti, man was named eivfyuvos, PL Crat. 399 C. '0 ya.^ ffupZovXos XKI i fvxoipeivrys . . Iv rovrtf -rXiiffrov aXXjjXwv ^teKp'tgouiriv Dem. 291. 15. KaJ tut 'EXXjjva/y Se i%&>v oVX/raj . . r^Kxaffious, ' of Greeks,' i. 1. 2. Cf. 485. /}. NOTE. To this head may be referred substantives used distributively, which consequently take the article ; as, K^j i>virizi . . T^O. *p.&a.oux.ot. TOO ftnvo; ^ta, ro lyyli tivcti ^uyia; . .. Ira <$>vyi&s rX/v i. 2. 6, 7. K!/8j T^V K./X/a'o'av tit rviv El/X/x/y awa^rs^T'j/, Cyrus sends the Cllician qeeen to Cilicia, i. 2. 20. *T?rjj rns 'EXXaJaj, in behalf of Greece (their native land), i. 3. 4. Cf. 485. a. NOTES, (a) Proper names appear to take the article, from their being, In their origin, either adjectives used substantively ( 448), or common nouns used distinctively ( 479). Thus, 'H 'ExXaj [sc. y5], [the Greek' land] Greece (comp. England, the land of the Angles, in French L'Angleterre, Scotland, 27* 318 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK III. Ireland} ; '0 'ExXwWavTaj, [the sea of Helle] the Hellespont ; 'O [sc. 'g], [the Illustrious Man] Pericles; '6 O/X/^T-O,-, [the Horse-lover, Philip; *Av?J Mwo-a; Ta ysva; xai rouvoftae, rovro i%ti>v V. 2. 29. (6) The ad- jective construction is especially retained in names of rivers ; as, C O Ma/avo^a* *raTa^a; i. 2. 7. Ta5 Magrwv fora.fji.oZ Ib. 8. So, in Eng., *Ae Connecticut full 473. B.) A substantive wotf employed in 7 ezfefttf may be rendered definite, I.) By a limiting word or phrase. This word or phrase is usually placed, either between the article and its sub- stantive, or er/ter rti%n ruv K.ooiv0iu* Ib. 4. 1 8. To rt7%os ro IItiv0tuv vii. 2. 1 1 (cf. K< Tetwygoiiav TO fiT^a; -Xi^tiKov Th. i. 108). Ta ftlv ttrufav [^^X, ^} Wga rtjf K/A/x/ay . ., TO 5i {^w Ta ?rga T>J; 2^/a; i. 4. 4. 'O TJJ fiaffiXiMf yua.ixos aJsX Te KSVT^/TJJV vorctfAov iv. 3. 1. NOTES, a. On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to that which is said about it in the sentence, either precede the article, or follow the substantive without the article; as, "On xtvot a QoGos t"n, xa} o\ a/>%ovns truoi, that the fear was ground- Jess, and the generals safe, ii. 2. 21. Y/A.jv t%uy *w xja.'bt'iffeu, through the midst of the park, i. 2. 7 ( 456). 'Ev T>5 ^tta->) Dem. 848. 13 (but, Ta ^sa-av os, the centre division, i. 8. 13).' IlaX- XA/V run ivrtrn'Stiuv fiifreis, full of the necessaries of life in great abundance, iv. 4. 7. Ta 3l tcr/Tjj^/a troXXa rjv ^oe./u,Seivtiv iv. 1. 8. 2wv oX/yo/j Ta/~f Tf) ttvrov, with those about him few, i. e. wiVA /0 attendants, i. 5. 12 (but, 2w } avrov, with the few about hint). 'E,g>iort^ee. TO. ura., both his ears iii. 1.31. Av-ru TOV Aaxwvi, the^Spartans themselves, vii. 7. 1 9 (but, T A*wvi, J pvy'iffr'n logry Th. i. 126. Ta n etv iv. 8. 6. To/ ya^y T A^/a'Ta3>j / t6ay Tay p,ix,(>ov ifntaXov- (Aivov Mem. i. 4. 2. 'Eyj5rT)ytya/ V. 7. 9. H reiXttiv iyu, /, ^Ae wretched one (by eminence), i. e. mos miserable, Soph. El. 1138. 'O^y a-8 ray Jwo-TJjyay Id. (Ed. C. 745. 'O -ravrX^^y lyo Eur. Ion, 1349). 'Ey ru x%off6ii [sc. ytvoftiviv] Xoycu ii. 1.1. 'O yw $air*Xi/j aJrof, xctXiffavros TOV TOTI fiaffri.iu;. -rxr^os %l TOV viJy Cyr. iv. 6. 3. T>jy rr'/tay iif&ioetv iv. 6. 9. TSjf a7*^ a^aw iii. 1. 2. Ta?f irayw ray fl-T^as- riurvv, the best soldiers, Th. viii. 1. Kao>9w ray iraXa; Soph. (Ed. T. 1. NOTES, (a) This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either substantivefy or adverbially ( 476 478). (b) A preposition with its case may be used in the same way ; as, Ta? Iv AX.tv], 6ac&, i. 4. 15. O/ x TOS if'iy.iiita,, those of the country beyond, v. 4. 3. TaJV vrugovfi TUV VTHTTUV i. 5. 1~5. T/ TO XiwXwav E/'JJ tlffiXQtiv, 4'/ta # was which prevented their entering, iv. 7. 4. '0 jtflfty uv,he that is nothing, Soph. Aj. 767. Tov pntu [oWos] Ib. 1231. See 450. NOTE. The phrases at a.^1 and el */, followed by the name of a person, commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates ; and sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than the person merely. Thus, O/ up^t 'Ag*a,ffuX>.o* xai 'Ej7, Thrasyllus and Erasinides with their colleagues^ Mem. 1. 1. 18. O/ f&iv yn^i TOU; K.ooiv0iau; |y T/J Nc^j'a '/ifftfn, ei ^t A^//ii- /a/ xa) a/ %uft.fAet%ot iv riv Sixuuvi, ' the Corinthians with their allies,' H. Gr. iv. 2. 14. llirrctxou rt xui B/avTOf, xai TA;V a^ip/ TOV M/X^av 0aX?v PI. Hipp. Maj. 281 c. 5. When the neuter article is used substantively with a word or phrase following, (.) the precise idea (as, in English, of ' thing"* or ' things' 1 ) must be determined from the connection, and (/?.) not unfrequently the whole expression may be regarded as a periphrasis for an included substantive. Thus, . Ta TOW yf, of r./ux;, tafrtg TCI Yip.'iTtoct T/>OS IxiTvov, ' the relation of Cyrus to us is the same as ours to him,' i. 3. 9. T w ? * ipol ix'tirfai aT/ TUV o"xoi, to prefer remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. 'E5X, . . rat 5* ixtivou Ntwv 'A(r/va7af criAs, ' his place or office,' vi. 4. I I. 'E-riffrri/tuv j7v< ruv eif*rif*,ocT(t, Id. 47 24. Ta Tjf oyn< = o^y*, Th. ii. 60. 'E-ryvti TO, Qxtriliuf, extolled the king, H. Gr. vii. 1. 38. Ta 3tv OVTU frov^'opiv t'trTai Kur. Iph. A. 33. Ta /3aj .n* lvo f Id. Hel. 276. '11; 5 fu ou$/>uv, Ta/ta, [ri CH 3.J PREVIOUS MENTION, &C. 321 tft-a, = \yu\ 6' ol%i ffuty^ovu. Id. Andr. 235. E/ TO TV tSvovv vfaga Soph. El. 1203. See 447. y, 45:3. i. 4: 7 8. 6. The NEUTER ACCUSATIVE of the article is often used in forming adverbial phrases ( 440, 441), in con- nection wif'n, a. ADVERBS ( 475. a) ; as, To rX< [sc. ay], as to that which was of old, i. e. formerly, anciently, PL Phaedr. 251 b. Ta a.v(,7s 'fyiyvavro i. 8. 8. 01 $' tare/ n^ov -r^os .otxus , i&rouv rous Kg%ovrets ii. 3. 2. 4:83, REMARK. With substantives which are rendered definite by the connection, the article has often the forces of a possessive (see 503) ; as, *EavAiTa ru ?$ iptpori^u vagtTvx^ he wished [the] his- children to be both present, i. 1. 1. TWap^vjjf $/**>./ rav Kv^av x^os rev iliXtp'ov Ib. 3. \\voo; rt xa,refrn$fas cL-x-o rou cigftaros rot 3- tag ax a, iviSu, xu) flv 'ivrirov rot. e} yfotv Qivyovris, 1 some . ., but the most,' iv. 3. 33. "l-rirov; . ., rtus pi* rivets *(*.( ipoi, rout It r KXia^y xttra.\i\iifAfjt,ivous iii. 3. 1 9. Cf. 490. R. 484. GENERAL REMARKS. 1. The article is some- times found without a substantive, through anacolulhon (^ 329. N.) or aposiopcsis (ajroaiamijatf, the becoming silent, i. e. the leaving a sentence unfinished, from design, strong emotion, or any other cause) ; as, 'II ri xaxietv, i7-r' ayv/a, tin xa) Kpa, u/u.7* Tetoi^afttti PI. Apol. 2O 6. M rev - , el vu yi. Not you, by - (the name of the god omitted, aa the old grammarians say, through reverence), Ib. Gorg. 46'6' e. . 2. OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE With substan- CH. 3.] OMISSION. 323 lives which will be at once recognized as definite without the article, it is often omitted ; particularly with, a. Proper names, and other names resembling these from their being specially appropriated or familiar appellations of persons ( 471) J thus, A/aXX ror Kv*ax. . . ^uXXxpSavti Kl^ov i. 1.3. lips K%v Ib. 6, 7. lips rov Ku^ot Ib. 10. 'O S* Kvps Ib. 7, 10. K^tf Si i. 2. 5. See i. 5, 11, 12. E/j TJ KA/x/ i. 2. 20, 21. E/f K/Xfx/av Ib. 21. "A^a wX/y Svvavn ii. 2. 13. "A/^at reji fiXiu tiuoftivsu Ib. 16. To7j ei^ovfi rSJj S-xXxfrns, . . a,7j Si a 'A^xios i. 2.3. *E jfLippavytrtu rri xctruvrtTigas 'A.idau i. 1 . 9 (cf. 'Ex jf Xtppovwffov i. 3. 4) But, '0 St 2/Xdve,- a 'A^^etxiur;, but that Silanus the Ambraciot (who had been the chief soothsayer of the army), vi. 4. 13. 2. In this construction, the substantive is sometimes first introduced as in- definite, and then defined; and this subsequent definition sometimes respects simply the kind or class. Thus, KJVJ M/'Saw xatAaw/^yj?, a fountain [that called Midas's] which was called the fountain of Midas, i. 2. 1 3. IleXXo) Si o! fjt.iya.Xoi, and many struthi, the large ones, i. e. ostriches, i. 5. 2 . waXXa ra srAaTS*, ' of the broad kind,' V. 4. 29. S. Two or more nouns coupled together ; as, Ilt^} Si ruv roiuvbt ri ft xu\vtt lilXfaTv, aTav 'Hx/au rs x) o*iXny?i; xo:< eiffr^euv xa.} ytj; xeti ulSioos xett aigof xtti flffgoj xxi y'SflSTOf xxi uguv xeti \vixvrov ; PL Crat. 408 d (cf. Ton ;A/ov, 'H ft* Xw, T aa-r^a Ib. 408, 409). See other examples in 485. i. Ordinals and Superlatives ; as, Ka) r^irot tros r$ -foXifAoi irtXf vrot Th ii 103. E/y 'Ifffavs, rijs KiXixixs \ff%xrni vroXiv i. 4^ 1. ^> 4 8 7". 3. The PARTS OF A SENTENCE may be ranked as follows, with respect to the frequency of their taking the article : (a) An appositive^ appended for distinction. See * 472, 474. (b) The subject of the sentence. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [fiOOK III (c) An adjunct not governed by a preposition, (rf) An adjunct governed by a preposition, (e) An attribute. This commonly wants the article, as simply denoting that the subject is one of a class. To this head belongs the second Ace. after verbs of making, naming, &c. ( 434). 4. Hence the article is often used in marking the subject of a sentence, and sometimes appears to be used chiefly for this purpose. Thus, M Qvyvi il* ix^oiTtis Ktti aXXo/, 'and others,' iv. 2. 17. 'E-ToEi^ $n (ToXy TOU 'Ex>.>?v/xovoi ytyovut TI xa) wv xa/ io-6ft,t*os IffTi ftovos PI. Tim. 38 c. 7. When two nouns are related to each other in a clause, and have the same extent of meaning, the article is commonly joined with both, or with neither; as, IlXflVf/ ftiv ^taoa.( xa.} a.vG^tu'jruv ltr^u^a.-oufa,, To7{ Si jU'xfo-< TUV o$vv xa} Ttf ^iifiruffffa.! TO.{ *bvvu.[Aiif ntrQivrii i. 5. 9. Oy^ftroT* eigut . . Xyir/TiXtirTt^av u.'Sixi* %ixa.ioffvrns PI. Rep. U54 a. Awo-/riXo-Tijoi w abix'ta, Ttjs $ixiaciofttt,xot [_Kfo$i$ouf/,!f>cavoiifAiv, Iv %i To7f ov PI. PhfEdr. 263 b. "E-TE^Ta (fiuviiv Ttio-Kv KXivovTis, i^O^KVTo TOVTO ju.lv ix. TVS, TotJro $1 Ix. TV; Rep. Ath. 2.8. Ta fjt.lv t-rafav, . . TtXos $1 xaTE/sravj, he received some wounds, fmt finally slew, i. 9. 6. '0 fjt.lv ygxiv, 01 $1 lirtttovro, he (Clearchus) commanded, and the rest obeyed, ii. 2. 5. T5J p,lv ya,o U.VOOM, TV $1 ivoStv, lygfftftt* TO ogos, for we shall find the mountain, here easy, and there difficult, of ascent, iv. 8. 10 ( 421. ^). T fjt.iv TI fj,ot,x i 'o/jt.<.v/)i, TO, *ol x.tii tt.vu.woc.vafjt.s.vai, ' [as to some things . . as to others] partly . t partly,' ' now . . now,' iv. 1. 14 ( 441). 49 1. 2.) In poetry, with yaj ; as, n e * ifyot QavoTius few o yrt fJt.i'yiffTo; etl/ToTg Twy%oivn $ogv%ivwv, ' for he,' Soph. El. 45. TJJf yotf vrityOxa, fjt-uTgos Soph. Qid. T. 1082. To yag . . ffvuviov fAi^os, for this is a rare lot, Eur. Ale. 473. S.) As the subject of a verb, after xa), and ; as, Ki TOY and that he bade him give it, Cyr. i. 3. 9. Kai rax aVoxg'ivxo-tKi Xiy>iroe,i Ib. iv. 2. 13. REMARK. The proclitics in the nominative (o, fi, ei, ou, 148) require, from the very laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they are used, should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, they become orthotone, or, in other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relative pro- noun ^ 148. 2). This change takes place with */ uniformly, and with Ii 28 326 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK III when it follows foi ?

.uvxuv, said fo, i. e. . . os, , . . . , Glauco, Ib. b. r H *' #, said sAe, Id. Conv. 205 c. 493* B. The article in its -c- forms likewise occurs, I.) As a DEMONSTRATIVE OF PERSONAL PRONOUN, 1.) Befoie the relatives os, o Hffiet PI. Ale. 1O9 e. O/ ^' eixi. "Of i'

j $/~v oun* Vorti(>i~vta*.yt7 ^'IT^IOV ei^oi Eur. Ale. 883. 'A.fTi(a.(, ov*v riv XTVI~V, having ilain those whom she ought not to slay, Eur. Andr. 810. To Stov, TOV vwv \i. ytts, the god, whom you now blame, Ib. Bac. 7 I 2. JSoiTs IxtTvov, ovr/v' T/y ^oX7 iiiftif, as -soj T TO &

o: outrct p.ijff%o; avx. avi^sreti riKTevrets aXXaws [= rixTouiretv XXjv] Eur. Andr. 711. 2vvt)(.nXv0ctffir *>; ift.1 !H*rtt3it\ttftfA9tu aosX^a/ TI xeti a,o-X($tba."i XKI ave^a/ Toffcturui, UITT iiva,t iv TV OIKIX Tiffffagcurxatitxet TOVf t^ivS'i^ov;. . . XArov ju.lv evr IC/-T/V, u S&Jx^arij, TOVS oixtiovs trt^ie^xv a.-raXXv/Atvouf, aSvv Ti$in Mem. ii. 7. 2 (cf. Ib. 8). See 336. a. i28 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III. 4OO. b. USE OF THE NEUTER. Ti y rovrov fAaxagi/v'Ttgav, rov yrt /u,t%0tivect ; Cyr. viii. 7. 25 ( 445). "EvtbgtvffetfAtv, o T i /> fi/u.; xa,} atyKTyiva'at ivroirio't iv. 1. 22. T/j ovx civ ofto* keyniruiv O.VTOV (^av^tff^xi ft.rir qXiftav (Jt-nr uXx^ova tf>aivta'0eti ro7; ervvauffit ^ '~ES'oxn J* y xftiporiga. ravret, 11 . . Mem. i. 1. 5 ( 450). The neuter referring to words oj other genders, and the neuter plural for the singular ( 450, 451), are particularly frequent in pronouns. c. COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION. 'Agreio%os j ^v^rt, o*?cy ^W a ?roX tfut rif*.a,f ; Cyr. vii. 3. 8. Tfxvay, . . aw'f Eur. Suppl. 1 2. See 453. NOTES. 1 . In the construction of the pronoun, the number is often changed for the sake of individualizing or generalizing the expression ; as, "Orris $' a$ixvt7ro . ., ^ravraf . . a..iui xiyiiv, 5}, am/ /e 6aJe //je res< say, on what ac- count each one had been struck, V. 8. 12. Ilfaiftary tv) ixarn*>, eutrrivuf ITO f%uv n vii. 3. 16. YLt7gv XetGt~* . . yti . . if Kioxvga.ii, uv ctiruv [i. 6. rut Ki^xi/^a/wy] tvi^irns, he flies to Corcyra, being a benefactor of theirs, Th. i. 1 36. 'Ar YLiXo [for c, 445] vo/u,i%u p flv uv w^a- TW TaAA.flsyj7 ^Esch. Pr. 754. 'Eari vruXetf rtjs K/X/x/aj x/ TJJ; 2i//'f. r H'iou] ovrt o~ Tigav %ia(>iov, tlie hearth, than which [spot] there is no holier spot. 4OO. ADDITIONAL REMARKS. 1. A pronoun, for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in anticipation or repetition of its subject, or is itself repeated; as, T7 yce.^ TOUTOV //.KKK^IUTIPOV, jf . ., OUTU x,oc,xt7vos '/i/u.i^^ia'iv KU-TW Mem. i. 2. 24. 2x^/ os, o/'ii/ oW< (tto/ rso; , aJaj &!v cra^/ iftt, 'iirura, [to* ftifttpri Cyr. iv. 5. ^9. OT^< ^ o-o/ . . i^s/v av lifibt?$ai ffoi CEc. 3. 16. "Eff-T/ ya^ T/J cy ir^otru 2-T^T>;j craA./? r/f Eur. Andr. 7.->3. NOTK. Homer often uses the personal pron. oj", with its noun following ; as, "Hv uooe. ol S-icavru}/ t%t voipivt Xa,uv N. 600. "H f4.iv tysigtv Navffixtiai* wvtfXov Z,- 48. Cf. 468. b. OOO 2. A change of PERSON sometimes takes place; (a) From the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially in quotation ; as, Ayo/T* etv ft. di rot. i iv oivog Ixvo^&v, oj . . xoixTae,vav, take o\^t of the wtty a sense- less man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. Ka/ OUTOS i$*i " MtXtiv fo^v- tffSat, r^offXa.^uv e^iA-avraj ix, vretvros rou ffru.rtvp.a.Tos. 'Fjyea ya.t>" t$*l, "oTSa" iv. 1. 27. S^e i. 3. '^O ; iii. 3. 12; iv. 1. 19; v. . '25, 26. . (i) From a speaker's addressing a company, now as one with them, and now as distinct from them; as, Aav&sm/v v^a? its otryv O2. In the use of the pronouns, especially those of the classes named above, it is important to distinguish between the stronger and the weaker forms of expression ; that is, be- tween those forms which are more distinctive, emphatic, or prominent, and those which are less so. I. In the weaker form, the FIRST and SECOND PERSONAL PRO- NOUNS are omitted in^the JVom., and are enclitic in the oblique cases sing. ; but in the stronger form, they are expressed in the JVbm., and are orthotone throughout. In the weaker form, the THIRD PERSONAL PRONOUN is omitted in the IVbm., and is com- 28* 330 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III monly supplied by avrog in the oblique cases ; in the stronger form, it is supplied by o and o'c, which are simply distinctive and are limited in their use ( 490-492), and by ouroe, ods and exetyo?, which are both distinctive and demonstrative. Thus, "A-fuvra, ffuoe. uvi^uxa. trot, ivii xa.} jS>j i/f&tis ivKivu owa; "$i XKI VJAM; Ifti iTouv'striTS, Iftoi [*.tXYi ftvxtTt fAt Kt/^ov vop.i%tn i. 4. 16. Oy're y ,/!? Ixu'vcv 'in ffT^KTiurui, ivti yt ov ffvW7TO[j.*8a. aura, OUTI txt7vos ITI v\fjuv (tiffdoboTV)? i. 3. 9. OVTI ffU ixsivttf j o yi A^s/y xctt HaguffKTi'bos IffTi ffa.7;, ipo; %l aSi*.tpo; " i. 7. 9. T< v ffTt{>n6riva.i. . . Ilj^i TUV *f*tl4{itt dyctfuv ii. 1 . I '2. K/VV T xat rw \\ Itrou xeivfiv #<* Soph. Tr. 485. T o-ov >.i^of, the marriage you talk of, Soph. Ant. 573. To o-ov .ya,^ "A^j, 'the dispute for you,' Eur. Hel. 1160. Ewv/a x,/A/ r? vy, love to you, vii. 7. '29. Mi fAiroLpiXiiv troi Ttj; i/u-tji 2&{, at least yours [your eye], the ambassador, Ar. Ach. 93 (^ 332. 4). See 454. So, since vrer/utt may be followed by the Dot., as well as the Gen. ( 403, 411), Aft-iTi^au [= n^?y] VoTftou, xXuvo7f Aet&atxtietHriv Soph. Ant. 860. (6) The only POSSESSIVE of the 3d Pers., which has a place in Attic prose, is fftpirtgos, t/n-ir ; and even this is used reflexively, and with no great frequency. Thus, ilf \unuv fovovnTtti TOVS vs, when they saw their own men in distress, Cyr. i.*4. il. (c) The Dat. for the Gen. belongs particularly to the weaker form of expression. See 4 1 2. 5O4. III. In REFLEX REFERENCE, the weaker form is the same with that of the common personal pronoun ; the stronger form is the so-called reflexive ( 144). The weaker form belongs chiefly to those cases in which the reflex refer- ence is indirect and unemphatic ; the stronger, to those in which this reference is either direct, or, if indirect, is specially emphatic or distinctive. Thus, . 4.] PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND REFLEXIVE. 331 flVa7ay y ;, ffoupus vofti^ovrt; ivri ffifoi; "tr^cti V. 7. 25. Al ys/y T ixiXfufy awTavj, art afc^jy v riTTov triXavs To7s TO, la.wrcuv ffupcfra, ayounv "ififois IjtcCtfcAXf/y TOVTOV Toy ^/Xoy, oou iftctvrov ill. 1. 14. 'E^awTii y Jflx o-nys/Ssya/ vii. 6. 1 1 . IloXXst/ ^a/ ^xTas ivri^Tiftiou; tivizi eria.v] dvaftroi; a.. 402. g- \fAct.7i\ t%ct>v ^'^ai''yfje,ivov T^ j>X&>/u,nv . 320. AE? vifjt.'a.f uvigiffSot.! Yift,a,s a,vrovs], we ought to ask ourselves, PI. Phsedo, 78 b. Ex- as [W \yu VTO jfgoSvf/.lee.f oifji.ee, \XUTOV = if*,tt,UTov~\ rt x,ec,t vftJuf l^tzTKrvo'KS Ib. 91 C. Kx/w . . ctVTYi f^of KUTriv Soph. El. 283. A.lff%uvtis aroX/y Ty cturos uvrov, you yourself disgrace your own city. Id. (Ed. C. 929. Oi^ yot,(> T \xureu [== fftuurov] irv yi v/'y^y ogxs Mem. i. 4. 9. uurtis eiffdec, ^Esch. Ag. 1397. E?avet, and upon the game day, i. 5. 1 2. E/f ro etlro ff%v/u,K 1. 1O. 1O. Ourof 2i o a.lr'ot t and this same person, vii. 3. 3. 'Exi/Va TO, aura Mem. iv. 4. 6. TCCUTO. lf** X n iii. 4. 28 ( 39). See 400. 5OO. III.) For the sake of EMPHASIS, one of the most familiar modes of expressing which is repetition. When cKio$ is thus employed in connection with the article, its position con- forms to 472. a. Thus, Aiirot Mtvwv ISavXiro, Meno himself wished it, ii. I. 5. "Ofrit . . alrot uorttf f)ft.7t, uurof Ji|/af $ol{, uiiroi iZufccrvffuf ffvvi^aSt revt ffT^ttrrtyovt lii. '_'. 4. K.uoof cr>cn of the kiiii,'.' i. 7. 11. Hoof a-lria TV ffrotTivfta.ri, [by the army itself] r/W tn the arm;/, \. S. 14. 'Tcrif odru rou \auruv ffT^urivfJutrof, 'directly above,' iii. 4. 41. Ei etvro} el 5 I O. RKMARKS. 1. The emphatic (tiros is joined with pronouns in both their stronger and their treitkr.r forms. Hence it is often used in the Nominative with a pronoun which is understood ( 502). Thus, Ol $1 trr^xnu' TO.I, el ri UUTOU Ixsivov xoti ol XXa/, ' both his own,' i. 3. 7. Aurou raw-raw tvtxsv, on this very account, iv. 1. 22. Airy 1/u.oi . . $o%? I yuvetixi t bringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3. 1 6. "E-rift^/tv . fT^a.TnuTa.i oS; MVro; often precedes a reflexive, agreeing with the subject of the latter. Hyperbaton ( 3'29. N.) is sometimes employed to bring the two pronouns into immediate connection. Thus, 'Avoxnweti xi- yiTttt CLUTO; TV \a.vrou %ti(>i 'AgTctyiifffyiv, and he is said [himself] with his own hand to have slain Artagerses, i. 8. 'J4. O; $1 "Exxjvj . . eevro] lip' tmuru* t%uouv, 'by themselves,' ii. 4. 10. To ^ fyev ctvro xctd* a-vro ta-^ovra. Mem. iii. 14. 2 (cf. Ib. 3, and 509). ' To7s -r auros oturou x"npu.v $tx ffTgxrr.'yotJvros Id. i. 57). 'E,%iirtffJ/etr A.t/irix>.icc 1 U. II. The pronouns oyro? and ode have in general the same force, and the choice between them often depends upon euphony or rhythm ; as, TOVTOI (pdtiv xgr], rude x^y nuvraq at6nv Soph. Ant. 981. Yet they are not without distinction. Ouroc, as formed by composition with vro'c, is properly a pro- noun of identification or emphatic designation (it may be re- garded as a weaker form of o auro'c, the same, 502) ; while o<5, arising from composition with <5?, is strictly a deictic pro- noun (duxrixof, from dee'xrv.ut, to point out], pointing to an object as before us (see 150). Hence, 1.) If reference is made to that which precedes, or which is contained in a subordinate clause, ovum is commonly used ; but if reference is made to that which follows and is not con- tained in a subordinate clause, ode. Thus, t rovrov xeti j iii. 1. 7. NOTE. To the retrospective character of ajTra; may be referred, (a) Id use, preceded by x/, in making an addition to a sentence, the pronoun either serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or, in the neuter Ace. or Nom. (commonly plur.\ of the sentence itself (cf. ^ 334, 451). The con- struction may be explained by ellipsis. Thus, Sivevs -rgeirrixti vtn waXXauf Si- ^iirSa.!, KO.\ ravroui [sc. Vi%irov ourtti Ag. 2. 24. (6) The use of ravro and ratJra in as- tcnt ; as, " T Ao* aw -rXevrioif o.v'Sgcicri (Jt-x^ouvreti ctvro} ovns voXiftov o,0Xvrai ; " " NJ raUra ys [sc. J, 'Certainly it is so,' PL Rep. 4-22 b. EL OS- KOVV Irto'ov y'i avsi/j av rovS* rav^aV [= Iftou'] IftQaws Soph. CEd. T. 534 (but, 'Avj* '<&' [= s Iwo riX6tf ; Ho villain ! how earnest thou hither ? Ib. 532. Kurn ffv, fat ffr^n ; Ar. Thesm. 610. Owraj, ri o-iftvov . . frxivrug ; Fellow! why that solemn look? Eur. Ale. 773 ( 432). See 343. 3. This use of foi is very frequent iu the tragedians. 5 1 G. III. Other compounds of aviog and ds ( 150. ) are distinguished in like manner with OVTOC and ode ' thus, '0 Kwoa? uxoufftt; TOU T*uguou Toiuvret, roid^t vfgas UVTOV tXt%& CyT. V. 2. 31 ( 513. 1). '0 /u.lv our us tJ-rtv 5i. 3. 23. KXeos^aj p\v ouv TO- ffnvra. iJvri Ttj ii. 1. 9. 'H^fTj ToffouTOi ovrtf, otrous fv ogeis Ib. 16. 'H^f/V roirat^i ovrtf ivixu/usv TOV fieurtXiet ii. 4. 4 ( 514). 'OP. "Yirovros outrx yiy\/ i/v/ T TO^ TiTiXtvrwxoo-/, / am confident that there is something for tlte di-ad. Id. Pluvdo, H:\ c. "K5a|i T< i y o v ; uTriffrixv, orris ^.iyuv . ., and see the perfidy of Tissaphernes, [one] a man who saying . ., iii. '2. 4. Qiix etlff^uvio-h otlrt S-'ou; OUT avfyuTov;, o'trivif opoffavris a.'ffol.uXtxttri ii. 5. 39. Ta 5'21. /3). See 525. ft. ' NOTES, (a) After the plural iravrs;, all, oa-rts and o; &v are used in the singular, but ao-oi and ovro>rot in the plural See above and 497. 1, 521. (6) The use of an indefinite relative, referring to a definite antecedent belongs particularly to those cases in which the relative clause is added, not to distin- guish, but to characterize, thus representing the antecedent as one of a class. . HI. The relative should correspond with its an- tecedent in specific meaning, as well as in grammatical form. Thus, the definite relative with oviog should be o<; ' with iot- ovrog, olo? ' with Toaovroc, oaoc ' &c. The exceptions to this rule arise mostly from the use of a simpler, more familiar, or more emphatic pronoun, in the place of that which is strictly appropriate. Some apparent exceptions arise from ellipsis. Thus, Krriffo.ff6a,i Ou- vr,6ni}; ftrio' et'yoi.fS.v X/ rx; roieturot; zoiroi; Jv [_= o'ieav\ xoti ro7{ tyetvXoif fe,irta-rtv, A.X' Ixsi'va; uv a^s/j civ rot-noo^ xaivuvri otret a to; Ixiltufftv " ill. 1. 7. 'Efra. y ^i- fetf, offuff-ri^ i*oivGv?f Ss [= roiovros a7a?] ii, as long as you are what [= such as^ you are, PI. Phsedr. '243 e. "H yt % s/>< Id. Theaet. 1 97 a. /3. The place of a relative pronoun is often supplied by a RELATIVE ADVERB, chiefly in designations of place, time, and manner ; as, E/j #*>/ay, cVsv o'\/>v- veci S-aXTTv, to a jo/ace [whence], from which they would behold the sea, iv. 7. 20. 'Ev ru 0ti, iv0avrt iffxvvovv iv. 8. 25. Ta uuro (r^pa. . . utr-rt^ re -rguro* p,tt%evf*,ivos ffwyu, the same order [asj with that in which he first ad- vanced to the battle, i. 10. 10. 'OftoTx yu.^ fj^ot ^oxeviri vrdff%iiv, cucririg 7 vtf sraXXa itrQ'tuv ftn^s-rart ifA-r'iirXa.iro Symp. iv. 37. Kw ffcii Stoi vrogoitv, ut lyi ^X Soph. (Ed. C. 1 1 24. 5*22. IV. The relative pronouns belong to the class of adjectives ( 73), and, as such, agree with a substantive expressed or understood. This substantive, or one correspond- ing to it, is also the antecedent of the relative. It is commonly expressed in but one of the two clauses, more frequently the former, but often the latter ; and may be omitted in both, if it is a word which will be readily supplied ( 447). Thus, awryf ffT^a,TiuTKf t eSs [sc. ffT^a,TiuToe.g~^ Msvwv fT^s, he sent with her the soldiers, which [soldiers] Meno had, i. 2. 20. ' A.fo'X'ip.^a.i fgos letu- T [sc. ro 0-TjaTft^a,] S iJ%iv ffr^drivfAa., to send back to him the force which he had [what force he had], Ib. 1. Ky^a; i t%Mv oS; *?*, and Cyrus hav- ing the men whom I have mentioned, Ib. 5. E/; w* atp/xovro xupriv, [sc. ttvTvi fi )taf*,r)\ fjiiya.\ri *ri jv iv. 4. 2. KarairxEz/a^on-a TI ^f eig% i. 9. 19. AvT*f [sc. roffaurovs /3oi/f,] cj-o/ /Sat? vii. 8. 16. y^ l/V/y, a7-/y tu^oftctt 3-a?V AT. Ran. 889. OTS', y iVj\^|y 'EofAiov l^o' Eur. Or. 1 1 84. REMARKS. 1 . Other words, belonging alike to both clauses, are subject to a similar ellipsis ; thus, TW* ygtl-ro Ittt ' a? [= riffotv $' (xtTva/, a/J xeit 3ivo(f>uvrct, they proposed as am- bassadors, first Chirisophus, because he had been chosen commander ; and some also [ther were also those who proposed] Xenophon, vi. 2. 6. nx> 'lA/yy, *< CH. 4.] RELATIVE. ATTRACTION. 339 'A%cttwv, KoCi t/TTiv uv ciXXuv iQvuv Th. iii. 92. K/ ttrrt p\v out ttvrui xctrt- CzAay H. Gr. ii. 4. 6. "Ea-T/y ovo-Tivet; avfyuvruv Tt0au/u,ttxas i5f xoti 1 1^ a, i /A o y n s [for vfoXXtiv */ sy^a^ova] iii. 5. 17. E/rs ^ra?^', ov \\ \f&rit %tgos IlaXwdw^av i' TI rar^aj tv %r.p.oi; s%nsi ti ^>5, 'tell me respecting iny son Polydorus, whom you have,' Eur. Hec. 986. T/Tjy ta.s otX*i6ri x&Xouffiv PL Theaet. 167 b. QVTOI, ITU ivH'ius %ff6ovro TO t7*eti, OTO.V Ti-^nrTO. ^iot. ufjt.i6a, [for fa,o-7va.i Tii^iffTa., OTetf tHMrfm&ifU/*], we shall endeavour to be present [most quickly, when] as soon as we have accomplished, Cyr. iv. 5. S'.i. c iij Tti^nrra. tuf v*i$Kivsv, ifvuvTt iv. 3. 9. 'Ew< rtXdi. Ta^/ff-ra, . . a-ri^oTo, as soon as he had come, he sold, vii. ** 6. "Hyatyay . . ovroffou; tyu ttXtiffTov; i^tiveiftriy, I have brought [the most \raich] as many as I could, Cyr. iv. 5. 29. "E^wv if-rieis u; civ ^6>nfett ?rX/- fToui, bringing as many horse as he should be able, i. 6. 3 (5 521. /3). 'Hj /u.oi- XiffTK iduvKTO ivrmgvz'TOfAZves i. 1.6. ' ' A.Triyovro . . ofoi ioyyavra irooffura.761 vi. 6. 1. 'EXawvwy u; ^uvatTov %v Toi%nrTet, riding as fast as was possible, Cyr. V. 4. 3. rie/a 'ofjt.a.1 % Syyarey [sc. sVra/j fAxXifTot i. 3. 15. A/*!*i; ii. 4. 24. "EjTa/] vii. -'. 8 (a-n in this construction with the superlative is the neuter of otrn;, used ad- verbially). "Q'Tru; OTI KIT 0,^0.0- x.iva.ffTsra.T at XeiSai $a.jf Irvy^etviv ?%*>, from the cities, which Tis- taphernes happened to have, i. 1.8. T' av^/, J v 'iXno-6i, irttiroftat, I will obey the man, whom you may choose, i. 3. 15. A$* r5jj iXsw^i^'a;, r,i xixTvrfa i. 7. 3. (Cf. 'Ev T?J ff-x-ovboug, &s . . ivawtrctv iv. 1. 1. Yo7g xrr,vifiv, a. ix rvv Teco%uv tXaSov iv. 7. 17.) Tayrwv, oa,s i. 9. 14 (^ 522. 2). But utrtg tH%* olxiruv firry p.ovca Soph Gd. C. :J.S4. Msy, a7j] fa/frit, -roXXayj, wy o/" tAo.se whom he distrusted, Cyr. V. 4. 39. 'Eg ()). BxTTia-^a; ^' ui [= tx/vy, a] w^ry irgifxiva.tr'reti, to be injured by those things which have beef, prepared by us [in respect to which preparation has been made by us], Th. vii. 67. Oi$t KM itiorit rut r.t -rt^i 2ae^J/,- Hdt. i. 78. When the subject of a verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. Cf. 529. y. The relative followed by /SewAu may, as if a compound pronoun ( 524), agree with the antecedent in any case ; thus, Hiai \\tXuyvurou, r, aXXaw OTOU [= a27. C.) The ANTECEDENT takes the cose of Z/ie rela- tive. This is termed INVERTED ATTRACTION. Thus, Av?Xy aoroi o *Ar0XX $ia7f [= Ssawj ] 01; t$ti vuv, Apollo made known fa him the gods to whom he must sacrifice, Hi. 1.6 (cf. vi roXrr&y [= craX/ra/y] wy a

av$ tpctri itvxi, it n O.VTUV i/Xw^a^sy, alrot oClria't tlffn V. 5. 1 9. REMARK. Inverted attraction appears also in ADVERBS ; thus, B-^va/ xiUdtt [= xitiri], otitv <7fi(> jjxu, to return thither, whence he came, Soph. CEd. C. 1227. K< etXXoffi [= aXXa^aw], ovoi y u(>u j What man is this, whom I see by the tents? Id. Hec. 7:i3. T/ TOUT' cii>%a7ov \vvifiis xaxy ; Soph. CEd. T. 1O33. O7y 5^/Jvav T>7vS' 1(putra.;\ What a viper is this, which thou hast produced ! Eur. Ion, 1 262. Tauro pit etitv 3-etvftitffTov Xiytis PI. Prot. 3 1 8 b. T/f o -ratios [_= T/? itrn o vroto;, es] Kvrau; "KIT* ; Soph. Ph. 601 (see $ 480. a). KXv yi pat si], obliging a man such as you are [a SUCH AS YOU man], Mem. ii. 9. 3. O/ ola'i vft'Js oivS^ts, but [the SUCH AS YOU men] men of your rank, or men like you, Cyr. vi. -.'. 2. Il^aj eiv^^x; ToXpLVi^ou; o'lov; x.cti ' A.6f)voiiov; Th. vii. 21. "Ovro; y . . 'otrov rgi% > oivtx,ov O.OTOV vii. 3. 23. 'A.Tl%ii otrov ica.poio'tiyyriv, l about a parasang,' iv. 5. 10. K< jr^a.ra. o'trov 3-y/*ara, and sheep [as many as the sacrifices would be] enough for sacrifice, vii. 8. 1 9. So, doubled, "Oirov otrov Ar. Vesp. 213. See 450. 1. y. In the Epic, the demonstrative is sometimes expressed instead of the relative ; as, TvfAfat . . ir/uxia ro7ov [= hi/u.a.f, upon this condition, that they should not burn the villages, iv. 2. I 9 (cf. 'K-rJ rttirif, utrn Th. iii. 1 1-4). 'E0* eu TI [= iwJ rouraa, aiVrt] TX7 trvX- liytiv, for the purpose of collecting [for this purpose, tliat we might collect] vessels, vi. K. 22. Mi;^/ oZ [= TW ^vaw, on \ iToov, until [the time when] tliey saw, v. 4. 16 . cf. Mf^^/ rotrovrou, 'iu; Th. i. 90). Wi%t ov [= TOV %u. you, ic^a] 5/a x.a.yti oil, eVari fiofaoiro Mem. ii. 1.18. NOTE. Hdt. sometimes uses pix^i ou or orw as a compound adverb gov- erning the Gen. ( 394) ; as, Mt#g< aJ cxru irv>yu* i. 181. Mt^< oraw ii. 173. b.) When the demonstrative belongs to the second clause ; as, fit ovru ftotiyirai, o xa.} vrgoirtiiv i%g*iro ro7; %'ivoi; i. 3. 18. Own ya.^ iru^ot iir* eiyr^uy vwzorsgav fii}*9i, oiov [= roiovrav, eJvj ro TJ 'Alfioootrst; "rim ix ipuv "E^wj Eur. Hipp. o3O. Toa"eyTav %l oia..ovT xeti oa-av oL -rxooyrei vr'eXifjtev Th. i. 36. "Ocrov ou ira,ilri ffin vii. 2. 5. 533. VI. A RELATIVE sometimes introduces a clause which (a.) has another connective or a participle absolute, or which (/I) is properly coordinate; and, on the other hand, a COORDINATE CLAUSE sometimes (/.) takes the place of a rela- tive clause, or (d.) is used in continuation of it. Thus, , ror tt fgotovro, ox. KV uvet* Aavro, the Olynthians could now mention many things, which, had they then fore- seen, they would not have perished, Dem. 128. 17. "Of i-nibv x.a.rf.pa.e ftv^ir, such things were decreed by prophetic responses ; to which do you pay no regard, Soph. (Ed. T. 723. 'OP. YvQa* apip' tiftw ^roXiTtti i*} a,7es 5i, v tif*,i7{ ^iXa^asv /3a.rivo'ot./ji.iv Si tf' etlrov iii. 1. 17. TIou 5ii ixtTttf iffTi* o av!j, 8; iruviS^oa. *i,uiv, HO.} ffu ftoi ftoi\at i^extis Sauu.x.'i^'.ii UVTOV \ Where now is that man, who hunted with us, and whom you seemed to me greatly to admire f Cyr. iii. 1. 38. 'KxsTvo; TS/VKV, o7j ovx i%a./>i%ovt' el Xiyovns, ovb' \ riiX' iivlg Ni/Xtfw pous, 'whom you ought to drive [her],' Eur Andr. 649. F. COMPLEMENTARY. t>35. From the connective, and, at the same *ime, in- definite character of the complementary pronouns and ;id verbs OH. 4.] COMPLEMENTARY. 345 ( 329. N.), their proper forms are those of the indefinite rel- atives (^ 519. 2). But, when there will be no danger of mis- take, there is often employed, for the greater brevity and vi- vacity, in place of the full compound form, one or the other element, either the relative or the indefinite. Of these, the latter is far the more frequently used, but with this distinction from the indefinite in its proper sense, that the accentuation of the compound form is retained, as far as possible. Thus, Il^< S/fXa* tivtti, o TI ol a.\Xoi *EXAjyf a,f/>x.(>ivouvTeti, before it is evident, ti-hain, ei!0' a* as v tls \%Vov ^ea^lov attroffTetiti ii. 5. 7. To rvs *%*)! y.^ ua,vts, ol yrgoSr,tt,Ttv(*.u.) ifoa-ov Tt i*n Kcti i-ri riti fvviiXt'yf&ivov IV. 4. 17. ttt v r ii. 8. 2. >30. REMARKS. 1. The indefinites thus employed and accented are termed in Etymology, from the most promi- nent of their offices, INTERROGATIVES ( 152. 2, 317). As complementary words, they were employed in indirect ques- tion ; and hence appears to have arisen their use as direct interrogatices, through an ellipsis. Thus, from the indirect question, l^liri, liva. yvwfirjv f'%fi$ TTfyl T??C noyflvtc, say, what opinion you have respecting the march (ii. 2. 10), by the omis- sion of fins, comes the direct question, Tlva yi'M^i]v e%fic nfgl T/]C iiuytlu^ ; What opinion have you respecting the march ? So, from y/g|Ts ovv TT^OC |U, rl iv -o) f'^fff, tell me, therefore, what you have in mind (iii. 3. 2), comes, Tl iv ro> ^T / What have you in mind 1 NOTES, a.. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it, and the Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed ; and hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the in- terrogatives. Thus, who, which, when, &c., are both relative and interrogative. . In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter forms above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both ; thus, O"^*/, -rang, n tteu\'off.ivos x.ot.ri^ya.'^iffScn \, 9. 20 (cf. Stmjyoj . . tivcti TOUTOU, orov Ib. 21). "HJ/ff-T" av axouirxifAi TO ovopK, rif oSrus Iffri SHVOS Xty;v [= ovo/tot rovTov, or- ris ] , most gladly should I hear the name, who there is of such power in speaking [= the name of him who is], ii. 5. 15. T A^X WTJJO< av /* rivet %/ovov o6oi\f/./>ts oi/u.y%6tyo* n oiov Id. Charm. 155 C. 'TT*t- ft/iJJ; i,- #/*/ Id. Conv. 173 C. r H }5' aW/vaawv pio-Hov [= purSo* rivet, offns ovv ">?] -r^offrxiTri- fats-, not demanding any pay whatever [it might be!, vii. 6. 27. "H XX* on- tvv or any thing else whatever, Cyr. i. 6.22. O^S' OTIOVV o&oTuv, ' what evil not suffering?' i.e. 'suffering every evil,' Dem. 241. 28. Cf. 533. (6) Tif rivos et'irtos Ifri, yivn Soph. Ant. 940. i^, o-ret -r^os * art gat T&u Id. 1342. H. "AAA02. ^54:0. The pronoun Hos is not only used retrospect- ively, but also prospectively and distributively ; that is, it may denote, not only a different person or thing from one which has been mentioned, but also, from one which is to be men- tioned ; or it may, in general, denote a difference among the several individuals or parties which compose the whole num- ber spoken of. When aXXflj is prospective, and is followed by another A.Xa,- or an equiva- lent pronoun used retrospectively, it is commonly translated by one. When it is distributive, it is combined with another eLxXos , or with one of its derivatives, and is commonly translated by two pronouns, as one . . another, this . . that, &e., the sentence being resolved into two. Examples are subjoined of XXf and its derivatives, as used, a.) RETROSPECTIVELY. "Qfov ^>\ ixavo* tgyov ivi t^i/n xa'sx, aXX* o^rrax, XX a & l%6vv 'i^iiv, aXXw fl5j*r, aXXai etorovs iroitiiv, ' for one man to boil meat, for mother to roast it, &c.,' Cyr. viii. 2. 6. Ms/vayrs? Ji TWTJ T vfti^etv, ry XX) lrjt)9yTa, ' on the next,' iii. 4. 1. See 457. i. 1 . /3.) PROSPECTTVELY. Ta TI XX tr/'^jf Jj/*oyj, Ao^A honored me in every other respect, and gave me ten thousand da- rics, i. 3. 3 ( 432, 488. 5). OwSsv XX* ^i^iee. liaft$og Eur. Ale. 404. 2y ' pia*etgiet fAnxugios &' o ffo; Tons fixsrot Ear. Or. 86. A*i?f tv n ) 2/^^/a; PI. Phsedo, 77 d. Cf. 446, 497 NOTES. . When the subject is divided or distributed, the verb sometimes agrees with the whole, and sometimes with one of the parts ; thus, "0r t$i/- /VTO Vxairroy, where they each could, iv. 2. 12. 'Avs-rai^yra St, oVw jT^y^a. ri i'xacfTToj Hi. 1. 3. IlavTif ^t ajro/ xara Vvj, iv -rXa/ir/w ro i. 8. 9. "AXXaj w^o,- aXXon ^cfoXXav H.Gr. H. 3. 23. . Zxx os <2xx* Xlyj/ ii. 1. 15. See 360, 497. 1, 542. J. /5. In syllepsis, the poets sometimes adopt the following arrangement (termed by grammarians S^JJ^a 'AXxftuvixov*) ; Ilt/^Xfyj^wv T piovffiv KuxBro; TI *. 513. E/ 5s *'"A & X uftpK X ns ff T. 138. 545. 2. ELLIPSIS. When the subject is sufficiently indicated by the form of the verb or the context, and no stress is laid upon it, it is commonly omitted. This remark applies, a.) To the first and second personal pronouns, and likewise to the third, when its reference is sufficiently determined by the connection ; thus, jBbtfi <5* rJatfeYfi daqnoq . ., and wj/ie/i Darius ivas sick, he wished, i. 1. 1. See 502. NOTE. The personal pronouns are implied in the very affixes of the verb. See 171, 172. 54 O. b. ) To the third personal pronoun, when refer- ring to a subject which is indefinite, or general, or implied in the verb itself ; thus, 'Er; trvvsffxoruft, when it grew dark, Cyr. iv. 5. 5. "fto-tun, there was an earthquake, Th. iv. 52. Ketrivi-^/t %tovi TJV Qgxxnv Xv. */ vavs Toretftav; \-vrSf. Ar. Ach. 138. 'O-v/'S w, it ioas late, ii. 2. 16. r H a.p.^1 yo -rX*?- ^wo-asy i. 8. 1. 'H? sa/xv, as it seems, vi. 1. 30. OS 2t ^;u, [and it has itself thus] and thus the matter stands, v. 6. 12. *Ey TOUTM "(}{ but when [it did not succeed to him] he met with no success, Th. i. I 09. Kara. $n%ut>ii ettiToTs iv. 8. 20. Ma^;jj 5sT, there is need of a battle, or there must be fiyhtino, ii. 3. 5 (see 357, 430. R.). 'Epot /*tXr>< irj} T^ro7s ,t*yaXo/f ayutrt Th. vii. 69. Oun ci^tt y- ra.'SixtTv $i7, . . ortouv r), it is not riyht then to return an injury, whatever one may suffer, PL Crito, 49 c. 'H TOV o rfttj cii tit K.av t you can see, iii. 4. 39. 'Eymro . . J>lo, ITOI/UO?, Thus, Teura ev fainriat [sc. Ifri], this must not be done, i. 3. 15. *E ru air^of tftv al os) i. 4. 1. A.Vff^^fTovs iTv< dvciyxn araxrat/; er j (cf. 'Attiyxn ya.^ tf i$nae.v, ' the rulers,' Th. iv. 88 (cf. 453. y). *Tir0?vy< viftotvro ii. 2. 15 (cf. iv. 5. 25). Ta vvcofyytu iXxuvsro iv. 7. 24 (cf. i. 5. 5). v H-y $i av riffa.ii xxi 'Iffuv xu,} a.t6^uot . . TiXXtrxt Pind. Ol. 11. 4. This construction was termed by the old grammarians 2^55,ca n/J^/xo or ^ 55O. 5. ATTRACTION. The verb is sometimes attract- ed by a word in apposition with the subject ; usually an attri- bute coming betiueen the subject and the verb ; as, To X,ia(>'iov rouro, oftg fgorigot *E! 'OS IxasXayvra, this place, which vas before called The Nine Ways, Th. iv. 102. *Ei ft 1uo *.o fi Vboftivn v-fynXiu Id. iii. 112. "Ara $i TO ftiffav ffuav, Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas ) A.iyira.i, 'AfoXXuvtx, sx.'S-Jaai M!>(* eturau \p.ctXi7v a.yyi\\ira.i Cyr. V. 3. 30. Tlj ayyi^^oiro o ftlv Ylu'ffetv'bgos nrtXtv- rr,%.&s, that [Pisander was announced as having died] it was announced, that Pisander was dead, H. Gr. iv. 3. 13. 'Ott,oXoyt7tivoe,i iTuy%etvi], the elder, therefore, happened to be present, i. e. it hii/>/>ened, ttiut the elder was present, i. 1.2. "Or; rovn^oTa.Tel yi tl7ffli, it doe* not belong to these to punish us, Eur. Or. 771. Kfs/W*>v yaj "Ada, xiv6av> for [he were better lying] it were better he were lying in the grave, Soph. Aj, 635. AA.s [= croA-Xaw $t7 ifts] (> a.a. KU.\ iv airy feXXovf . . ritiveivtti PI. Charm. 1 53 b. "E5a^v ctlroi, ytvoftivrif, ffxrivro; vrtn is often separated from its subject by some of the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastically ; as, " EJ \iyits" 1

intransitive, and on the other, with the passive use. Sef 165, 1G6, 557-561. (d) From a transition of meanin* in the verb, See 556, 561. 2. (e) From ellipsis. Se* 555. 554. As in most of the tenses the same form is botf mid. and pass., it is but natural that the distinction should bf sometimes neglected in the Fut. and A or. ( 166). This oc curs chiefly, .) In the use of the Fut. mid. for the Fut. pass., as a shorter and moi euphonic form ; thus, 'E| s/u.ou ri^^trsTxi, he shall be honored by me, Soph. Ant 210. TSji^oj x.xd' -/iftuv o'lffirett T?$' v^'ioa. Eur. Or. 440. Maj^vT; XX>;Xai;s ii. 5. 5. NOTES. (1.) Whether verbs of the classes just mentioned employ th mid. or the pass, form of the Aor. must be determined by observation (2.) Sometimes, though rarely, the Fut. pass, occurs as mid., and the Aor mid. as pass. ; thus, 'EfftfAiX*i0nffop.ivKt Mem. ii. 7. 8. Ka-rsV^iTa S'^T/ Ss/vij Eur. Hipp. 27. A. ACTIVE. 5>t5. I. In many verbs in which the active voice is commonly or often transitive, it is likewise used intransitively or reflexively ( 553). This use may be often explained b)> the ellipsis of a noun or reflexive pronoun ( 427). Thus, C O S /3a7 /u,tv oux vytv [sc. TO trTiirtuf*.a,~ , but the king did not [lead on his army] advance in this direction, i. 10. 6. "Ayi $97, come now, ii. 2. 10. $>--0t 2f] roivvv Rep. Ath. 3. 5. Ba/X* [sc. ataurot} I; x-ioaxa,- ! [Throw yourself to the crows] Go, /eerf ^e crows! Go to the dr>;/x .' Ar. Pint. 782. 'HSflvjj 5y,- [sc. sawrayl, (/irinpi [himself i t//J <<> pleasure, Eur. Ph. 21. 'AvaxaXoTr', [sc- Tflv wv], to ^/t'e attention, Mem. iv. 5. 6. 'T-ra Ji/x v D4 SYNTAX. USE OF VOICES. [BOOK III. 'AMpus ?#aTij = *A6upai cms iii. 1. 3. The poets even join ?& with an adjective ; as, "E^' %tru%o;, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. Med. 550. (6) For the -ntransitive use of the second tenses, see 257. /3. 5*>O. II. The active voice, through a transition of meaning, sometimes supplies the place of the passive ; as, EJ H.X.OVU, to hear agreeably, and hence, from the bewitching sweetness of praise, to be commended or spoken well of ; as, Wiya, $1 tu ot.3t.ovuv UKO \\.x.ttn v*o roZ Iriftov, those of the Rhodians who had [fallen out of the city] been banished by the people, H. Gr. iv. 8. 20. "On ipsuyott* o'l'xofav v-ro rov l-n- p.*w, thut they were [fleeing] banished from home by tlie people, H. Gr. i. I. 27. AtriSiiet; Qivyovra. i/u- ftou Cyr. viii. 7. 26. 'E^r/^e^^sv^v, bearing herself on, i. e. rushiny on, i. 9. 6. Tv J/'*wv ofrixofttvas, refraining [holding himself] from injustice, Mem. iv. 8. 4. 'O $' aXXaf ffrf>a.To; . . i|nworX/|T TAXfl/V ftiv x,cti xXo/V ^irufff . . u-rXt^o* $ K.U.} 'iTfauf r^a/u.iTuTt^iets Cyr vi. 4. 1. wyJJ aXX0; nsr(/nfnrp, i. 9. 7. Y^a.'ra.f'r^f^a.fAivo; p\v -reivTen 5vgovf, ' having subjected to himself,' Cyr. i. 5. 2. KtJ^sv 3t fAira.'r'ifj.Ttra.i, but he sends for Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1.2. TatJray QvXa.T-TKrfu.t, to iratch him for your oivn sufifi/, to lie rev t JTTa.ft,6U eiovfftt.fffat.1 \AT. l. 2. 8. *- ra.fjt.ivov TOV dxiveix.r,v, drawing hi* srymltnr. i. 8. 29. Qifftcti ra. ovXet i. (5. 4 Kia Sipttof t-ri ra yova.ro., ' upon his own knoes,' vii. 3. 23. 'A-r^v< express your opinion, \. 6. 9. Ila^a /*' uvofAiH^ire, he called me his Soph. (Ed. T. 1021. 'A /w ' p r o^, hence CH. 5.J MIDDLE. 353 to sell; as, Txvrx eivrotopivos, eSn 2ii#j eivtiuxi* wrt vptv *-i ytytopwu., hav- ing sold these things, he has neither paid over the proc&ds to Seuthes nor to us, vii. 6. 41. AJa/t*a<, to loose for ones self, to deliver, to ransom, to redeem ; as, E7 rivet; IK. TUV vroXt/tiuv iXutreift,r,v Dem. 316. 3. Ti0n/u,i OT y^a^u vaftov, to make a law for another, r'i0tp.xt or ygxtyoftxi voftov, to make a law for ones self; as, Qtoi/s JtfAxi rev; voftovg rourous 7; dv^u-roi; t~vxi, I think that the gods have instituted tliese laws for men. Ot av^wcra/ xi/rovs 'Mivro, men hare insti- tuted them for themselves, Mem. iv. 4. 19. No^av ovroi s^x-^xv, these men (the Thirty) enacted a law, H. Gr. ii. 3. 52. *Hv v'opous xaXawj >y^x-^uvTxi, if they (the citizens) should enact good laws, CEc. 9. 14. BauXsww, to give counsel to another, $au\tvof*.xi, to give counsel to one's self, to deliberate, to resolve (^ 35). T^a^ja;, to take vengeance for another, to avenge, ri/tugiopixi, to take vengeance for one's self, to punish. 559* c.) RECIPROCAL ; so that the middle is equivalent to the ac- tive with the reciprocal pronoun ; as, Ma^a^sva; xxi /3a-e^o/u,tvot t " quarrelling,' iv. 5. 17. A/*jXAa|vvirl6if4.a.i, to agree, $ia>.vof<.cti, to become reconciled, &x,x i-rotrnrxro, she had a corselet made, Cyr. vi. 1.51. "A a a-a-r-raf . . IvtvoiYiro Ib. i. 4. 1 8. 'AwaXXwvaj av^}/t voiyo'xju.tvof V. 3. 5. *Eya y>xg ff& rxvrx l-rtrw^i} t'%i$x%x/u,vv,for I had you taught these things onpurpose, Cyr. i. 6.2. T^XT^XV { Mem. i. 2. 2 ; Txvrx li-x-av ivxjjolu, to cause to fear, to terrify, QoZiopxi, to fear ; as, Tov; l-rafiivou; vroXip'tov; a^y,.Xo/u,ai, to pride ones self. , to tell, tpgoi&ftKi, to tell one's self, to reflect. (3.) Hokirtvu (from G 1. REMARKS. 1. If the reflexive action is direct or prominent, the reflexive pronoun is commonly employed ; more frequently with the active voice (if in use), but often with the middle ; as, 'Exs79j aT E'T/ff'~ $ivet KO^'IVU UTO fXtt'ovuv iet<$t\ris m (TxWfly Tt ravra, vvo ffov Cyr. v. 5. 16. 2yX>j^;j y 'H^axXjj: ra; /Saw? . . i/TTo NXss TtTcfyft'svot, '/) VDavn6w v-r o.uTo7v, I was despised by them [= Kj(ra[*.ivov$\ iv. 5. 12. Ta urn TiT^wrvfAiinv, having his ears bored, iii. 1. 31. 064. 2. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle rather than of the active ; and hence deponents may have a passive. Thus, M/O-&W. titiveti 21 olx. i-ri TOUT* i' O (.Future, Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronic. Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Future, Achronic, Achronic, Future, Achronic, Achronic, Future, Achronic, Future, Achronic. Future. Achronic. Future. 566. II. The use of generic forms for specific ( 330) has a peculiar prominence in the doctrine of the Greek tenses. CH. 5.] USE OF TENSES. 359 REMARKS. . The PRES., in its widest generic sense, includes all the other tenses (see /S) ; as a definite tense use.i achronkally ( 565), it includes the Impf. The IMPF., in its widest generic sense, includes all the past tenses ( 173) ; and the AOK., all the indefinite and complete tenses. The PBBF., as a generic tense, includes the Plitp. /3. Tlie distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to grammatical forms, but also to the ideas which these forms represent. Thus the idea of PRESENT TIMK, which applies specifically only to the passing moment, extends in its generic application to any period including this moment ; and we speak of the present month, the present century, &c. In its widest extent, therefore, it includes all time. Hence general truths, existing states and habits, and oft- recurring facts, belong appropriately to the present time. III. The relations of time have nothing sensible to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges therefore with freedom through all time, the past, the present, and the future ; and, without difficulty, conceives of the past, or future as present, and even of the present or future as already past. That the Greek language should have a peculiar freedom in the interchange of tenses, is but the natural consequence of the wonderful vivacity of the Greek mind. See 330. 3, 576, 584, 585. REMAR' s. . The Pres. tense, when employed by the figure of vision, in speaking of past events, is termed the HISTORIC PRESENT. See 576. ft. Common facts, imagined scenes, and general assertions, not being con- fined to any particular time, may often be expressed in the present, past, or future, according to the view which the speaker chooses to take. E. g. we may say, " The wisest often err," or " The wisest have often erred," or " The wisest will often err." Thus, C H /ulv ya.o tvret^iat vu^iv SextT, f> $i a.r*oav rou vixxv o ya. xgx-ruv elfta. rv .*.i^iii* Isocr. 2 a. See f 575-578. NOTE. The use of the Aor. by Homer in comparisons is particularly fre- quent; as, "H^/cre $', u; an ns fyus fy*i* II. 432, cf. T. 33, &c. See also 575.2. y A past tense may be used, in speaking of that whi* h is present, with ref- erence to some past opinion, feeling, remark, action, or obligation ; thus, Ky^r^/f vx cio ^v B-iog, Venus was not then merely a goddess (as we supposed her to be), Eur. Hipp. 359. T A^' ol ofTu^Xvra, we xhfill corrupt and injure that, which (as we said) it 360 SYNTAX. USE OF TENSES. [BOOK III Improved by justice, and ruined by injustice, PI. Crito, 47 d. 'Ttvai r* el ffT^etrnyoi .t ftlv Kvoo? , [Cyrus ought to be living] Would that Cyrus were living ! ii. 1. 4. Qi/x i%(>w ftivroi ffx.ovt7v , But ought you not to be considering ? Apol. 3. Cf., in English, the familiar use of ought, the Impf. of owe, as a Pres. 5G8. IV. The tense may vary according as an action is viewed in its relation to the present time, or to the time of another action, either past or future. The tense of an Inf. or Part, is commonly determined by its connection with anoth- er verb, without regard to the present time. In the Ind., the tense is properly determined by the relation of the action to the present time ; but in Greek, if the Ind. is dependent upon another verb, its tense is often determined by the time of that verb, particularly in indirect quotation. In the Subj. and Opt. modes, from their very nature, there is commonly a union of the two considerations. Thus, v'S^i 'ncatrru ^utruv, he promised to give each man (the giving future at the time of the promise , i. 4. 13. "E^;y ofXircts .viri ot fiairiXia, and they hud indeed a suspicion, that he was leading them against the king, i. 3. 21. 'Etai^atf-i, Ji rat XMfAttf fjt,Yi Mutiny vii. 7. 19. 'Yr/o<)v/u,ariov av'riir%vi7ci>.iu- olonged ; but by the Aor., as momentary or transient. Thus, Ttvs fiiv ouv wsXrayraj t^i^etvro el Qoiga,goi xxi IJU,O.%OVTO fwsion 01 \yyv\ rtffec.1 ol ovrXiTO.!, tT^a.fovvXee.x.TOf A*!^? Dem. 45. 2. i^txXtyou, *i p.ti6i fguroi Ttvif ilff'iv, converse with them, and learn first who they are, iv. 8. 5. 'Ears/Jay oLfu.vra. atcauff^n, xgivetTi, KOU f/.ri vrgortfiov yr^o^a.^iiviTt Dem. 44. 2. Aafyvcti ol TOC.VTKS TK; vroXn: ^aXAOv, rj Tifftroaft'iovviv cio-^itv aw- r&J i. 1. 8. A?f/.iuXii/ffov '/if&tv ii. I. 17. 'AxaucreiTi ouv ff.au Too; 9-&>v V. 7. 5 " BXi'v/'OV,' ity'i-, " Tgos TO. oori, xcti ?5s u; U.VMTOC. ; etv ITXVOVTO i. 5. 3. Hence the great use of the definite tenses in the description of character. See Anab. i. ch. 9 ; ii. ch. 6. 573. c.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time of, or until another action ; but by the Aor., simply as done in its own time. Thus, o, iTdov fixtriXnev t> ^.a-rritt %os TOUS OCVTOU ffT^etrieaTots IGici^tTO tivai ol ^l uvrov 5w- vrxrtTctt $ia, C H ol TOU Teivr'X'ov 'TtDijU.*!* *Pt<- . ( P s t% i -r .ift.ov i'Xtyiv, oguvros %u ftt, Ter, having slain me ? Teuc. Having slain you ? You tell a wonder, indeed, if, being dead, you are yet alive. Men. For heaven preserves me, but, so far as lay in him, I am no more. Soph. Aj. 1126( 410). 2a ^w^av aa-t&eAav, rixvoi ?xrma * uxouffa, Eur. Ion, 1498. e.) By the definite tenses, as introductory; but by the Aor., as conclusive. Thus, 0? ery iii. 4. 26. 575. REMARKS. 1. As the Aor. is an achronic tense, except in the Ind. ( 565), it is in this mode only that the Pres. indefinite is wanting ( 168. ). It is commonly supplied by the Pres. definite, but sometimes by the Aor. or Per/. See REM. 2, and 233, 577, 578. 2. The AOR. in the Ind. is properly a past tense ; but, from the want of the Pres. indefinite, it often supplies the place of this tense, or is used achronicully. In these uses, it differs from the Pres. definite, in representing the action either more simply or singly, or with a certain expression of instantaneousness, energy, decisiveness, or completeness. 'Avj 5' eVav rii tepefy tufts a,} ju,txoov vrKx,vira,, I enjoy your threats, I laugh at your boast- ings of smoke, &c., Ar. Eq. 696. 'E^la^jjy TO pvfa, I welcome the omen, Soph. El. 668. 5 7 O. 3. The Greek has the power of giving to narration a wonder- ful variety, life, and energy, from the freedom with which it can employ and interchange the Aor., Impf., and Historical Pres. Without circumlocution, it can represent an action as continued or momentary ; as attempted or accom- plished ; as introductory or conclusive. It can at pleasure retard or quicken the progress of the narrative. It can give to it dramatic life and reality by exhibiting an action as doing, or epic vivacity and energy by dismissing it as done. It can bring a scene forward into the strong light of the present, and instantly send it back again into the shade of the past. The variety, vivaci- ty, and dramatic life of Greek narrative can be preserved but very imperfectly in translation, from the fact that the English has no definite tenses, except by circumlocution, and has far less freedom than the Greek in uniting the past and present tenses. Thus, *E?rt/ $1 xa.i evraw^' i-gugovt a/ExXjvf, X/Vov< di Kcti rov Xaaxoi&a.Z,ov t ori ovbctftou Kw^aj Qetivuro, olV aXXof *' ctvrou ovSut Tallin i. 10. 13 16. See iii. 4. 25 - 27, 38, 39 ; i. 8.23-27; iv. 7.10-14; v. 4. 16, 17; vi. 1. 5-13. 4. There is no precise line of division between the offices of the definite and indefinite tenses. In some cases it seems to be indifferent which are employed. And the definite tenses, as the generic forms ( 566. ), often occur, where the indefinite would seem to be more strictly appropriate. The use of the Impf. for the Aor. occurs especially in Horn, and Hdt. SYNTAX. USE OF TENSES. [BOOK III 5. In verbs in which the Aor. was not formed, or was formed with a differ* ent signification, the Impf. remained as both the definite and indefinite past tense ; as nv and tw (^ 53, 55, 301. 7), which are more frequently used as Aor. B. INDEFINITE AND COMPLETE. 577. I. The indefinite and the complete tenses are thus distinguished. The former represent an action as per formed in the time contemplated ; the latter represent it as, ai the time contemplated, having already been performed. In the former, the view is directed to the action simply ; in the latter, it is specially directed to the completion of the action, and to th'e state consequent upon its performance. Hence arise two special uses of the complete tenses ; the one to mark emphat- ically the entire completion or the termination of an action ; and the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an action. Thus, ToKLvra. pi* -rivo'irixi, such things has he done (and is now upon trial for), i. 6. 9. *E*ur avyx (?>(>oibi>Tvis vvv $1 . $on6wffa.rt t let your sluggishness have reached its full limits; and do yitu now assist, Th. i. 71. Tawra piv ?v, u Ew- tvbvipi rt ica.} &io*vfo$at, jrifa.'tffQu e made, Ar. Vesp. 1 1 29. *E/oTif Si tiro* T 9^v xfxXiTo-^a/, and going out they commanded the door [to be closed and to remain so] to be kept closed, H. Gr. v. 4. 7. 578. REMARKS, a. The consequences of an action are usually more obvious and more permanent in that which is acted upon, than in that which acts. The receiver feels the blow more deeply and longer than the giv- er. We find here a reason why the complete tenses are used so much more in the passive than in the active, and why, in the active, so many verbs want them altogether ( 256, 580). /?. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the consequences of an action, rather than to narrate the action, they naturally occur more frequently in the Part, than in the other modes. Some modern languages, as the Eng- lish, the French, the German, have no pass, form by inflection, except th Perf. Part. y. For the same reason, the transition in 233 is natural and easy. We Bubjoin an example, which marks strikingly the distinction between the Perf. used as a Pres. and the Aor. ; TVvv ai SKVOVTH, those who have died (refer- ring to the past event) are dead (referring to the present state consequent upo the event), Eur. Ale. 541 (but, >/>*-;, / am dyiiu), Ib. 264). CH. 5.] INDEFIN'TE AND COMPLETE. - FUTURE. 365 J. In the Epic, the use of the Plup. as Impf. or Aor. is more extended than in the Attic, and has perhaps some connection with the usage in 194. 3. Thus, Bi7xi<, went. A. 221. BXJW; E. 66. 5 7 d. {. The Perf. is sometimes called a past, and sometimes a present tense ; and neither without reason, since it marks the relation of a past action to the present time. The action which it denotes is past ; but the state consequent, to which it also refers, is present. The tense is therefore in its time, as in many languages in its form, COMPOUND, having both a past and a prfnent element. The comparative prominence of these elements varies in dif- ferent languages, in different words in the same language, and in different uses of the same word. We remark, in general, that the present element has a far greater prominence in the Greek than in the English Perf. . An action is sometimes so regarded as continued in its effect, that the Pres. supplies the place of the Perf. This is the common use of the Pres. in %x.u, to come, and o't^of^a.1, to go (cf., in Eng., / am come, and / am gone) ; and is not unfrequent in OC.KOVU and *\vta, to hear, /u.atv0avortunely, iv. 7. 3. KtJaa? $1 ouiru %iv, and Cyrus had not yet come, i. 5. 12. Ourt asraSs^a- K&a-tv, oTSo, yat.^ own O"%OVTUI, ' whither they have gone,' i. 4. 8. Ti? hftiTt Koveu.tv, as we [hearj have heard, v. 5. 8. "Agrt (ia.v6u.vu Eur. Bac. 1297* N/x&v*iv n QetrtXiet ii. 1. 4. ^5 SO. II. Unless the attention is specially directed to the effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently sup- plies the place of the specific Perf. and Plup. ( 566. ), as a more familiar, more vivacious, and often a shorter or more euphonic form. This use prevails especially in the active voice ( 578. ). The Aor. often occurs in immediate con- nection with the Perf. or Plup. Thus, 'E^' >j [xvjj Xsy&rcti M/day TCV Sarw^av B-nosutreti, oivu xsgciffecs ot,v<^riv, at which \_fountain~\ Midas is said to have caught the Satyr, having mixed it with wine i. 2. 13. TUT>IV yyK v TO V^UTOV, 'fyyty^oi^eTcn, no one shall be enrolled (the simple act) elsewhere, but shall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of enrolment) as he was at first, Id. Eq. 1370. a,t rs^|iT/, speak and it [shall be done at once] is done, Id. Plut. 1027. "Gray fo p* trSivu, *-t*av> Ton7v i. 3. 11. REMARKS, (a) The ideas of destiny, purpose, &c., are often expressed ly the simple Put. Especially is the Fut. Part,, both with and without us, used continually to express purpose ( 635). Thus, OJ tls TV* QouriXixni Tt%vri* TotidiuofAivoi . . TI !)!&' oouirt TUV i% uvoi'yxYif xctxaTaffvvvrav, it yi Tit- rr,ffovffi xo.} li-^viffovffi KO.\ ftyuffouvi xtti uyowrvniroviri, ' if they must hunger and thirst,' Mem. ii. 1. 17. Tav o^u; Qiuo-ofttvov, he that would live well, PI. Gorg. 491 e. 2wXX^fv/ KJ/^ov us a-Ttxrivu*. he apprehends Cyrus [as about to put him to death] with the design of putting him to death, i. 1.3. " CR. 5.] USE OF MODES. INTELLECTIVE. 3fi7 c/? igavtrx, he sent one to say, ii. 5. 2. Tliftipjlt}; wa^a &, if, while possessed of the bow, he shall discover me, I am undone, and I shall destroy you besides, Soph. Ph. 75. E/ SI Sj x.a.TO.K'rivitri fts, o v'cp.os a.v.7ree,i Eur. Or. 940. Qvx ti Z,uvig%a>v, vv'ix.' $ ffiffufffitQa. Ki'ivov &iov ffu'i-vros, n oi%op,tff0' up, ; Soph. Tr. 83. ' A.vriff'ra.Xx.a, ffoi TV$ rov Xoyov lu^oi Isocr. 2 b. For presents which are commonly used as futures, see 200. b. 585. V. The FUTURE sometimes occurs for a. present or past tense, as a less direct and positive form of expression, or as though the action were not yet finished ; thus, Toupov 5' lyu . . tr-riou,' j$i7v fiovXvtroftai, 'I shall wish,' i. e. ' am resolved,' Soph. (Ed. T. 1076. XOP. H.a,7lts riSvuffi x,* 1 ?' /"^aJa ffifav. 'IA2. O't/u.ot, ri *.'i%tt; ; "II? /*' a^/Uo-aj, yvvui Eur. Med. 1309. nr,; ; 8 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III. all similar statements in grammar, has primary reference to the conceptions of the mind, rather than to the reality of things ; that is, to employ the techni- cal language of philosophy, it must be taken subjectively, rather than objectively The contingent is often, from strong assurance or vivid fancy, spoken of as actual ; while, on the other hand, the actual, from diffidence or courtesy a some other cause, is not unfrequently spoken of as contingent. This state- ment is also limited by the generic use of the Ind., as mentioned above. 2. An action which is now future has, from the very nature of things, somf degree of contingency ; and therefore, in the Fut. tense, no distinction is made between the Ind. and the Subj., but any rule requiring in other tenses tin Subj. in this requires the Ind. And even the use of the Fut. opt. appears ta be limited to the oratio obliqua, in which it takes the place of the Fut. ind. in the oratio recta ( 607, 608). \) 5 9 9 3. The particle of contingence, a.v, may commonly be dis- tinguished from the conjunction oiv for id* ( 603) by its position, as it never stands first in its clause, which is the usual place of the conjunction. It chief- ly occurs with the past tenses of the Ind. and with the Opt., to mark them as depending upon some condition expressed or implied ; with the Subj. after various connectives ; and with the Inf. and Part., when the distinct modes to which they are equivalent would have this particle. It is extensively used with the Subj., in cases where it would have been omitted with the Opt., for the reason, as it would seem, that the separation, in form, of the Subj. from the Ind. was later and less strongly marked than that of the Opt. ( 177). The insertion or omission of a* for the most part follows general rules, but in some cases appears to depend upon nice distinctions of sense, which it is diffi- cult to convey in translation, or upon mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its use in not a few cases, manuscripts differ, and critics contend. Verbs with which y is connected are commonly translated into Eng. by the potential mode. 589. Contingency is viewed as either present or past; that is, a contingent event is regarded either as one of which there is some chance at the present time, or merely as one of which there was some chance at some past time. PRESENT CONTINGENCY is expressed either by the Subj., or by the pri- mary tenses of the Ind. ; and PAST CONTINGENCY, either by the Opt., or by the secondary tenses of the Ind. The tenses of the Subj. and Opt. are therefore related to each other as vresent and past tenses, or, hi sense as well as in form ( 168, 196), as //// and secondary tenses ; and the rule above may be thus given in a more con- densed form : PRESENT CONTINGENCY is EXPRESSED BY TUB PRIMARY TENSES ; PAST CONTINGENCY, BY THE SECONDARY. NOTE. Future contingency is contained in present ; for that which will b contingent, is of course contingent now. $ *5DO REMARKS. 1. It cannot be kept too carefully in mind, that the distinction above has no reference to the time of the ncrnrrmce. of an event, but only to the time of its ,-nHtiiiaem-i/. Tims, in the t\><> >.-i,tc!ices. " I can go if I wish," and "I could go, if I wished," the time of the .'/'"'we/ itscll is in CJI. 5.J INTELLECTIVE. 369 both the same, 5. e. future. But in the former sentence, the contingency is present, because it is left undecided what the person's wish is, and therefore there is still some chance of his going ; while in the latter, the contingency is pist, because it is implied that the person does not wish to go, and therefore, although there was some chance of his going before his decision, there is now no chance. Hence, in the former sentence, present tenses are employed ; and in the latter, past. 2. The limits of past are far wider than those of present contingency ; for there is nothing which it is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may not conceive that there was some chance at some distant period in past eternity. The dividing line between present and past contingency may perhaps be thus drawn ; whatever is supposed with some degree of present expectation, or in present view of a decision yet to be had, belongs to the head of present contin- gency ; but whatever is supposed without this present expectation or view of a decision, to the head of past contingency. Past contingency, therefore, includes, (1.) all past supposition, whether with or without expectation at that time; (2.) all supposition, whether present or past, which does not imply expectation, or contemplate a decision, that is, all mere supposition ; (3.) all supposition, whether present or past, in despite of a prior decision. Thus : .A. PRESENT CONTINGENCY. I will go, if I can have leave (and I intend to ask for it). I think, that I may go, if I can have leave. I wish, that you may go. B. PAST CONTINGENCY. (1.) Past supposition. / thought, that I might go, if I could have leave. I wished, that you might go. (2.) Present supposition not implying expectation or contemplating a de- rision. / would go, if I should have have (but I have no thought of asking for it). / could go with perfect ease. I shoidd like to go. (3.) Present supposition in despite of a prior decision. . In regard to the present. / would go, if I had leave (but I have none, and therefore I shall not go). /3. In regard to the past. / would have gone, if I had had leave (but I had none, and there- fore did not go). 5O 1. 3. As the differe ice between the Subj. and Opt. is one of time, rather than of essential office, some have chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general conjunctive or contingent mode. With this change, the number and offices of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between the Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes somewhat more obvious (see f 33). Ac- cording to this classification, which deserves the attention of the student. 370 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the old phraseolo- gy, the Present Subjunctive becomes the Definite Present (or the Present) Conjunctive Present Optative " " Definite Past (or the Imperfect) Conjunctive. Aorist Subjunctive " " Aorist Present (or Primary) Conjunctive. Aorist Optative " " Aorist Past (or Secondary) Conjunctive. Perfect Subjunctive " " Perfect Present (or the Perfect) Conjunctive. Perfect Optative " " Perfect Past (or the Pluperfect) Conjunctive. 4. Contingent sentences, like actual ( 566-568, 576, 584, 585), are liable to an interchange and blending of tenses. Past contingency is often conceived of as present ; and present, as past. Hence, primary tenses take the place of secondary, and secondary of primary. This interchange may be observed particularly between the Subj. and Opt. modes. 592. The Subj. and Opt. occur, for the most part, in dependent clauses ; and indeed some grammarians have re- fused to regard them as being ever strictly independent. It results from the principles already laid down, that, in their use as dependent modes, the Subj., for the most part, follows the primary tenses ; and the Opt., the secondary. To this gen- eral rule, however, there are many exceptions. NOTE. In the application of this rule, the tenses of the Imperat., as from its very nature referring to present or future time, are to be regarded as pri- mary tenses J those of the Inf. and Part., as primary or secondary, according to the finite verbs, whose places they occupy, or, in general, according to those upon which they themselves depend. 59*1. In the expression of contingency, the Ind. is properly distinguished from the Subj. and Opt. by the greater positiveness with which it implies or excludes present anticipa- tion. Thus supposition with present anticipation is expressed by the primary tenses ; but there is here this general distinc- tion, that the Fut. Ind. anticipates without expressing doubt, while the Subj. expresses doubt. On the other hand, supposi- tion without present anticipation is expressed by the secondary tenses ; but with this general distinction, that the Opt. supposes, either with some past anticipation, or without regard to any de- cision, while the secondary tenses of the Ind. suppose in despite of a prior decision. RKMAKKS. . Tn the expression of contingency, the Impf. ind. has com- monly the same difference from the Aor. and Plup., as, in English, the Impf. ind. and potential from the Plup. In respect to the time of the acJion, therefore, the contingent Impf. ind. commonly refers to present time, and the Aor. and Plup. to past. See 599, 601. $', 603. *. |3. We may, say in general, that supposition as fact is expressed by the ap- propriate tense of the Ind. (i--i 587, 603. ) ; supposition that may become fact, by the Subj. ; supposition without regard to fact, by the Opt. ; and sup- position contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Ind. ; while in these tensoa CH. 5.] INTELLECTIVE. 371 there is this distinction, that the Impf. expresses supposition contrary to present fact, but the Aor. and PI up. contrary to past fact. y. The Epic sometimes joins xi with the Fut. ind., when it depends upon a condition expressed or understood ; as, E< $' 'O$v 'ityn p-lv civ TWOS loa.v t for he would often say, that he was in love with some one, Mem. iv. 1 . 2. I'M d'i TIVX o^curi Ss/vav oWa oixavoftoy . ., oiioivtt av fuvfori a.tyi'i'kiro, aXX* dti x-Xilu vr^otrt^i^ov i. 9. 19. E" a,va.XunTOix.v Ivpnyotia. av tin PI. Gorg. 502 d. This use of the Opt. is particularly frequent in argumentative conclusions. ft. <$>n(t.}, xa.} olx. oiv 0v0/7v, / confess, and [would not] will not deny it, Dem. 576. 17. 'AXX* ovxlr av x^xt/u-i Ar. Plut. 284. MEN. Oy* av /MJti- ftnv. IIP. QLV 'iyuy u.q>wop.a.i Eur. Iph. A. 3'10. This use of the Opt. is particularly frequent in the first person. y. Ilo? fiu ; -rat. VTU ; ix.q>iis OVTUS lea ; Soph. Ant. 315. Ka^fl-Axor)6'ho'u $v Tt . ., ovbtl; ftvix'tTt f&iivri iv. 8. 13. NOTES. (1.) This use is most frequent in those forms of the Subj. which have no forms of the Ind. closely resembling them, viz., the Aor. pass, and the 2d Aor. It is, on the other hand, less frequent in the Pres., resembling the Pres. ind., and in the 1st Aor. act. and mid., resembling the Fut. ind. (cf. 601. N.). In this emphatic negation, the Subj. is regularly preceded by a double 372 . SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III negative, ou p.*. The construction may be explained by supplying a word oj phrase expressing fear ^cf. 602. 3) ; thus, Ow ^oixa. p* yvua-t, I have MO fear that they would know. Compare such passages as, Ou $cos, p.r, %i lus, H* ft fiM*y Ar. Eccl. 650. (2.) The similar use of ou p.* with the Fut. ind. is to be explained in the same manner ; as, OS ffoi pri fti0i-4>i>peti von, never will I follow you, Soph. El. 1052. 596. We proceed to the application of the general principles which govern the use of the distinct modes, to par- ticular kinds of sentences, which may be termed, from their offices or connectives, desiderative (expressing wish, from de- sidero, to desire), final, conditional, relative, and complemen- tary ($ 329. N.). (i.) Desiderative. ^597. .A wish is expressed either with or without o definite looking forward to its realization. In the former case, it is expressed by the primary tenses ; in the latter case, by the secondary. In the former case, (a.) if the wish is expressed with an assurance that it will be realized, the Ind. Fut. is used but, (/?.) otherwise, the Subj. mode. In this use, both the Ind. Fut. and the Subj. may be regarded as less direct modes of expression instead of the Imperat. In the latter case, (/.) if the time for realizing the wish Is already past, the secondary tenses of the Ind. are used with ft y'^ and '# * but, (d.) other- wise, the Opt. mode. "(See 590, 593.) Hence .the Opt. becomes the simplest and most general form of expressing a wish ; and from the frequency of this use, it has derived its name ( 169. 3). Thus, (.) "fit ouv foirifftri, xai viifi(r6i poi, thus then [you will do] do, and listen to me, PI. Prot. 338 a. M5b ruvV i^iT; Msch. Sept. 250. NOTES. (1.) A wish is often expressed in the form of a question. Hence in Greek, as in other languages, the interrogative Fut. often supplies the place Of the Imperat. ; as, Oux a|^' us rd%iffra. ; xeti . ceQiri parity, [Will you not carry] (kfrry her away instntitly, and le.ace hern/one, Soph. Ant. 8b5. "A|-u rif fA&i>y liZ^o rv /WJ^ poi ; 1'etvrn* $' Ixrt Id. (Ed. T. 1069. Ou ff.ri X*X- rtif, A.X' otKaXovSriffus i/u.o'i ; [Won't you not talk] Dont talk, hut folloir IH<\ Ar. Nub. 505. (2.) For the Fut. with *** in the plare of the Iinpcnit., st-n C 60-2. 3. (3.) The Aor. and 1'res. are also u^ed with TI lv oi. or rl <>u. in tlie earnest expression of a wish; as, T Jv, 'itpn a Kw^oj, ov . . 'i\i\a.j /u.oi ; Why then, said Cyrus, hare yon not told mef i. e tell me, Cyr. ii. 1. 4. T/ nun, i? 6" Si, ov* tpurft ; PI. Lys. 211 d. t5O8. (/3.) M xvctjuivtapi*, let us not wait, iii. 1. 24. Mj ^iXXw- fjtn, u uvlpit, XX* K*tX0evTts iftn otioiTrtt II). 46. ^vo ruv -r^r'vra.rut CTT^X- TWyoi {V/^tiXuWwv o-r/!', ix-rvfofteu Eur. Here. 529. M vowrr.i rauTa.,f/<> nut do this, vii. 1.8. M3iv a.fvu.-/,fr,rl i'vtx* Tj. j as, M>) fxduri p.1- . . p.iiri roXtftt'irt vi. 6. 18. M*?T' oxvi'in, p.r,r ^ivxs, Would that you had a better spirit, Eur. El. 1061. Ei ya. ro; Eur. Med. I. E< yu.% u$i*.ov PL Cri- to, 44 d. So the Impf. tSt*.i are sometimes used as particles. GOO. (S.) O/ Slot etvor'io-aivro, May the gods requite! iii. 2. 6. ITflXXa ftoi XKya-Sa, yivatTO V. 6. 4. ~M.K- fttv . ., >; T/J . 'A^/X>!< 9fet^fretirt t $01*} %i X^KTOS ft'iyct^ ftri'bi s v. E7 uot yivmro tpjoy- yos, O, that I had a voice! Eur. Hec. 836. EJ/i pfatn ywm Soph. CEd. T. 10&S. t E/ ya.% ysvoiro Cyr. vi. 1.38. 'Ilj oXaiTo *a.yx.a.x.us Eur. Hipp. 407. Hat av oAo^y ; [How might I die?] Would that I might die! Id. Ale. 8u5 These expressions, except the last, are elliptical ; thus, E? /u.u yivmro qS'oy yo?, fi'botft.nv oiv, If there were a voice to me, I should be glad ; 'Bou\oif*,v* oiv ut cXoiro va.yx.at.Ku?. See 599, 603. y. Very rarely, iltt is joined with the Subj. in the expression of wish ; as, EM' . . fa Soph. Ph. 1092. 3. Except in interrogation, v is not used with the Opt. of wish, which is thus often distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses. Thus, r ll -raT, yi- veic warjof ivrv^iffrigos, TO. $' aXX* 2/MMf xa< ytvfl<* av vv *;, My son, 374 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other respects tike him; antl then you would no' be bad, Soph. Aj. 550. (n.) Final ^ 6O 1. After final conjunctions (IV, OTTW?, 5?, pij ocpgn poet.), a present, purpose is expressed by (.) the Sub}., or (/?.) in the Fut., by the Ind. ; but a past, purpose by (y.) the Opt., or sometimes (5.), when the realization is now impossi- ble, by the past tenses of the Ind. (See 589, 593). In nnal sentences, introduced by a relative ( 531. a), the modes are used in the same manner. Thus, (.) ''! ti^nTi, so that you may know, i. 3. 1 5. 'E^o/ 2a? etvra., ovruf . . Cyr. i. 4. 10. "Siu^ovXiuu tyu, rovav^a TOUTOV Ixfoouv i TKt *a.v; /u.trsfi/u.-^'ix.'ro, ofus ocrX/raj a.<7roi ns iTifaffiS yi- voiro iv. 4. 22. Etiv ai YIt]yais $ti)

./. x/y, xf>-ni y'fyvotvro PI. Meno, 89 b. "E5i; ra ivi^u^o. ron \o.i7v, us f&n$', tl ifrovXiro, tivvot.ro civ TKUTO. i^afxrctv vii. 6. 23. GO 2* RKMARKS. 1. A past purpose, still continued or conceived of as present ( 591. 4), may be expressed by the Subj. ; and on the other band, a present purpose, viewed as doubtful or as connected with something past, distant, or contingent ( 590), may be expressed by the Opt. The Subj. for the Opt. may be 'remarked particularly after the Aor. used for the Perf. ( 580), and in indirect quotation ($ 610). The two modes are some- times both used in the same connection. Thus, 'Ef'trriois ei ou*. tyu^*, "not. us n^io-ro. "oioiyris PI. Crito, 43 b. *E}A.^a "ooftuv* p.* pot ri fii/u,-J/i]0-0i Eur. Med. 214. "il/^ira f^iffStis oiyovtroi, o'i-ri^ TO. ff$irtot. oio-uM, ti TH i"n ., '/> oifa.yyilXiuo-i ii. 5. 36. Compare "tfiSoTv- ro and i-rifuvreti iii. 4. 1,34. "\aut ~oi fou ri olfao-Koi-TTti ;, py XtzZtuv pi 'bix.w i-nOy i. 3. 10. (>Zovftxi Si, p.* rivets faovas r$ova.7s tugr,p. ol 1vva.i- Govftivoi di, T&/J ^^r) W5;XoiJvT< vvra.x.ouo'a.t Ib. iv. 5. 19. 'ATa* ^aoj, ' (T/V& ^ *'S s' "*/**' C s< ^. ^^9/- ] PI. Meno, 77 a. M . . ^ah!^ Eur. Ale. 315. Cf. 595. S, 598. 2. (in.) Conditional GO 3* In sentences connected by conditional conjunc- tions, there is a great variety of conception, and consequently of expression. The CONDITION may be assumed, either (.) as a fact, or (/?.) as that which may become a fact, or (/.) as a mere supposition without regard to fact, or (<5.) as contrary to fact. In the first case (.), it is expressed by the appro- priate tense of the Ind. ; in the second (/?.), by the Subj. ; in the third (/.), by the Opt. ; and in the fourth (<5.), by a past tense of the Ind. (see 590, 593). Of these mo'des, the Ind. and Opt. are usually connected by a, and the Subj. by id? (= a and av the contingent particle) or its shortened forms, TJV and V exceptions (f. ), however, occur, though rare in the Att. writers, and some of them doubtful. The form of the CONCLUSION is, for the most part, determined by thai of the condition. In the first case (a.), the conclusion is regularly made by the appropriate tense of the Ind. ; in the second (/?.), by the Fut. ind. ; in the third (/.), by the Opt. with V and in the fourth (5.), by a past tense of the Ind. with av. The form of the conclusion (.), however, often depends upon other causes, besides its relation to the condition, and cases of ana- coluthon are very frequent. There is (?;.). sometimes even a union of different forms in the same construction. If (#.) the conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is commonly determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con- forms. Thus, (a.) Ei ft\9 ufe,t~; \6i\iri l^o^a.1 t-ri ravret, ififfSttt vplv ficvXofteti ti S* iis TarTT p.1 viyt.7ffl>.i, ovSiv Vo$u.ffiZ,op,iii iii. 1. 25. E?T >oi irtXii TI ux oSrug IriXfi vii. 6. 16. REMARK. Supposition is sometimes made in the Greek, as in other Ian- 376 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III guages, by the Tnd. without a conjunction ; as, Ka) Sj #ai~xiv tlra truf , Eur. Hel. 1059. (/J.) "Hv ya.(> TOUTO \a.up.t.v, ov vvioTi/u.rifftff0i i. 4. 14. See Ib. 15. (a. and /3.) Oix a^a i'n fx,a%i7Tai, tl v Tavrxig ov fAct^tiron retlg fiftigais a ' aXnStuffyS) ti-ria-^vovf^cti [= ^uuto\ i. 7. 18. NOTE. The place of the Fut. in the conclusion may be supplied by the game forms of expression as are elsewhere substitutes for this tense ; thus, "Eav ayv xara f&'ioo; v^.KTTufAtv *ai rxovrufAtv, fi tvgtQri Xiyeav ffoi TMUT', 'iyuy av r^iwya/jv fo.6ot Soph. CEd. T. 839. *Hi ^' fif^i?; vix^ffufti^ fifAOt; ^? . . otan t vtxuptv, (>uyv iifteis trturvgioi n $ov\ivafjt.ivovf, 'i/Jsiui at ~etvoi/tt rouf ivt^yirctf. Had I known this before, I had never accompanied you ; and now I shall depart. For King Medocus would by no means commend me, should I drive out our benefactors, vii. 7. 1 1. (i.) Ef (>n xhi-^ai . ., rf|iTi isr) 5/a?a/'?Ti) V. 6. 9. E/ t%oip.i, us TA^HTTO. eVXa tTa/au ^tj> Cyr. ii. 1. 9. Oi* a w^aSa/nv TOV ira'^a TOV iVijav, i/' / rat/r' fircti Ar. Eccl. 161. Ei yaj yt;ar*i? if ;y Yen. 12. 22. As/vav av ifi, i/ v^v fj.it . . 99yyv&put . . I^;ITI, iv 5l r^i rius Xf>ovw . . S-avaTij; i*Xa^Ti Lys. 179. 32. Ei fit* vXeia iffifffa.i piXXu i*ava . ., n/(7; ay -rXia/Atjv t! 31 /tiXXoifH* V. 6. 12. Oi* av . . ayo^iuis, olVi xi . . dvititis P>- 184. (^\ "Ecra^ii/fljttwy, "ya, ii n Jiairo, uQtXoi'nv ttlrov i. 3. 4 ( 601). 'Er/?at/Xiw- ivftt, u(, ^y Jwvwyrai, aa'aXfV&a'iy iii. 1. 35. ETTy, si a.vToy ooiti Ifrietf %it.iouf t on . . *ara*av0i av i. 6. 2. OO4. REMARKS. 1. The condition is often (.) under- stood ; or (/5.) instead of being expressed in a distinct clause, ts incorporated in the conclusion ; or (/.) is expressed by a relative clause, or by an independent instead of a dependent sentence. In all these cases, the form of the conclusion is CiJ. 5.] IN CONDITIOT^AL SENTENCES. 377 properly the same as if the condition had been formally ex- pressed. Thus, (a.) "E-n out av yivaie TM l/u-v a^fX^a) TO\I{AIOS, i/ati d\

ivctt, and I miyli t Itave said that we ouyht, iii. 2. 24 Ov5' O.VTOV a,>K>r{lita.i av WtXaiftiv, nor should we MV'.S/J to slay him (if we could), ii. 3. 23. "HW av a*^Va//, / should most gladly hear (if I might hear), ii. 5. 15. T?v iXjz/^/av lA./>sv av i. 7. 3. 'Oxv/jv p.lv av i. 3. 17. 'ESoi/Xtf^v y av, I should have wished, PI. Phsedr. 228 a. b. To the use of the Opt. with av just noticed, may be referred its em- ployment to express permission, or command in the softened or indifferent lan- guage of permission; as, 2u /u.lv x.a/u.i,oi; av trvv Tei%ti Id. El. 1491. Its use for the Pres. and Fut. ind. (S 595) may be referred in like manner to ellipsis. c. From the different idiom of the two languages, the Opt. is often best translated, as in the examples just given, by our Pres. potential ; thus, 'Ax A* il-raiTi av, but you may say [might if you were disposed], vii. 6. 1 6. a/*jTi a Ib. 23. See also 600. (/3.) BavXfl.'^jjv ' av, eixovTas uvriuv [_="* a-T/a/^/] KJ^ry, Xa^~v OC.UTOY i. ^tjv, r^iivot,T' av WOO,TTH a ISauXsra Mem. i 4. 14. "Avw TOU TO, TotttVTot l^/v [=^ < ,") TO. Tato-vTO, /;^v], . . OVK av oia; T' riv PI. Pha^do, 99 a. Ni- jtuvT's ftkv ov&tvot. av xarxavfl;v, ^TT*)^VT&IV ^f OLUTUV t>v$ii; av X/^^/>? iii. 1. 2. "llircrf^ av ^^tift,oi TJ; irtaj vixtjs i. 5. 8. "Avrto av civ $ oca wot Iv ipn/Aia. ireir,(riia t 'iXnfffi, alx, av etup.cio-oufii, si TIVO. iu*iTi vi. 1. 29. "Hxovav . . on, ii ^tixfanv , ., ^v ^tv fiaukivvTect, ^tctGwovTai iv. 1. 3. 4 The particle av is sometimes omitted where it would regularly be insert- 378 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III ed ; as, 'T3.itr%vvo/tiv ftivrai, / . . tl^Ta-r^y, / certainly should be ashamed, if I had been deceived, vii. 6. 21. E/ ' dpe'ivov ei 9-i< yvup-w i%ovtriv, turu%ris t*W lyea Eur. Ph. 1200. E/ ^\ pri . . yo-ftsv . ., QoGov -TTx^ff^iv Id. Hec. 1111. Auy/zfftv TI'S av^&Jy v^ft^atrlct x.u.ra.ffj^oi j Soph. Ant. 604. OUTS ^outr tXay nor could she have done it ujiobserved, Id. El. 914. 5. Attic courtesy ( 595) often gives the conditional form to complementa* ry clauses after words of emotion ; as, T&t Wctu/Actret, ti [= or/] . . rifas, this I wonder at, that you place, PI. Rep. 348 e. (iv.) Relative. GOG. A sentence, which is introduced by a relative (or by a similar particle of time, or place) referring to that which is indefinite or general or not yet determined, has a species of contingency ( 594), and may hence employ the Subj. or Opt. ; the Subj., when a future determination is now contemplated, but otherwise, the Opt. ( 590. 2). Which mode should be employed will commonly depend upon the preceding verb (^ 592). After these connectives V is regular- ly used with the Subj. (sometimes compounded with the con- nective) ; but not with the Opt., unless for some additional rea- son. Thus, iTt7v vrctgK TOUTOV, u [^definite, viz. Cyrus~\ TJV Ta/v. E/ t x,eti TU viysft'ovt wtfriuirofAtv, cu ([indefillitej av 'the guide whom Cyrus may give us,' i. 3. 16. *Ey&> ya,^ oxvoiw p\v av vet TXaitx. if/.itiviiv, rif/uv J/j, . . .oj ty'iyvtro iiri&ouXiuuv ii. 6. 23. 2t/ VfAiv fA\v av oi[jt.a.i iHvai Ttftias, OTOV civ ta i. 3. 6. "O'Tow ,4tv trT^ocTiryo; truing i"^, Tflv ffr^itTnyov ?ra^xaXowv ovoftv oi o"%oira, TOV u^ayT^atTtiyov iii. 1. 32. ri0v/jt.ifa. p.ax,^oTa.Tov{ ii. 2. 12. 2/Tat/vra/ . ., J'rav [= ort av] oi eio%ovrif ffti/u.weairi Crr. i. 2. 8. "On ^' i'|a riv 3i/vv ytv/vT, . . aV'AnTov ii. 6. 12. *Ey& $i,.e-roTetv [= aVert av] xa/- {Of >J, | vii. 3. 36. 'YJrioiviv ei-ro 'iTfev, o-rort yv/u,va,j jtttv av raj T/J, ^^up.at.i tTi^dav [=^ t?T/5>7 avj ? a^r/iva/ /3ut/X>!T/, . X.O.KUI; i. 4. 8. "E&;; KJ^w truiu./ui^,iia.v ii. 1. 2. ']wj/5>i ^1 T/ f/u^aya/fv, iv. 5. 8. As/Va/ airot/, ^o nilyivuaf, e'v pet xvvit . . lluvrcti P. 109. 'flf t TI -rou ariXaef H. 16. ( v. ) Complementary. GOT. As the complementary sentences which it is most important CH. 5.J IN COMPLEMENTARY SENTENCES. 379 here to notice occur in what is termed the oratio obllqua, it will be necessary to remark upon the character of this form of discourse, and upon its distinc- tion from the oratio recta. There are two ways of quoting the words of a person. In the first, we simply repeat his words, without change or in- corporation into our own discourse ; as, He said, " / will go." This is termed DIRECT QUOTATION, or in Lat., ORATIO RECTA. In the second, we make such changes and insert such connec- tives as will render the quotation an integral part of our own discourse ; thus, He said, that, he would go. This is termed INDIRECT QUOTATION, or in Lat., ORATIO OBLIQUA. This dis- tinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of persons, and even to general truths and appearances. NOTE. Of these two methods of quotation, the former is dramatic in its character, presenting before us the speaker in the utterance of his own words ; but the latter is narrative, simply relating what the speaker has said. This relation is made in Greek, by the use either of the distinct modes with their connectives or of the incorporated modes. We have occasion at present to treat only of the use of the distinct modes. For the use of the incorporated modes, see 619. GO 8. In the oratio obliqua, a thing is presented not as actual, but as dependent upon the statement, thoughts, or feel- ings of some person, and consequently as having some degree of contingency. Hence it is properly expressed by a contin- gent mode. This use, however, is confined to the Opt., which limitation may be explained as follows. The oratio obliqua, from the very nature of quotation,. commonly respects the past, and the cases in which it respects the actual present are too few and unimportant to require special provision ; while in those cases, so constantly recurring, in which the past is spoken of as present, the very vivacity and dramatic character of this form of narrative forbids the use of a contingent mode. Hence the Subj. is used in the oratio obliqua only in such cases as would admit it in the oratio recta, while, on the other hand, of the distinct modes, The optative is the mode appropriate to the oratio obliqua in past' time. With this Opt. &V is not joined, unless for some additional reason. Thus, *Hxt> ayytXaj Xsywv, en XjX/T&i? i*n "Suiwifis rot. cixgct, a messenger came toying, that Syennesis had left the heights, i. 2. 21. ASreti yfturcav O.VTOUS, nvt; tnv. 'O 6\ \o/jt,r,vtv; nwt Yligfirn, oft Ttzoa. QxffiXiia; Togii/oivro TPO; ro fa.T^a.'rnv. A.I dt aTs^o/vavro, on oux ivrotJuQa. E/'JJ, aXX* dwigai oirov fa.pu.ffa.y- fyr,v iv. 5. 10. ' Qt t'lvriv o 2arw0of on olf/.u^iiri, it i/.vj oricawviiTinv, iirr.Piro ' "A* 5s a-ieaVM, olx. 0.0 ,". if"n, " olfAu^o/uia.! ;" H. Gr. ii. 3. 56. "O n ^t foirtffot it $it' av B-oivai fttt alTo; Soph. (Ed. T. 1245. 2xaT*v, u* fcC*/MM> ii. 4. 24. 'O $' t^Xira. >, OT/ . . -T^awj Xya/ i. 5. 14. 'E^^*aay, oV< ovba.fx.ou K-vaa; QOIIVOITO i. 10. 16. T/a-rt7s," Proxenus said, " I am the very person you inquire /or," ii. 4. 1 6. O< 2 T'Tay, tn " ix.a.vo'i lo~fAii> ' V. 4. 10, "Iffu; ay *'Ta/v, on " u 2^x^a}y." * A.ta.7os ^ } O-TO*$UV rixoiiv, a.v'>f, o'tTivts Ixttvo} tffovrett ii. 3. 4. See Ib. 6. ^ O 1 1 . 2. The use of the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, may extend not merely to the leading verbs in the quotation, but also to verbs joined with these by relatives and other connectives (cf. $ 619. ); as, "EXyay, OTI . . tin . ., oY ^-TIJ Hxeitv, 'through which they had come,' iii. 5. 15. "EXiyav . ., ITI TU.VTO; |/a Xtya/ 2fyVjf %n/u,uv ya.o lit], 'for it was winter,' vii. 3. 13. Even though an infinitive precedes; as, 'Eoa, ayi/v TO ffTa.rivpa. XO.TU, pio-ai r TUV voXtpiuv, on ixu fioio-iXivs *, 'because there was the king,' i. 8, 12. 3. In complementary sentences, where doubt is expressed, and a primary CII. 5.] VOLITIVE. - INCORPORATED. 381 tense precedes, the Suhj. is sometimes used, especially in the 1st Pers. The connective is sometimes omitted, and even the leading verb itself. Tints, Oi* o/T, I/' X^t/50. EiVs /SayX v^afffns *l v p.iv itp'uvrxi, . . xeiirti; ; Id. Cycl. 131 ). OlvAaxf, 01 teyevrw Hdt. i. 89. O 1 3. 2. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Im- perat. is sometimes used with 'trv); rs/s, TxTt ffwA.arr ras ns Ib. 1191. "Ira ns, EiVayyEXXi Eur. Bac. 173. See 500. a. 3. Such familiar imperatives as Hyi, iivi, /$, and a.Ttuf&a. tj^t] iv K/X/x/a iTv, he perceived, that the army of Meno was now in Cilicia, i. 2. 21. Aiyovtriv, on i*} TOUTO 'i^x, 9 '" veti Cyr. i. 2. 6. Ylapaxii/oi^ovro, oiruf xa.ro, KO%V$W iiro<.*.otja.rtvf*,a,, on fl^x it KtXixia %, he perceived the army of Meno, that it was now in Cilicia, i. 2. 21 v. I. 'ILxlyovro -ro/iiuffo/tivos H. Gr. iv. 2. 41 ( 583. a)- "Eflrija.^-! Tivet iaouvree, ii. 5. 2. 'E^^o^etj^a . . @ori0riffovTts revraif vii. 7. 17. y and 6. "EJo^tv uuToJs ^ra^/rwrja i; revs A.etxtba.ifj.vious tJveti, run ^i* \yx,y.r l fjt.u.r(tit Tioi fjt.v}6\v a.'ToXoyriffOfit.ivoii;, , . onZ.uira.1 at Th. i. 72. i. For examples, see 551. . ']i.voftigo/u.tv eifyei iiveti [= fi/u.cis a.'uvs Tva<], we thought that we were wor- thy, Cyr. vii. 5. 72 (cf. Na^/2^* ycto ifta,urov toixivxi Ib. V. 1. 21). Na,iui . . a3^a ee.ya.6ot ct-roxnivuv [= oietwrov ai-roxriivovTa. , consider yoursdf putting t<> di'utU a ijood man, vi. 6. 24. OT^a/ jlv< Tiftios i. 3. 6 (cf. OJJua; ^tv, MX 5' iyu, Anfi/'v /*i PI. Charm. 173 a). 'O^w /utv l^a^a^Taywv Eur. Med. 3:")0 cf. 'Oou di fjt tgyov Ss;vy i^tigyet/rfAitnv Soph. Tr. 706). Owx a KOI'ITTUV ifiit u*, TotUTOt, irgavitet).i7ro Tabs ffiivovTUf, aXX* aTSg lu n$n ixvrov riTTova, oWa, TKVTCI i Cyr. i. 4. 4. AjXa? npuv rov -rXourov Ar. Pint. 587 (cf. 'ATopwa* dyaffui u.Tu.voiovvros Sf&f&a, 0w; ufAoXoynxotri Id. MeilO, 97 a. "0/u.oioi fa*9 Su.vu.a.'^tiv (.. /. Ba.i/fta.^ovrts}, they seemed to be wondering, iii. 5. 13. 2. The contingent particle may be joined with the Inf. and Part., when- ever it would be joined with the distinct modes of which they supply the place. The Inf. and Part, are then commonly translated into Eng. by the potential mode ( 588). Thus, E/ $ T/J ita? ftij, a/^a. dt'7rot)vr l j [sc. Vx/Ti;/y], ' He said No? v. 8. 5. 4. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often a union of two constructions ; as, *Ayy<\Xt ' OOX.M wgoffrdiis [uniting ciyyeXXt S' ogxcp and ciyyiXXt ^', ogxo* f(>oirTi@i'tf\ and announce I with an oath, adding it], adding an oath, Soph. El. 47. "Or/ /3XXsn(io.a(la,t\ \ [What shall you want of us to do with us?] In what shall you wish to employ us ? V. 4. 9. TLri/vptif TUV av^dv oGuf*.origovs tJvui iii. 2. 1-5 (cf. 'Aya^aJV ft i>p.7v rrit$ l7a iii. 2. 11). ria^ayye/Xa? Tjy trguTw %iXu>orvv tvtfffai Cyr. ii. 4. 3 (see 402, 424. 2). Ot^tv %%6iro o-vruv reZ.iftovvruv, he was not at all displeased witli their being at war, i. 1. 8 (cf. *2iv6n; Ii %%0iro etiiru vii. 5. 7. See 372. a, 406). '11,- 'i^ovros tiroes \ftw Soph. Tr. 394 ( 375, 377. 2) Sometimes the Ace. occurs for another case with the Part., if its use is analo- gous to that of the Inf. ; as, 2e pit tu r^trtrovr' iiviff6u.t . . tij r'o-rev . ., in PI. Rep. 614 b. /?. ' A.yy'iX'kii Asoxj/XX/daf, OTI vix,euiv Tl ctu A.etx.ida.if/,o*ioi, xotl al-uv p\v Ti6va.va.i oxru H. Gr. iv. 3. 1. ' lf f&lv ffT^aT^yriirovTot i/u.1 . . fttjoiif vfj.au Xi- y'ij, ii$li{ a, T o * i ft ^ t iv etvTOv" iii. 1. 9. 'Kva^/yiy on, tt n ouTOf vetiSoi, avrot ay XafiTv Cyr. V. 4. 1. '\^yoj yaj, lu \ff6 OTI, us \l*.a.VTov 5 . ., ov ^vvetftivov Ib. 481 d. \\oui St o KXswy xai a &V[AO; Ixi? ** TavT froui.ivffop.tiot" i. 3. 20. (i.) T%e Infinitive. ^ 62O. I. The general rule for the construction of the Infinitive is the following : RULE XXX. The INFINITIVE is construed as a neuter noun (^ 445). Hence, (a) The Inf. may be the SUBJECT of any word which would agree with a noun ; whether appositive, adjective, article, pro- noun, or verb. () The Inf. may DEPEND upon any word which would govern a noun ; whether substantive, adjective, verb, adverb, or preposition, (c) The Inf. may be used, like a noun, to express a CIRCUMSTANCE ; particularly such as are denoted by the instrumental and modal Dat. ( 415), and by the Ace. of specification ( 437). Thus, !/y5/v auToTs rot.v ii. 4. 19. AW* ivixytriv ^aXs?v troi Soph. Ant. 233. Ot^sv oJav Itrr [= roiovrat irnv, Tav] axavo-eti, there is nothing [such as] like hearing, or, it is best to hear, Ar. Av. 966. OwSiv oiov o$tt.iris . . TW utiooi^stv ffT^dnvf^a, pretext for assembling an army, i. 1. 7. Il^a^affvv ffTo&Tzvuv ivi TOVS tj- ce.tov; H. Gr. iii. 5. 5. 'Avr/Tao-^s/v Sk av^ti; Kiy^Dvos ii. o. 17. "A^|avTSj rou d;am/v i. 4. 15. Tvj TOIK^' i->r'sff; \fjt.r,i oux. a|/ Soph. CEd. T. 776. KaXvftn TOV XKI'IIV i-riovrxs i. 6. 2 ( 347). Qisx, ixcvXvi fictfftXils TO Kvoov xt7v ii. 6. 22. 'HyaXXsro T&/ IzxTiKTav 'bvva.fffot.i, TCU irXu.ira.fftlui "^tv^ti Ib. 26. Mav^avs/v ya^ fixo/xty Soph. CEd. C. 12. ( \)ov<>u/u.ivi)i 011% '/ifna,; /u,avov, XXa KoCi TO xo.To.'X'tiriiv iii. 2. 19. A/a TO -TXXy; ^ ;y uWgiTets xett %iet TTIY iwifAiXticiv i. 9. 27. 'Ilj ^raXs^try TS ixetvoi ilrttroiv i. 1. 5. 'A^ioj'^avsf tifft%.0s7v ffTot,Tivfjt,a,Ti i. 2. 21. tE'aye/V tfs/vcj, a terrible fdlow to eat, vii. 3. 23. As/vj Xsys/v ii. 5. 15. 'O^av ^TW- l yvo; Jiv, xa/ T'/f &>s Tuootwo; ilirooZv Soph. El. 664. 'E-T/ y&o Ttx.7; vtzutn 'OKITTO'I ilfftv a.f*,vviirfot,i Th. iv. 10. 'Pa^Ta/ Si t; TO &}*a.irTiff6ai Id. vii. 67. Yltutrti 3i x/zoftot p,t7^ov iXvrftas xXvstv ^Esch. Ag. 266. Yl^iu Xtysiv Ib. 868. MtJ^o; XV^VTIOO; Xtyitv Eur. Iph. A. 318. X~I, WAV* ytiva.ixo; ovvixoc, ffT^etTriXee.Tt7v, TXX' oiiSsv, w xax/iTT Tif/,uot7v tpikoit Eur. Or. 718. OiV ofAoiov ovStv OUT Iffov $oTo7s, ?rXy ovofttiffeii, ' in nothing except name,' Eur. Ph. 501. NOTES. . Iii some cases it seems indifferent whether the Inf. is regarded as the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used impersonally. See 546. /3, y. /3. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. is often used, where the Inf. Pass. might have been used with reference to a nearer, more explicit, or more natu- ral subject ; as, TWrwv pxtrrois IvTuy^eivnv, the easiest things to meet with, Mem. i. b. 9. 'A-xoufizi fjiiv 'iff 00$ TKTIV xr^TJ, fatfiiviti 6 ovx. a,iva,ir0ai PI. Lach. 190 e. Ta TI * p,vt fixivrtiv iroifia., and ready to leave the light, Soph. El. 1079. To /u.iv votf aftov/tKi raXas Ib. 451. For other examples, see 620, 623. NOTE. The Inf. with rov as the Gen. of motive ( 372) is particularly frequent with a negative ; as, Toy p* nvas tiT>i Soph. (Ed. T. 1416. For other examples, see 620, 622. NOTE. The use of iTvai as the Inf. of specification, or the adverbial Inf., will be particularly remarked, (.) with ix&v, chiefly in negative sentences; (0.) with some adverbs and prepositions, followed f>y tln-ir ruses, cliiefly preceded by TO. Thus, OW'TI c-t/v^'xaj ^-IK^/^HV ttcut iTvai, nor wwld I prove faint * tna engagements, [as to the being willing] so far as di'pe.nih vpn-i my otvn will CH. 5 ] INFINITIVE. 387 Cyr. v. 2. 10. Ovtt |$v/y U*y iT/ y'^uret wa^i^u?, ' willingly,' Ib. ii. 2. 15. To vvy tivxt, as to the [now being] present state of affairs, for the present, iii. 2. 37. To ^i TJ?V S ? tiveti,for to-day, PL Crat. 396 d. To xra rovrov Tv/, as to Me situation of affairs with resfect to him, i. e. so far as regards him, i. 6. 9. To tvt rovroi; iivect, so far as iepends upon these, Lys. 180. 41. To l-ri r$Z; i7y< Th. iv. 28. 634. 3. PLEONASM AND ELLIPSIS. The Inf. (.) is sometimes redundant, and (/?.) is sometimes omitted. It (y.) not unfrequently depends jpon a word omitted, or implied in another verb, especially in indirect quotation. Thus, (.) Xa^v yo*t . . Tai/j 'iv^ixet Ivri av ^uva,ff6ot,i *oj>iv0wvKt [sc. i'^airav], few* tv I That I should suffer such things [is horrible], alas I JLsch. Eum. 837. r H fictcriXiu, xoregov Xtytiv . . n fftyeiv [sc. #gJ, Of xt\tuni\ \ Hdt. i. 88. r A ^D, TO xai Aot? E?V 'o6i'yfAa. roiovb' eifyos I Ah, the hearing the voice of such a man I Soph. Ph. 234. T5J; ru^ns I To ipl vy xX^ivrtt ltv rv%t7v ! My ill-luck! That I should happen now to have been summoned hither! Cyr. ii. 2. 3 ( 372. ). I1EI20. To S* ip.1 Ko^uv-n fjttvoi, roy a^X/ay / obov vri^itX6i7v ffretitet -Xe?y >5 %iXiet! ET. To ^' ^i xoAo/y srttSbp.ivov, vydl.s ixiXtua-t trvv uvrtf fr^ctriuttrffeti, he invited the exiles [to the serving] to serve with him, i. 2. 2. RULE XXXI. The SUBJECT OF THE INFINI TIVE is put in the Accusative ; as, *H/at/ . . dotiqvctt 01 reiurctg ra.% voXtis ftciXXov, r, Titrffct^i^vriv cig%uv etiiruv, be requested that these cities should be given to him, rather than that Tissuphernen should rule them, i. 1. 8. Kjvouvsutiv ouz iSou&ovro, VTO A.iju.av - ft ' ol ffoQoi, . . 3-tavi xeti ctvSc^ufov} rtjv xotviaviuv crvvi%tiv PI. Gorg. 507 6. GSJ7. REMARKS. 1. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. considered simply as such. If, on the other hand, (a.) the subject of an Inf. has a prior grammatical relation, it may be in any case which this prior rela- tion requires. If it is the same with the subject of the principal verb, it is seldom repeated, except for special emphasis or distinction ( 614. ); and is . then commonly repeated (as in other emphatic repetitions) in the same case (cf. 499). Not unfrequently (/J.) there is a mixture of constructions which may be referred to ellipsis or anacoluthon. Thus, . T Hx^ov ifi rivet ruv toxovvruv ffoQvv tiveti, I came to one of those who were thought to be wise, PI. Apol. 21 b. Talf ov^ivi i-rirgi-^/ ovra.s Kctittu sTva*, wht iL'ill permit no one to be bad, iii. 2. 31. Nt/v rot i^itrriv, u Sivotyuv, civ"Soi yt t'urSiti vii. 1. 21. '0^*oA.oy/V ovv iri^i I/At ei^ixos [= ci^ixav ro{ rout "EXAjf utixtii, pvrt ixiivov; xet'mv ret; eix'ietf iv. 4. 6. Nf4.etv, Si civ^gi; ^utourrcii, ret "bixctiet [SC. vfietf] ^/ntylffotffScti, Iv- tvp.ovp.'ivouf, I entreat you, Judges, [that you would vote] to vote what i right, reflecting, Lys. 118.2. Kaxovoyou ft.lv ya,(> \ov rgovrou, %%ovTct fjivt ^ttiovcti i. 2. 11. "Su/u,Gou^tutt ref SivoQ&vri, tXSov- ret tif AiX^oi/y [sc. Ixtivov] avctxamuircti rei B-iu, he advises Xenophon [that going to D. be should consult] to go to Delphi and consult the god, iii. 1. 5. "E$oi etvraTf, #gatpv>.ctxa,s x etrct riyytXXi ^iriyxuXufAivouf 1'tvee.i, . . xcti rotif re^oraf ifi- SiS^irfcti V. 2. 12. 07{ i% (>%*: ii'T^i^iv, Y! fictff^iuv u i iir iv i7v/, f) a, I rout r ff^l Ixavov; PI. Gorg. 492 b. T IL $, waif, oto?, or oao?), instead of a finite verb, or of the Inf. without a con- nective ; as, K) xosTa/va us liri TOV trtgov olvetGttivtiv, and were descending, so as to as- cend the second [= us dva,&a,7iv, that they might ascend, which is the reading of Dindorf and Kriiger], iii. 4. 25. c YVs>.aov TX iifAfrt^ov vrarigot t*.ives ttvov, 'in the beginning,' Th. iv. 64. Touf -re*.. Xi*f . . euro (^^afv^ei^au a.fea.p'ivovs, the most [beginning with] and particular- ly Thrasymac/itis, PI. Rep. 498 c. TiXiurZ* t%*).uraivi iv. 5. 16 ( 457. a). CH. 5.] PARTICIPLE. 391 'Avvi7s 'i%w ; [Holding on upon what shoes are you trifling?] What shoes are you trifling so pertina- ciously about? PL Gorg. 490 e. "E%uv *%*>* Id. Gorg. 497 a; Ar. Ran. 512. TJ wrTf t%u ntf rjy dvgair ; Ar. Nub. 509. Ti 2%r PI. Phaedr. 236 e. G33. 3. The Complementary Part, is particularly fre quent with verbs of sensation, of mental state and action, of showing and informing, of appearance and discovery , of con- cealment and chance, of conduct, and success, of permission and endurance, of commencement and continuance, of weariness and cessation, of anticipation and omission. Thus, i/^ay b K/X/x/a aW, / d^pnrt without his knowledge, i. 3. 17. "Ofu; ptt} Xa- ^>j; ffiaiiTov iyvouv, that you may not be unconsciously ignorant, Mem. iii. 5. 23. "Ea-r* v Xa.6tafjt.iii [sc. ^aj awrat(f] u^a?raT/ yjvo^eva^, till insensibly we become water-drinkers, Cyr. vi. 2. 29. ITa^y frwy^avi, happened [being] to ie present, i. 1. 2. C 0o; uv xugi7 Eur. Ale. 954. 'A%txi7%ovris, you do wrong in beginning war, Th. i. 53. 'ExXsj(ra/v . . sXovref Eur. Or. 1212. C H -raX/j ectiTo7s ovx, IftT^i-^n vetf>a.aivov6a.vovffi- iw< va/ cix^M ytvoftivot TOUS x'o'b.if&iovs iii. 4. 49. Oi* i 'ArT.xijy iraXi^ttay, xott . . ^xov, they no sooner heard of the war wound At' 392 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK 111. tica than they came, Isocr. 58 b. Owriwwv va,7$as evxir ccv , that he may learn that he is a schemer, vEsch. Pr. 61. Tva/ rgitpuv >u/u.tvos, I was sated with passion, Soph. CEd. C. 768. ArjXa? jj"v Ktiu^.m i. 2. 11. KaTXoi yiyvavrui T^off-roiou- ptvo, pi, ttiiv*,, ill'oTigli otfiv PI. Apol. 23 d. See 551, 614. <. ^ G35. 4. Prospective Part. This appears chiefly in the Fut. Part, denoting purpose, commonly translated by the Inf. (^ 583. a, 618. 1). 636. 5. The Definitive Part, is equivalent to a relative pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently translated by these. ' It is often used substantively, and may not unfrequenlly be translated by a noun. It occurs chiefly with the article, but sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. Thus, AZ6if i a f>y*ifo/Atvot elicits irriti, and again there will be no one who wih guide us, ii. 4. 5. O/ fcr/MX yivivtri) Apol. 20. 2fvyyv . . Tout -rg9fft).0ovrs O.VTV xui ruv aXXcjy rav /SawXfl^tvaK, ' and of the rest [him that wished] any one that wished,' i. 3. 9. *H &ttft&nu Xy/*tv vyx>), the so-called necessity Of Diomed, PI. Rep. 493 d. "Iv', a/Wif \K\~vns t%H Ji/'va^/* T*)X u$ix.ii' rfnittniit/. Mnr. Ph. 870. lliTo*0i*ui . . itt A. ^, to htive suffered [what t;mls to harm] OH. O.J PARTlLlKl.fi. 393 // itijtiri/, Soph. CEd. T. 510. A;as; ^;w iv. 4. 18. TayVa iTf ty%oft&i with the Fut. Part, forms a more immediate Fut. The Part, of a verb of motion with o1^ofjt.an is a stronger form of expres- sion for the simple verb, (b) The substantive verb is sometimes omitted ( 547); as, As^ay^ey' [sc. le-rJy], us toixt, T'yJs xa.TSa.viiv Soph. Ant. 576. ^638. III. A Part, with its subject, or an impersonal Part. ( 617), often forms so distinct a clause, that it is said (though not in the strictest sense of the term, 343. N.) to be put absolute. This occurs most frequently in the Gen., and, after this, in the Ace. The far less frequent instances in which the Nom. and Dat. are used in the same way, may be commonly referred at once to anacoluthon, or other construc- tions already mentioned ( 344, 401, 410, 420). The Gen. and Ace. absolute may also be referred, though often less di- rectly, to the Gen. and Ace. of time ( 378, 439) ; and as, in this use, a Part, and substantive commonly denote an event, but an impersonal Part, a continued state, the following general rule has arisen, which is not, however, without exception. RULE XXXII. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTAN- 394 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III. TIVE are put absolute in the Genitive ; an IMPER- SONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative ; as, [NoTE. Among the following examples of the rule have been inserted some exceptions, for the sake of comparison.] Tavro Ji Xtyovros KUTOV, vrKgvvrui tt.s, nor, although there were many upon the other side, could any one come to their assistance, if the bridge were destroyed, ii. 4. 20. 2/rsv $t eV/XsXa/sraraf, o't'vou $t [*.?&' If^utviffSui ra.gov, it-ro oi irovuv WaXXdwv offxyo^iutivruv V. 8. 3. 'Ey xctXu vfaga.'rufcov trtylffi %uftetXt7v) xat x"etvr fgoirvx./)*, when it is no interest of ours, Id. iv. 95 ' Afttportoais filv ^oxouv civtt%ugi7v, . . KV^ufiv 5i ou$iv . . ofr)vix,K X>& o^fj.'Ho'tia.i, VUX.TO; Tt ifiytvoftivris Ib. 125. Aiboyft'-vov di Kuvobou, uffTi "Sietvavftet^i7v Id. viii. 79. Ao|v- ros 1>\ TOUTOU H. Gr. i. 1. 36. Aa|rv e xat rovreuv Ib. V. 2. 24. Aa|vTas 5t ra.vret X,KI ri^et.vSivra, Ib. iii. 2. 19. Ao|av 5* rotvra. [sc. -rei^v, or the sing. and plur. joined, see 450, 451, 549^, anrf v V. 8. 13. Ovxin uv ovroi xXtwrat/ir/* ipyfcrtt, XX* eSt etlroi JtAtpGoivirt %ti(>iv * v/u.t7( ret roiiTuv fAifftfotpogouvrif, aXX* aw TOV- TU1 TO. VfJt,'iTl^Ot, xXfTTflVTWy IjVS. 178. 38. 2. The substantive is sometimes omitted, and sometimes, though loss fre- qvcntly, the Part, of the substantive verb (cf. 547) ; as, 'Evrsi/^sv uvi7*, u; iftav ftovns -riXaf Soph. CEd. C. 83. Tlj iiQnynrov rivet Id. Oikl. T. 1260. 3. The use of the Ace. for the Gen. absolute chiefly occurs after us ( 640^ or when the subject is a neuter adjective (cf. 432. 2). CH. 5.] PARTICIPLE. 64 O. IV. A Part., whether absolute or dependent, is often preceded by ug (or a similar particle of special appli- cation), chiefly to mark it as subjective, i. e. as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement of some one, whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part. thus construed often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf. Thus, . ., us iTiGovXtvavros Ttorottpi/jvous, he gave command [as he would give command, T. plotting] a* if Tissaphernes were plotting, or under pretence that T. was plotting, i. 1. 6. *ltovro afoXuXiveti, us IxXuxvias rvt x-oXtas, they thought they were lost, inasmuch as the city was taken, vii. 1. 19. '\\KtXiutrt . ., us tig Utifioxs fiauXofAivo; ffrgetrtvttrdoii, us Tgayftoiruv vra,ot%ov- ruv n.ttffj$uv i. 1. 11. 'llf tftov oSv iovros, . . ouru rjv yvupnv t%irt, [as if then I should go, so have your opinion] be assured, then, that I shall go, i. 3. 6. "EXsys Sf(>ovri%i ^ Eur. Med. 1311. 2r